KR20160091402A - Virtual and augmented reality systems and methods - Google Patents

Abstract

Configurations for providing virtual and augmented reality experiences to users are disclosed. The system includes an image-generating source for providing the user with one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner, an optical modulator configured to transmit light associated with one or more frames of image data, And a first reflector of the plurality of reflectors reflects transmitted light associated with a first frame of image data to a first eye on the eye of the user, Angle and the second reflector reflects the transmitted light associated with the second frame of image data to the user's eye at a second angle.

Description

[0001] VIRTUAL AND AUGMENTED REALITY SYSTEMS AND METHODS [0002]

[0001] The present disclosure relates to virtual and augmented reality imaging and visualization systems.

[0002] Modern computing and display technologies enable the development of systems for so-called "virtual reality" or "augmented reality" experiences, wherein the digitally reproduced images or portions are displayed as if they were real, To the user in a way that can be done. A virtual reality, or "VR" scenario, typically involves the provision of digital or virtual image information without transparency to other real-world visual input inputs; The augmented reality, or "AR" scenario, typically involves provision of digital or virtual image information as an enhancement to the visualization of the real world around the user. 1, an augmented reality scene 4 is depicted wherein a user of the AR technology is a real-world park that features people in the background, trees, buildings, and a concrete platform 1120, Look at location (6). In addition to these items, a user of the AR technology may also be able to view the robot statue 1110 standing on the real-world platform 1120 and the flying cartoon-like avatar character 2 appearing personified of the amber pen " ", But these elements (2,1110) do not exist in the real world. As you know, the human visual cognitive system is very complex and it is difficult to create a VR or AR technology that enables a comfortable, natural feel, rich presentation of virtual image elements between different virtual or real world imagery elements to be.

[0003] 2A, stereoscopic wearable spectacle 8 type configurations are generally configured to display images with slightly different element representations such that the three-dimensional view is perceived by the human visual system. , 12). Such configurations have been found to be uncomfortable for many users due to mismatches between vergence and accommodation that must be overcome to recognize images in 3-dimensions; Indeed, some users can not tolerate stereo configurations. Figure 2B illustrates another stereoscopic wearable glasses 14 type configuration featuring two front-orientation cameras 16,18 configured to capture images for augmented reality presentation to the user via stereoscopic displays. The positions of the cameras 16, 18 and displays generally block the user's natural field of view when the glasses 14 are mounted on the user's head.

[0004] 2C, the augmented reality configuration 20 also features a visualization module 26 that is shown and coupled to the eyeglass frame 24 that holds conventional spectacle lenses 22. The user can view at least a partially uninterrupted view of the real world with such a system and has a small display 28 in which the digital image only can be provided in an AR configuration in one eye (for monocular AR representation). 2d features an arrangement in which the visualization module 32 is coupled to the cap or helmet 30 and can be configured to provide the user with a monocular enhanced digital imagery via a small display 34. [ Figure 2e illustrates how frame 36 may be used in a manner similar to eyeglass coupling so that visualization module 38 can be utilized to capture images and also provide a monocular enhancement digital image- Other similar configurations that can be coupled to the user's head are illustrated. Such a configuration is available from Google, Inc. of Mountain View, California under the trade name GoogleGlass (RTM). Neither of these configurations is rich, bi-directional, and optimally suited to provide a three-dimensional augmented reality experience in a way that is comfortable and maximally available to the user, partly because conventional systems do not provide visualization Because it fails to deal with some of the basic aspects of the human cognitive system, including the interaction of the photoreceptors of the retina and the brain to produce cognition.

[0005] 3, a simplified cross-sectional view of the human eye is depicted and includes a cornea 42, an iris 44, a lens- or "ocular lens" 46, a sclera, A choroid layer 50, a macula 52, a retina 54, and an optic nerve passageway 56 to the brain. The macula is the center of the retina and the macula is used to see the appropriate detail; At the center of the macula is the retina, referred to as the "fovea ", which is utilized for superficial details and includes more photoreceptors (approximately 120 cones per angle of view) than any other part of the retina . The human visual system is not a passive sensor type system; And is configured to actively scan the environment. In a manner somewhat analogous to the use of a flatbed scanner to capture an image, or the use of a finger to read a braille from a paper, the light receptors in the eye are more likely to respond constantly to stimuli of a certain state Acting in response to changes in stimulation. Thus, the motion can be used to provide photoreceptor information to the brain (movement of a linear scanner array across a piece of paper with a flatbed scanner, or movement of a finger across imprinted braille words on a piece of paper) As well. Indeed, experiments using substances such as cobra poisons used to paralyze the muscles of the eye showed that when a human subject is positioned with his eyes left, he will experience blindness to see a static scene with poison-induced paralysis of the eyes . In other words, without changes in stimulation, photoreceptors experience blindness without providing input to the brain. It is believed that this is at least one reason that normal human eyes can be observed moving up and down, or dither, called left or right, called microsaccades.

[0006] As noted above, the center of the retina contains a larger density of photoreceptors, and humans generally have a perception that they have high resolution visualization capabilities through their field of view, whereas humans are generally, in fact, With a persistent memory of the recently captured high resolution information, with only a small high resolution center that mechanically sweeps around a section. In a somewhat similar way, the ciliary muscles can act on the lens in such a way that the focal distance control mechanism of the eye (the ciliary interconnected fibers, which are tightened by ciliary relaxation, progressively flatten the lens for longer focal lengths) Ciliary contraction loosens the ciliary connecting fibers, which causes the lens to have a more rounded geometry with respect to closer focus lengths) is "optically coupled " to both the near side and the far side of the targeted focal length Dither back and forth to approximately 1/4 to 1/2 diopter to periodically induce a small amount called " dioptric blur " This is exploited by the brain's perspective control circuitry as a periodic negative feedback that helps to constantly modify the course and keep the retinal image of the examined object approximately in focus.

[0007] The visualization center of the brain also obtains valuable cognitive information from the movements of both eyes and the components of both eyes on each other. Converging movements of the two eyes with respect to each other (i.e., rolling motions of the pupils toward and away from each other to converge the eyes' gaze to stare an object) "). Under normal conditions, the focus change of the eyes of the eyes, or the perspective adjustments of the eyes, to focus objects at different distances, automatically changes the matching change to converge to the same distance under a relationship known as " . Similarly, a change in convergence will trigger a matching change in perspective control under normal conditions. Work on such reflections as doing most conventional stereoscopic AR or VR configurations is known to produce eye fatigue, headaches, or other forms of discomfort for users.

[0008] The movement of the head housing the eyes also has a key effect on the visualization of objects. Humans move their heads to visualize the world around them; They are often in a fairly constant state of repositioning and reorienting the head in relation to the object of interest. In addition, most people prefer to move their heads when their eyes need to move more than about 20 degrees from the center to focus on a particular object (i.e., people usually use the "corner of the eye" I like to see things in. Humans also typically scan or move their heads in relation to sounds to improve audio signal capture and utilize the ears' geometry about the head. The human visual system obtains strong depth clues from what is referred to as "head movement parallax " associated with the relative motion of objects at different distances as a function of head motion and eye convergence distance (i.e., The more distant items from the object move in the same direction as the head; the front items of the object will move in the opposite direction of the head movement; these are very important clues that things are in a spatial environment with respect to humans - perhaps as powerful as stereoscopic). Head movement is also used to navigate objects, of course.

[0009] In addition, head and eye movements cooperate with something called "vestibulo-ocular reflex" that stabilizes image information about the retina during head rotations, so that object image information is about centered on the retina maintain. In response to head spinning, the eyes are rotated reflexively and proportionally in the opposite direction to maintain a stable anchorage to the object. As a result of this reward relationship, many humans can read a book by shaking their heads up and down (thankfully, if a book is viewed at the same rate as a roughly static head, the same thing is generally not true - A person will not be able to read a moving book; vestibular reflexes are not usually developed for hand movements but for head and eye movements). This paradigm can be important for augmented reality systems because the user's head movements can be relatively directly associated with eye movements and the system will preferably be ready to work with this relationship.

[0010] Indeed, it may be desirable to place digital content (e. G., A flat / flat virtual emulsification object provided to enhance 3-D content, such as an object in virtual imagery provided to increase the real world view of a room, or 2-D content, When these various relationships are given, design choices can be made to control the behavior of objects. For example, a 2-D emulsified object can be head-centered, in which case the object moves around the user's head (e.g., the GoogleGlass approach); Or the object may be world-centered and in this case the object may be provided as if it were part of a real world coordinate system so that the user can move his head or eyes without moving the position of the object in relation to the real world.

[0011] Therefore, when placing virtual content in the augmented reality world provided by the augmented reality system, the object can be moved around the world center (the user can move his body, head and eyes around it without changing his position about the real world object So that the virtual object is in the real world position); The body, or torso, the center, in this case the hypothetical element, can be fixed relative to the torso of the user so that the user can move his head or eyes without moving the object, but not the torso motions; The head center, in this case the displayed object (and / or the display itself) may be moved according to head movements, as described above with reference to GoogleGlass; Or as an eye center as in a "foveated display" configuration, as described below, wherein the content flickers as a function of what the eye position is.

[0012] By means of world-centric configurations, accurate head pose measurements, accurate representation and / or measurement of real-world objects and user-perimeter geometries, low-latency, dynamic rendering in augmented reality displays as a function of head pose, and general It may be desirable to have inputs such as a low-latency display.

[0013] The systems and techniques described herein are configured to operate in a conventional human visual configuration to process these difficulties.

[0014] Embodiments of the present invention are directed to devices, systems and methods for enabling virtual and / or augmented reality interaction with one or more users. In an aspect, a system for displaying virtual content is disclosed.

[0015] In one or more embodiments, the system comprises: a light source for multiplexing one or more of the light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner; And an array of reflectors for receiving the one or more light patterns and variably converging the light towards the exit pupil.

[0016] In one or more embodiments, the system includes an image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner, a light source for transmitting light associated with one or more frames of the image data A substrate for directing image information to a user's eye, the substrate housing a plurality of reflectors, a reflector for reflecting light associated with a first frame of image data to the user eye at a first angle, A first reflector of the plurality of reflectors and a second reflector of the plurality of reflectors for reflecting light associated with a second frame of the image data to the user eye at a second angle.

[0017] The angle of reflection of the plurality of reflectors is variable in one or more embodiments. The reflectors are switchable in one or more embodiments. The plurality of reflectors may be electronically optically active in one or more embodiments. The refractive index of the plurality of reflectors may be varied to match the index of refraction of the substrate in one or more embodiments. In an alternate embodiment, the system may also include a high-frequency gating layer configurable to be disposed between the substrate and the user eye, wherein the high-frequency gating layer has a controllably moveable aperture. The aperture of the high-frequency gating layer is moved in such a way that the image data is selectively transmitted only through the light reflected through the aperture in one or more embodiments. One or more of the reflectors of the transmit beam splitter substrate may be blocked by a high-frequency gating layer. The aperture may be an LCD aperture in one or more embodiments. The apertures may be MEMs arrays in one or more embodiments. The first angle may be equal to the second angle in one or more embodiments. The first angle may be different from the second angle in one or more embodiments.

[0018] In one or more embodiments, the system may further include a first lens to steer a set of rays through the nodal point to the user's eye. The first lens may be arranged on the substrate so as to allow the set of rays exiting the first reflector to pass through the first lens before reaching the user eye in one or more embodiments, 1 reflector.

[0019] The system may further comprise a second lens for compensating for the first lens, wherein the second lens is arranged on the substrate in one or more embodiments and on opposite sides of the side on which the first lens is disposed Side, thereby leading to a zero magnification.

[0020] The first one of the plurality of reflectors may be a curved reflective surface to collect a set of rays associated with the image data in one or more embodiments into a single output point prior to being transmitted to the user eye . The curved reflector may be a parabolic reflector in one or more embodiments. The curved reflector may be an elliptical reflector in one or more embodiments.

[0021] In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content includes providing one or more light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner, and displaying one or more of the image data Reflecting the one or more of the light patterns associated with the frames of the transmitted beam into an exit pupil through a transmissive beam splitter, the transmissive beam splitter having a plurality of reflectors for variably converging light toward the exit pupil .

[0022] The angle of reflection of the plurality of reflectors may be variable in one or more embodiments. The reflectors may be switchable in one or more embodiments. The plurality of reflectors may be electronically optically active in one or more embodiments. The refractive index of the plurality of reflectors may be varied to match the index of refraction of the substrate in one or more embodiments. In an alternate embodiment, the system may also include a high-frequency gating layer configured to be disposed between the substrate and the user's eye, the high-frequency gating layer having a controllably moveable aperture. The aperture of the high-frequency gating layer may be moved in a manner such that, in one or more embodiments, the image data is selectively transmitted only through the light reflected through the aperture. One or more reflectors of the transmissive beam splitter substrate may be blocked by the high-frequency gating layer. The aperture may be an LCD aperture in one or more embodiments. The apertures may be MEMs arrays in one or more embodiments. The first angle may be equal to the second angle in one or more embodiments. The first angle may be different from the second angle in one or more embodiments.

[0023] In one or more embodiments, the system may further comprise a first lens for steer- ing the set of rays through the nodal point to the user's eye. The first lens may be arranged on the substrate and in front of the first reflector so as to allow the set of rays exiting the reflector in one or more embodiments to pass through the first lens before reaching the user eye, May be configurable to be deployed.

[0024] The system may further comprise a second lens for compensating for the first lens, wherein the second lens is arranged on the substrate in one or more embodiments and on opposite sides of the side on which the first lens is disposed Side, thereby leading to a zero magnification.

[0025] The first one of the plurality of reflectors may be a curved reflective surface to collect a set of rays associated with the image data in one or more embodiments into a single output point prior to being transmitted to the user eye . The curved reflector may be a parabolic reflector in one or more embodiments. The curved reflector may be an elliptical reflector in one or more embodiments.

[0026] In one or more embodiments, the wavefront may be collimated. In one or more embodiments, the wavefront may be curved. The collimated wavefront may be perceived as an infinite depth plane in some embodiments. Curved wavefronts can be perceived as depth planes closer to optical infinity in some embodiments.

[0027] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes a light source for multiplexing one or more of the light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner, Wherein the array of reflectors is oriented at a particular angle and includes a plurality of optical elements coupled to the array of reflectors for variably converging the light patterns toward the exit pupil do.

[0028] In one or more embodiments, the array of reflectors may be separate from the optical elements in one or more embodiments. The array of reflectors may comprise planar mirrors in one or more embodiments. The optical elements may be, in one or more embodiments, lenslets that are coupled to the array of reflectors. One or more of the reflectors of the array of reflectors may be curved in one or more embodiments. The optical elements may be integrated into the array of reflectors. The plurality of optical elements may extend the exit pupil in one or more embodiments.

[0029] The system may further comprise a first lens for manipulating a set of rays to the user's eye through a nodal point, the first lens having a set of rays exiting the reflector in one or more embodiments And may be configured to be disposed on the substrate and on the front surface of the first reflector so as to pass through the first lens before reaching the user eye.

[0030] The system may further comprise a second lens for compensating for the first lens, wherein the second lens is arranged on the substrate in one or more embodiments and on opposite sides of the side on which the first lens is disposed Side, thereby leading to a zero magnification. The plurality of reflectors may include wavelength-selective reflectors in one or more embodiments. The plurality of reflectors may comprise semiconducting mirrors in one or more embodiments. The plurality of optical elements may comprise refractive lenses. The plurality of optical elements may comprise a diffractive lens in one or more embodiments. Curved reflectors may include wavelength-length selective notch filters in one or more embodiments.

[0031] In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content to a user includes providing one or more light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner, Reflecting the one or more of the optical patterns associated with frames of greater than or greater than the transmitted pupil through the transmissive beam splitter into the exit pupil, the transmissive beam splitter having a plurality of reflectors for variably converging light toward the exit pupil And expanding the exit pupil through a plurality of optical elements coupled to the plurality of reflectors of the transmissive beam splitter.

[0032] In one or more embodiments, the array of reflectors may be separate from the optical elements. The array of reflectors in one or more embodiments includes planar mirrors. The optical elements may be lenslets that are coupled to the array of reflectors in one or more embodiments.

[0033] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes a light source for multiplexing one or more of the light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner, A variable focus element (VFE) coupled to the waveguide for receiving at least a portion of the optical patterns to a second focus level, .

[0034] In one or more embodiments, the VFE is telecentric in one or more embodiments. VFE is non-telecentric in one or more embodiments. The system further includes, in one or more embodiments, a compensation lens to ensure that the view of the user of the outside world is not distorted. A plurality of frames are provided to the user at a high frequency to allow the user to perceive the frames as part of a single coherent scene, And changes from one frame to the second frame. The light source is a scanning optical display, and the VFE changes focus in a line-by-line manner in one or more embodiments. The light source is a scanning optical display, and the VFE alters the focus in a pixel-by-pixel manner in one or more embodiments.

[0035] The VFE is a diffractive lens in one or more embodiments. VFE is a refractive lens in one or more embodiments. The VFE is a reflective mirror in one or more embodiments. The reflective mirror is opaque in one or more embodiments. The reflective mirror is partially reflective in one or more embodiments. The system further includes a perspective adjustment module for tracking accommodation of the user's eyes, wherein the VFE is configured to adjust the focus of the light patterns based, at least in part, on the perspective adjustment of the user eyes in one or more embodiments, .

[0036] In yet another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes: a light source for multiplexing one or more of the light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner; A waveguide for receiving one or more of the light patterns and converging the light patterns to a first focus; And a variable focus element (VFE) coupled to the waveguide to converge at least a portion of the light patterns to a second focus, wherein the VFE is integrated into the waveguide.

[0037] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes: a light source for multiplexing one or more of the light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner; A waveguide for receiving one or more of the light patterns and for converging the light patterns to a first focus; And a variable focus element (VFE) coupled to the waveguide for converging at least a portion of the light patterns to a second focus, wherein the VFE is separated from the waveguide.

[0038] In another aspect, a method for displaying virtual content to a user includes providing one or more light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data; Converging one or more of the optical patterns associated with one or more frames of image data to a first focus through a waveguide; And modifying a first focus of light through the variable focus element (VFE) to produce a wavefront of the second focus.

[0039] In one or more embodiments, the VFE is separated from the waveguide. In one or more embodiments, the VFE is integrated into the waveguide. In one or more embodiments, one or more frames of image data are provided in a time-sequential manner. In one or more embodiments, the VFE modifies the focus of one or more frames of image data on a frame-by-frame basis. In one or more embodiments, the VFE modifies the focus of one or more frames of image data on a pixel-by-pixel basis. In one or more embodiments, the VFE modifies the first focus to produce a wavefront with a third focus, and the second focus is different from the third focus. In one or more embodiments, the wavefront of the second focus is recognized by the user as coming from a specific depth plane.

[0040] In some embodiments, a plurality of frames are provided to the user in a high-frequency manner to allow the user to perceive the plurality of frames as part of a single coherent scene, and the VFE changes focus from the first frame to the second frame . The light source is a scanning optical display, and in one or more embodiments, the VFE alters the focus in a line-by-line manner.

[0041] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes: a plurality of waveguides for receiving light rays associated with image data and for transmitting light rays toward user eyes, the plurality of waveguides being arranged in a stack Stacked; A first lens coupled to a first one of the plurality of waveguides for modifying the rays transmitted from the first waveguide, thereby transmitting rays having a first wavefront curvature; And a second lens coupled to a second one of the plurality of waveguides for modifying the rays transmitted from the second waveguide, thereby transmitting rays having a second wavefront curvature, wherein the first lens coupled to the first waveguide, And the second lens coupled to the second waveguide are horizontally stacked in a direction facing the user's eye.

[0042] In one or more embodiments, the first wavefront curvature is different from the second wavefront curvature. In one or more embodiments, the system further includes a third waveguide of the plurality of waveguides for communicating the collimated light to the user's eye to allow the user to perceive the image data as coming from an optical infinite plane do. In one or more embodiments, the waveguide is configured to transmit collimated light to the lenses.

[0043] In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a compensating lens layer to compensate for the aggregate power of the lenses stacked in a direction facing the user's eyes, do. In one or more embodiments, the waveguide includes a plurality of reflectors configurable to reflect the rays of light injected into the waveguide towards the user eye.

[0044] In one or more embodiments, the waveguide is electro-active. In one or more embodiments, the waveguide is switchable. In one or more embodiments, the rays having a first wavefront curvature and the rays having a second wavefront curvature are simultaneously transmitted. In one or more embodiments, light rays having a first wavefront curvature and light rays having a second wavefront curvature are sequentially transmitted. In one or more embodiments, the second wavefront curvature corresponds to a margin of the first wavefront curvature, thereby providing a focal range that the user can adjust for perspective. In one or more embodiments, the system further includes a perspective adjustment module for tracking perspective adjustments of user eyes, wherein the VFE changes the focus of the light patterns based at least in part on the perspective adjustment of the user eyes .

[0045] In yet another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes: a light source for multiplexing one or more of the light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner; A plurality of waveguides for receiving one or more of the light patterns and for converging light into the exit pupil, the plurality of waveguides being stacked along the z-axis and away from the user's line of sight; And at least one optical element coupled to the stacked waveguides to modify the focus of the light transmitted by the plurality of waveguides.

[0046] In one or more embodiments, a waveguide of the plurality of waveguides includes a waveguide for dispersing the projected light over its length, and a lens for modifying the light in such a way that the wavefront curvature is generated And the generated wavefront curvature corresponds to the focal plane when viewed by the user.

[0047] In one or more embodiments, a waveguide of the plurality of waveguides includes a diffractive optical element (DOE). In one or more embodiments, the DOE is switchable between on and off states. In one or more embodiments, a waveguide of the plurality of waveguides comprises a refractive lens. In one or more embodiments, one of the plurality of waveguides comprises a Fresnel zone plate. In one or more embodiments, a waveguide of a plurality of waveguides comprises a substrate guided optics (SGO) element. In one or more embodiments, the waveguide is switchable between on and off states. In one or more embodiments, the waveguide is static. In one or more embodiments, the first frame of image data and the second frame of image data are simultaneously transmitted to the user's eyes. In one or more embodiments, a first frame of image data and a second frame of image data are sequentially transmitted to the user's eyes.

[0048] In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a plurality of angled reflectors for transmitting light to the user's eye, wherein the first waveguide component and the second waveguide component are arranged to direct light to one or more angles To reflectors. In one or more embodiments, the system further includes a beam-dispersing optical waveguide, wherein the beam-dispersing optical waveguide is coupled to the waveguide assembly, and wherein the beam-dispersing optical waveguide diffuses the projected light across the waveguide assembly By being configurable, the rays injected into the beam-dispersing optical waveguide are replicated and injected into the waveguide components of the waveguide assembly.

[0049] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes: an image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner; An optical modulator for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data; And a waveguide assembly for receiving the projected light and delivering light towards the user eye, wherein the waveguide assembly includes at least a first frame of image data to allow light associated with the first frame of image data to be recognized as coming from the first focal plane A first waveguide component configurable to modify light and a second waveguide component configurable to modify the light to cause light associated with a second frame of image data to be recognized as coming from a second focal plane, The component and the second waveguide component are stacked along the z-axis in front of the user's eyes.

[0050] In some embodiments, the waveguide component of the waveguide assembly includes a waveguide for dispersing the projected light over its length, and a lens for modifying the light in such a way that the wavefront curvature is generated, Corresponds to the focal plane when viewed by the user. In one or more embodiments, the waveguide component of the waveguide assembly includes a diffractive optical element (DOE).

[0051] In one or more embodiments, the DOE is switchable between on and off states. In one or more embodiments, the waveguide component of the waveguide assembly comprises a refractive lens. In one or more embodiments, the waveguide component of the waveguide assembly includes a Fresnel zone plate. In one or more embodiments, the first frame of image data and the second frame of image data are simultaneously transmitted to the user's eyes. In one or more embodiments, a first frame of image data and a second frame of image data are sequentially transmitted to the user's eyes.

[0052] In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a plurality of angled reflectors for transmitting light to the user's eye, wherein the first waveguide component and the second waveguide component are arranged to direct light to one or more angles To reflectors. In one or more embodiments, the system further includes a beam-dispersing optical waveguide, wherein the beam-dispersing optical waveguide is coupled to the waveguide assembly, and wherein the beam-dispersing optical waveguide diffuses the projected light across the waveguide assembly By being configurable, the rays injected into the beam-dispersing optical waveguide are replicated and injected into the waveguide components of the waveguide assembly.

[0053] The waveguide component of the waveguide assembly includes a reflector that is configurable to reflect the projected light at a desired angle toward the user's eye. In one or more embodiments, the first waveguide component includes a first reflector configured to reflect the projected light at a first angle, and the second waveguide component reflects the projected light at a second angle And a second reflector. In one or more embodiments, the first reflector is staggered with respect to the second reflector, thereby extending the view of the image when viewed by the user.

[0054] In one or more embodiments, the reflectors of the waveguide components are positioned in a manner to form a continuous curved reflective surface across the waveguide assembly. In one or more embodiments, the continuous curved reflective surface comprises a parabolic curve. In one or more embodiments, the continuous curved reflective surface comprises an elliptic curve.

[0055] In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content to a user includes transmitting rays associated with a first frame of image data to a user via a first waveguide, wherein the rays have a first wavefront curvature; And transmitting the beams associated with a second frame of image data to a user via a second waveguide, wherein the beams have a second wavefront curvature, wherein the first waveguide and the second waveguide have z- It is stacked along the axis.

[0056] In one or more embodiments, the first wavefront curvature and the second wavefront curvature are delivered simultaneously. In one or more embodiments, the first wavefront curvature and the second wavefront curvature are sequentially transmitted. In one or more embodiments, the first and second wavefront curvatures are perceived by the user as first and second depth planes. In one or more embodiments, the first and second waveguides are coupled to one or more optical elements. In one or more embodiments, the method may further comprise compensating for the effect of one or more of the optical elements through a compensating lens.

[0057] In one or more embodiments, the method includes determining perspective adjustment of user eyes; And conveying the rays through at least one of the first and second waveguides based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment.

[0058] In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content to a user includes: determining perspective adjustment of user eyes; Transmitting light rays having a first wavefront curvature based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment through a first waveguide of a stack of waveguides, the first wavefront curvature corresponding to a determined focal length of the perspective adjustment; And transmitting the rays having a second wavefront curvature through a second waveguide of the stack of waveguides, wherein the second wavefront curvature is associated with a predetermined margin of focal distance of the determined perspective adjustment.

[0059] In one or more embodiments, the margin is a positive margin. In one or more embodiments, the margin is a negative margin. In one or more embodiments, the second waveguide increases the focus range the user can adjust for perspective. In one or more embodiments, the first waveguide is coupled to a variable focus element (VFE), and the VFE alters the focus at which the waveguide focuses the beams. In one or more embodiments, the focus is changed based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment of the user's eyes. In one or more embodiments, the first wavefront curvature and the second wavefront curvature are delivered simultaneously.

[0060] In one or more embodiments, the first and second wavefront curvatures are perceived by the user as first and second depth planes. In one or more embodiments, the waveguide is a diffractive optical element (DOE). In one or more embodiments, the waveguide is a substrate guided optic (SGO). In one or more embodiments, the first and second waveguides are switchable. In one or more embodiments, the waveguide comprises one or more switchable elements.

[0061] In yet another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes: an image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner; A display assembly for projecting light rays associated with one or more frames of image data, the display assembly comprising: a first display element corresponding to a first frame-rate and a first bit depth; and a second display element corresponding to a second frame- A second display element corresponding to a 2-bit depth; And a variable focus element (VFE) that is configurable to change the focus of the projected light and transmit light to the user's eye.

[0062] In one or more embodiments, the first frame-rate is higher than the second frame-rate and the first bit depth is lower than the second bit depth. In one or more embodiments, the first display element is a DLP projection system. In one or more embodiments, the second display element is a liquid crystal display (LCD). In one or more embodiments, the first display element projects light to a subset of the second display element so that the periphery of the LCD has a constant illumination. In one or more embodiments, only the light transmitted from the first display element is focused through the VFE.

[0063] In one or more embodiments, the VFE is optically conjugated to the exit pupil to allow the focus of the projected light to change without affecting the magnification of the image data. In one or more embodiments, the first display element is a DLP, the second display element is an LCD, the DLP has a low resolution, and the LCD has a high resolution. In one or more embodiments, the intensity of the backlight is varied over time to match the brightness of the sub-images projected by the first display element such that the frame rate of the first display element .

[0064] In one or more embodiments, the VFE is configurable to change the focus of the projected light on a frame-by-frame basis. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises software for compensating for optical magnification associated with the operation of the VFE. In one or more embodiments, the image-generating source generates slices of a particular image that produce a three-dimensional volume of the object when projected together or sequentially. In one or more embodiments, the DLP is operated in a binary mode. In one or more embodiments, the DLP is operated in a grayscale mode.

[0065] In one or more embodiments, the VFE modifies the projected light so that the first frame is recognized as coming from the first focal plane and the second frame is recognized as coming from the second focal plane, The first focal plane is different from the second focal plane. In one or more embodiments, the focal length associated with the focal plane is fixed. In one or more embodiments, the focal length associated with the focal plane is variable.

[0066] In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content to a user includes providing one or more image slices, the first image slice and the second image slice of one or more image slices having a three-dimensional Indicate volume -; Projecting light associated with the first image slice through a spatial light modulator; Focusing a slice of the first image through a variable focus element (VFE) to a first focus; Transmitting a first image slice having a first focus to a user; Providing light associated with a second image slice; Focusing the second image slice through the VFE to a second focus, the first focus being different from the second focus; And delivering to the user a second image slice having a second focal point.

[0067] In one or more embodiments, the method may further comprise determining a perspective adjustment of user eyes, and the VFE focuses the projected light based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment. In one or more embodiments, the image slices are provided in frame-sequential form. In one or more embodiments, the first image slice and the second image slice are delivered simultaneously. In one or more embodiments, the first image slice and the second image slice are delivered sequentially.

[0068] In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content to a user includes combining a first display element with a second display element, the first display element corresponding to a high frame rate and a low bit depth, Elements correspond to a low frame rate and a high bit depth, whereby the combined display elements correspond to a high frame rate and a high bit depth; Projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data through the combined display elements; And switching the focus of light projected through a variable focus element (VFE) on a frame-by-frame basis to cause the first image slice to be projected to a first focus and the second image slice to be projected to a second focus .

[0069] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes: a plurality of light guides for receiving coherent light associated with one or more frames of image data and generating an aggregate wavefront; A phase modulator coupled to one or more light guides to induce a phase delay in light projected by one or more of the plurality of light guides; And a processor for controlling the phase modulator in a manner that causes the aggregate wavefront generated by the plurality of light guides to change.

[0070] In one or more embodiments, the wavefront produced by a light guide of a plurality of light guides is a spherical wavefront. In one or more embodiments, the spherical wavefronts generated by the at least two light guides interfere destructively with each other. In one or more embodiments, the spherical wavefronts produced by the at least two light guides are destructively interfering with each other. In one or more embodiments, the aggregate wavefront is substantially a flat wavefront.

[0071] The planar wavefront corresponds to the optical infinite depth plane. In one or more embodiments, the aggregate wavefront is spherical. In one or more embodiments, the spherical wavefront corresponds to a depth plane that is closer than optical infinity. In one or more embodiments, the inverse Fourier transform of the desired beam is injected into the multi-core fibers, thereby creating the desired aggregate wavefront.

[0072] In another aspect, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes: an image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data; A multi-core assembly comprising a plurality of multi-core fibers for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data, wherein one of the plurality of multi-core fibers emits light at the wavefront, Whereby the multi-core assembly creates an algrite-guided wavefront of the projected light; And for deriving phase delays between the multi-core fibers in such a way that the aggregate wavefront emitted by the multi-core assembly is modified such that the user changes the focal distance to recognize one or more frames of image data Phase modulator.

[0073] In another aspect, a method for displaying virtual content to a user includes emitting light through the multi-core fiber, the multi-core fiber including a plurality of single core fibers, the single core fibers emitting a spherical wavefront, ; Providing an aggregate wavefront from light emitted from a plurality of single core fibers; And inducing a phase delay between the single core fibers of the multi-core fibers to cause the aggregate wavefront produced by the multi-core fibers to change based at least in part on the induced phase delay.

[0074] In one or more embodiments, the aggregate wavefront is a flat wavefront. In one or more embodiments, the planar wavefront corresponds to optical infinity. In one or more embodiments, the aggregate wavefront is spherical. In one or more embodiments, the spherical wavefront corresponds to a depth plane that is closer than optical infinity. In one or more embodiments, the method further comprises injecting an inverse Fourier transform of the desired wavefront into the multi-core fiber so that the aggregate wavefront corresponds to the desired wavefront.

[0075] In yet another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes: an image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data; A multi-core assembly including a plurality of multi-core fibers for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data; And an image injector for inputting images to the multi-core assembly, wherein the input injector is further configurable to input an inverse Fourier transform of the desired wavefront into the multi-core assembly so that the multi- And outputs the Fourier transform by generating the associated light, allowing the user to perceive the image data at the desired focal distance.

[0076] In one or more embodiments, the desired wavefront is associated with the hologram. In one or more embodiments, the inverse Fourier transform is input to modulate the focus of one or more light beams. In one or more embodiments, one of the plurality of multicore fibers is a multi-mode fiber. In one or more embodiments, one of the plurality of multicore fibers is configured to propagate light along a plurality of paths along one multi-core fiber. In one or more embodiments, the multi-core fibers are single core fibers. In one or more embodiments, the multi-core fibers are concentric core fibers.

[0077] In one or more embodiments, the image injector is configured to input a wavelet pattern into the multi-core assembly. In one or more embodiments, the image injector is configured to input a Zernike coefficient to the multi-core assembly. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a perspective adjustment tracking module for determining a perspective adjustment of the user's eyes, and the image injector inputs an inverse Fourier transform of the wavefront corresponding to the determined perspective adjustment of the user's eyes .

[0078] In yet another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content to a user includes determining a perspective adjustment of user eyes, wherein the determined perspective adjustment is associated with a focal length corresponding to a user's current focus state; Projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data through a waveguide; Changing the focus of the projected light based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment; And communicating the projected light to the user's eyes so that the light is perceived by the user as coming from a focal distance corresponding to the user's current focus state.

[0079] In one or more embodiments, the perspective adjustment is directly measured. In one or more embodiments, the perspective adjustment is indirectly measured. Perspective adjustments are measured using an infrared autorefractor. In one or more embodiments, the perspective adjustment is measured through eccentric photorefraction. In one or more embodiments, the method further comprises measuring a convergence level of the user's two eyes to estimate perspective adjustment. In one or more embodiments, the method further comprises blurring one or more portions of one or more frames of image data based, at least in part, on the determined perspective adjustment. In one or more embodiments, the focus is changed between fixed depth planes. In one or more embodiments, the method further comprises a compensation lens for compensating for the optical effect of the waveguide.

[0080] In one or more embodiments, a method of displaying virtual content to a user includes determining a perspective adjustment of user eyes, wherein the determined perspective adjustment is associated with a focal length corresponding to a user's current focus state, Projecting the light associated with one or more frames of the projected light through a diffractive optics element (DOE), modifying the focus of the projected light based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment, And conveying the projected light to the user's eyes so as to be perceived by the user as coming from a focal distance corresponding to the user's current focus state.

[0081] In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content to a user includes determining a perspective adjustment of user eyes, wherein the determined perspective adjustment is associated with a focal length corresponding to a user's current focus state, Projecting the light associated with the frames of the projected light through the free-form optics, changing the focus of the projected light based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment, And conveying the projected light to the user's eyes so as to be perceived by the user as coming from the distance.

[0082] In another aspect, a method of displaying virtual content to a user includes determining a perspective adjustment of user eyes, wherein the determined perspective adjustment is associated with a focal length corresponding to a user's current focus state, Projecting the projected light at least partially based on the determined perspective adjustment; and projecting the projected light from the focal distance corresponding to the user's current focus state, And conveying the projected light to the user's eyes so as to be perceived by the user.

[0083] In one or more embodiments, light is transmitted to the user through the substrate guiding optical assembly. In one or more embodiments, light is transmitted to a user via a free-form optical element. In one or more embodiments, the light is delivered to the user via a diffractive optical element (DOE). In one or more embodiments, light is projected through a stack of waveguides, wherein a first waveguide of a stack of waveguides is configured to output light to a particular wavefront, and wherein the second waveguide is configured to output a positive And the third waveguide is configured to output a negative margin wavefront in relation to the specific wavefront. In one or more embodiments, the method further comprises blurring the portion of the one or more frames of image data in such a manner that the portion of one or more frames of image data is out of focus when projected light is delivered to user eyes .

[0084] In yet another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes an image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner, one or more frames of image data, And a waveguide assembly for changing the focus of light associated with one or more frames of image data, wherein the image generator comprises: a light generator for providing associated light; a perspective adjustment tracking module for tracking perspective adjustment of a user eye; Are focused differently based at least in part on the tracked perspective adjustment.

[0085] In another aspect, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes a perspective adjustment tracking module for determining perspective adjustment of user eyes, an image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data in a time- A light generator for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data; a plurality of waveguides for receiving light rays associated with the image data and for transmitting the light rays to user eyes, And a variable focus element (VFE) for changing the focus of the transmitted light based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment of the user's eyes.

[0086] In one or more embodiments, a waveguide of the plurality of waveguides is a waveguide element, and the focus of the first frame of image data transmitted from the first one of the plurality of waveguides is the second waveguide of the plurality of waveguides, Which is different from the focus of the second frame of the image data transmitted from the first frame. In one or more embodiments, the first frame is the first layer of the 3D scene and the second frame is the second layer of the 3D scene. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a blur module for blurring the portion of one or more frames of image data in such a manner as to cause it to be out of focus when viewed by a user.

[0087] In one or more embodiments, the VFE is common to a plurality of waveguides. In one or more embodiments, the VFE is associated with a waveguide of a plurality of waveguides. In one or more embodiments, the VFE is coupled to a waveguide of the plurality of waveguides such that the VFE is interleaved between the two waveguides of the plurality of waveguides. In one or more embodiments, the VFE is embedded in a waveguide of a plurality of waveguides. In one or more embodiments, the VFE is a diffractive optical element. In one or more embodiments, VFE is a refractive element.

[0088]  In one or more embodiments, the waveguide is electro-active. In one or more embodiments, one or more of the plurality of waveguides are switched off. In one or more embodiments, a waveguide of the plurality of waveguides corresponds to a fixed focal plane. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises an exit pupil, wherein the diameter of the exit pupil is no greater than 0.5 mm. The light generator is a scanning fiber display. In one or more embodiments, the system of claim 302 further comprises an array of exit pupils.

[0089] In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a plurality of optical generators, and the optical generator is coupled to the exit pupil. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises an exit pupil dilator. In one or more embodiments, the exit pupil is switchable based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment of the user eyes.

[0090] In another aspect, the system includes a perspective adjustment tracking module for determining a perspective adjustment of user eyes, a fiber scanning display for scanning a plurality of light beams associated with one or more frames of image data, The optical beam is movable and blur software for rendering the simulated optical blur in one or more frames of image data based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment of the user's eyes.

[0091] In one or more embodiments, the diameter of the light beams is not greater than 2 mm. In one or more embodiments, the diameter of the light beams is not greater than 0.5 mm. In one or more embodiments, the scanned light beam is replicated to produce a plurality of exit pupils. In one or more embodiments, the scanned light beam is replicated to create a larger eye box. In one or more embodiments, the exit pupils are switchable.

[0092] In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content includes determining perspective adjustment of user eyes, scanning through a fiber scanning display a plurality of light beams associated with one or more frames of image data, Wherein the diameter of the light beam is not greater than 0.5 mm so that the frames of data appear to be in focus when viewed by the user, and one or more portions of the frame based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment of the user eyes And blurring using blur software.

[0093] In one or more embodiments, a plurality of exit pupils are generated. In one or more embodiments, the light beam is produced by a single core fiber. In one or more embodiments, the light beam is replicated to produce a plurality of exit pupils. In one or more embodiments, the exit pupils are switchable.

[0094]  In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content to a user includes determining a position of a user's pupil with respect to a bundle of optical projectors, the bundle of optical projectors corresponding to a sub-image of an image to be presented to a user, And driving the light corresponding to the sub-image to a portion of the pupil of the user, based on the determined position of the user's pupil.

[0095] In one or more embodiments, the method further comprises driving light corresponding to another sub-image of the image to be provided to another portion of the user's pupil through another bundle of light projectors. In one or more embodiments, the method further comprises mapping light projectors of one or more bundles of the fiber scanning display with one or more portions of the user's pupil. In one or more embodiments, the mapping is a 1: 1 mapping.

[0096] In one or more embodiments, the diameter of the light is not greater than 0.5 mm. In one or more embodiments, the light projectors of the bundle create an aggregate wavefront. In one or more embodiments, the beamlets produced by the light projectors form a discrete aggregate wavefront. In one or more embodiments, when the beamlets approach the user's eye at the same time, the eye deflects the beamlets to converge to the same spot on the retina. In one or more embodiments, the user eye receives a superset of beamlets, and the beamlets correspond to a plurality of angles with which they are associated with the pupil.

[0097] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes a light source for providing light associated with one or more frames of image data, and light associated with one or more frames of image data An optical display assembly for receiving, the optical display assembly corresponding to a plurality of exit pupils spaced apart from one another, and the plurality of exit pupils transmitting light to a user's pupil.

[0098] In one or more embodiments, a plurality of exit pupils are arranged in a hexagonal lattice. In one or more embodiments, the plurality of exit pupils are arranged in a square lattice. In one or more embodiments, a plurality of exit pupils are arranged in a two-dimensional array. In one or more embodiments, a plurality of exit pupils are arranged in a three-dimensional array. In one or more embodiments, a plurality of exit pupils are arranged in a time-varying array.

[0099] In one or more embodiments, a method for displaying virtual content to a user includes grouping a plurality of light projectors to form an exit pupil, grouping the first light pattern into a pupil of the user through the first exit pupil Driving to a first portion and driving a second light pattern through a second exit pupil to a second portion of the user's pupil, wherein the first light pattern and the second light pattern are transmitted to the user Image, and the first light pattern is different from the second light pattern. In one or more embodiments, the method further comprises generating a discrete aggregate wavefront.

[00100] In yet another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content to a user includes determining a position of a user ' s pupil relative to an optical display assembly, and determining a position of the user ' s pupil based at least in part on a limited eye box around the determined position of the pupil And calculating a focus for converging to the pupil.

[00101] In one or more embodiments, the diameter of the light is not greater than 0.5 mm. In one or more embodiments, the method further comprises generating a discrete aggregate wavefront. In one or more embodiments, the method further comprises agagating a plurality of discrete neighboring collimated light beams based at least in part on a center of curvature radius of the desired aggregate wavefront. In one or more embodiments, the method further comprises determining perspective adjustment of the user eyes, and the focus is calculated based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment.

[00102] In one or more embodiments, the method further comprises selecting an angular trajectory of the light of the plurality of beamlets to produce an out-of-focus light beam. In one or more embodiments, a plurality of beamlets represent pixels of image data to be provided to a user. In one or more embodiments, the beamlets reach the eye at a plurality of incidence angles.

[00103] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes an image generation source for providing one or more portions of an image to be presented to a user, and a light associated with one or more portions of the image Wherein the microprojectors are positioned in such a way that they face the pupil of the user and one of the plurality of microprojectors projects a set of rays representing a portion of the sub- And a set of rays is projected to a portion of the user's pupil.

[00104] In one or more embodiments, a first portion of a user's pupil receives light rays from a plurality of microprojectors. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a reflective surface for reflecting light from the plurality of microprojectors to one or more portions of the user ' s pupil. In one or more embodiments, the reflective surface is positioned in a manner that allows the user to view the real world through the reflective surface. In one or more embodiments, the diameter of the light is not greater than 0.5 mm. In one or more embodiments, the system further includes a discrete aggregate wavefront.

[00105] In another embodiment, the system includes a processor for determining a position of a user's pupil, and an array of spatial light modulators (SLMs) for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data, The array of SLMs is positioned based at least in part on the determined location of the user's pupil, and the array of SLMs produces a bright field when viewed by a user.

[00106] In another aspect, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes an image generation source for providing one or more frames of image data, a plurality of frames configured to selectively transmit beams of light associated with one or more frames of image data A second SLM-second SLM positioned with respect to the first SLM is also configured to selectively transmit the light beams associated with one or more frames of image data, And a processor for controlling the first and second SLMs in such a way that a light field is generated when viewed by a user.

[00107] In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a perspective adjustment tracking module for determining perspective adjustment of the user's eyes. In one or more embodiments, the SLM is an LCD. In one or more embodiments, the LCD is weakened. In one or more embodiments, the LCD rotates the polarization of the transmitted light. In one or more embodiments, the SLM is a DMD. In one or more embodiments, the DMD is coupled to one or more lenses. In one or more embodiments, the SLM is a MEMs array. In one or more embodiments, the MEMs array includes an array of sliding MEMs shutters. In one or more embodiments, the MEMs array is a Pixtronics® MEMs array.

[00108] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes a plurality of optical fibers for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data to be presented to a user, The medium optical fiber is coupled to the lens and the lens is configured to change the diameter of the light beam projected by the scanning fiber, and the lens comprises a gradient index of refraction.

[00109] In one or more embodiments, the lens is a GRIN lens. In one or more embodiments, the lens collimates the light beams. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises an actuator coupled to one of the plurality of optical fibers for scanning the fiber. In one or more embodiments, the actuator is a piezoelectric actuator. In one or more embodiments, the ends of the optical fibers are polished at an angle to create a lengthening effect. In one or more embodiments, the ends of the optical fibers are dissolved to produce a lengthening effect.

[00110] In one or more embodiments, a method for displaying virtual content to a user includes projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data, wherein the light is projected through a plurality of optical fibers, Modifying the light projected through the plurality of optical fibers through the lens, the lens being coupled to the tip of the plurality of optical fibers, and delivering the modified light to the user.

[00111] In one or more embodiments, a system for displaying virtual content includes a multi-core assembly including a plurality of fibers for multiplexing light associated with one or more frames of image data, And a waveguide for transmitting the light patterns such that the first viewing zone only receives the light associated with the first portion of the image and the second viewing zone only receives the light associated with the second portion of the image, The second viewing zones are not greater than 0.5 mm. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises blur software for blurring one or more portions of frames of image data. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a perspective adjustment module for determining perspective adjustment of the user's eyes. In one or more embodiments, the waveguide projects light directly to the user's eye without intermediate viewing optics.

[00112]  In one or more embodiments, the system includes a multi-core assembly that includes a plurality of fibers for multiplexing light associated with one or more frames of image data, optical patterns, and a first viewing zone The waveguides for receiving only light associated with the first portion of the image and transmitting the light patterns such that the second viewing zone only receives light associated with the second portion of the image-first and second viewing zones are not greater than 0.5 mm And an optical assembly coupled to the waveguide for modifying the optical beams to be transmitted to the first and second viewing zones.

[00113] The plurality of fibers project light into a single waveguide array. In one or more embodiments, the multiple core assembly is scanned. In one or more embodiments, a time-varying optical field is generated. The optical assembly is a DOE element. In one or more embodiments, the optical assembly is an LC layer.

[00114] In one or more embodiments, the method includes projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data through a multi-core assembly, wherein the multi-core assembly includes a plurality of optical fibers, and Passing the projected light through a waveguide such that a first portion of a user's pupil receives light associated with a first portion of the image and a second portion of a user's pupil receives light associated with a second portion of the image .

[00115] In one or more embodiments, the diameters of the first and second portions are not greater than 0.5 mm. In one or more embodiments, the plurality of optical fibers project light into a single waveguide array. In one or more embodiments, the multiple core assembly is scanned. In one or more embodiments, the waveguide comprises a plurality of reflectors. In one or more embodiments, the angle of the reflectors is variable. In one or more embodiments, a set of optics modifies light transmitted to the first and second viewing zones. The set of optics is a DOE element. The set of optics is free-form optics. In one or more embodiments, the set of optics is an LC layer.

[00116] In one aspect, in one or more embodiments, the system includes an array of microprojectors for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data to be presented to a user, Is positioned relative to the position of the user ' s pupil, and light is projected into the pupil of the user. In one or more embodiments, in the fiber scanning display of claim 407, the first and second light beams overlap. In one or more embodiments, in the fiber scanning display of paragraph 407, the first and second light beams are deflected based at least in part on the critical angle of the bundled fiber being polished. In one or more embodiments, in the fiber scanning display of paragraph 407, the polished bundled fibers are used to increase the resolution of the display. In one or more embodiments, the polished bundled fibers are used to create a bright field.

[00117] In another embodiment, the system includes an array of microprojectors for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data to be presented to a user, the array of microprojectors being positioned relative to a position of the user ' s pupil, Wherein the light is projected into the user ' s pupil, and an optical element coupled to the array of microprojectors to modify the light projected into the user ' s pupil.

[00118] In yet another embodiment, the system includes a plurality of multicore fibers for transmitting light beams, the plurality of beams coupled together, and a coupling element for bundling the plurality of multicore fibers together, Bundles of the bundled fibers are arranged such that the first light beam transmitted from the first fiber of bundled fibers has a first path length and the second light beam transmitted from the second fiber of bundled fibers has a second path length, And the first path length is different from the second path length such that the first light beam is in phase with respect to the second light beam.

[00119] In one or more embodiments, the first and second light beams overlap. In one or more embodiments, the first and second light beams are deflected based at least in part on a critical angle of the bundled fiber being polished. In one or more embodiments, the polished bundled fibers are used to increase the resolution of the display. In one or more embodiments, the polished bundled fibers are used to create a bright field.

[00120] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes an image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data, a light source for transmitting light beams associated with one or more frames of image data And an optical element coupled to the plurality of optical fibers for receiving the collimated light from the optical fibers and delivering the light beams to the user's eye, the light beams having a first light beam Is transmitted to the user's eye at a plurality of angles such that the second light beam is transmitted to the portion of the user's eye at a first angle and the second light beam is transmitted to the same portion of the user's eye at a second angle, . In one or more embodiments, the optical element is a waveguide. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a phase modulator for modulating the transmission of light through the optical fibers.

[00121] In yet another embodiment, a method includes providing one or more frames of image data, transmitting light beams associated with one or more frames of image data through a plurality of optical fibers, To the user's eyes at a plurality of angles.

[00122] In one or more embodiments, the method further comprises modulating the phase delay of the plurality of optical fibers. In one or more embodiments, the method further comprises coupling the optical element to a plurality of optical fibers. In one or more embodiments, the optical element is a waveguide. The optical element is free-form optics. In one or more embodiments, the optical element is a DOE. In one or more embodiments, the optical element is a waveguide.

[00123] In one or more embodiments, the virtual reality display system includes a plurality of optical fibers for generating light beams associated with one or more images to be presented to a user, and a plurality of optical components for modulating the light beams, A plurality of phase modulators coupled to the fibers, wherein the plurality of phase modulators modulate the light in a manner that affects the resulting wavefront of the plurality of light beams.

[00124] In one or more embodiments, one or more of the optical fibers are deflected at one or more angles. In one or more embodiments, one of the plurality of optical fibers is coupled to a GRIN lens. In one or more embodiments, the plurality of optical fibers are physically actuated to scan the optical fibers.

[00125] In another aspect, a method includes providing one or more frames of image data to be presented to a user, projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data through a plurality of optical fibers, And modulating light projected by the plurality of optical fibers through a plurality of phase modulators in a manner that affects an aggregate wavefront generated by the plurality of optical fibers.

[00126] In one or more embodiments, light projected by one or more optical fibers is deflected at one or more angles. In one or more embodiments, one or more optical fibers are coupled to the GRIN lens. In one or more embodiments, the method further comprises scanning the optical light beams, wherein the plurality of optical fibers are physically actuated to scan the optical fibers.

[00127] In another aspect, a system for displaying virtual content includes an array of optical fibers for transmitting light beams associated with an image to be presented to a user, and a plurality of light beams output by an array of optical fibers through a single nodal point A lens coupled to the array of optical fibers for deflecting, wherein the lens is physically attached to the optical fibers to cause movement of the optical fiber to cause the lens to move, and a single nodal point is scanned.

[00128] In one or more embodiments, the light beams output by the array of optical fibers represent pixels of an image to be provided to a user. In one or more embodiments, the lens is a GRIN lens. In one or more embodiments, an array of optical fibers is used to display a bright field. In one or more embodiments, another set of light beams output by another array of optical fibers represents another pixel of the image to be provided to the user. In one or more embodiments, multiple arrays of optical fibers are combined to represent a pixel of an image to be provided to a user. In one or more embodiments, the array of optical fibers is configured to transmit light beams to a predetermined portion of a user's pupil. In one or more embodiments, the output light beams are diverging. In one or more embodiments, the output light beams are converging.

[00129] In one or more embodiments, the aperture number of the output light beams is increased with respect to the light beams transmitted by the individual optical fibers. In one or more embodiments, the increased aperture number allows higher resolution. In one or more embodiments, the array of optical fibers is configured such that the path length of the first light beam traveling through the first optical fiber is different from the path length of the second light beam traveling through the second optical fiber In a manner that allows a plurality of focal lengths of the light beams transmitted to the user's eyes.

[00130] In another aspect, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes: an array of microprojectors for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data, the array of microprojectors - one or more microprojectors Are polished at an angle to cause the projected light to be deflected and the polished angle causes path length differences between the first and second microprojectors of the array of microprojectors with respect to the optical element, And a light scanner for scanning the deflected light beams onto at least one axis.

[00131] In another aspect, a system for providing at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience to a user includes a microprocessor that is carried by a frame, a frame, and is capable of being positioned in front of at least one eye of a user when the frame is worn by a user And a local controller communicatively coupled to the array of microprojectors to provide image information to the microprojectors, wherein the local controller includes at least one processor, and at least one processor communicatively coupled to the at least one processor, At least one non-volatile processor readable medium having at least one processor configured to perform at least one of processing, caching, and storing data when executed by at least one processor Do At least one of processor-executable instructions or data that causes the microprojectors to provide image information to generate at least one of a virtual or augmented reality visual experience for a user.

[00132] In one or more embodiments, the system includes at least one reflector supported by the frame and oriented to direct light from the microprojectors toward at least one eye of the user when the frame is worn by the user . In one or more embodiments, the micro projectors comprise a separate scanning fiber display of a plurality of scanning fiber displays. In one or more embodiments, each of the scanning fiber displays has an individual collimating lens at its distal tip. In one or more embodiments, the individual collimating lens is a gradient refractive index (GRIN) lens.

[00133] In one or more embodiments, the individual collimating lens is a curved lens. In one or more embodiments, the individual collimating lens is fused to a distal tip of an individual scanning fiber display. In one or more embodiments, the scanning fiber displays have individual diffractive lenses at their distal tip. In one or more embodiments, each of the scanning fiber displays has an individual disperser at its distal tip.

[00134] In one or more embodiments, the disperser is etched into individual distal tips. In one or more embodiments, each of the scanning fiber displays has an individual lens at its distal tip, and the lens extends from the distal tip by a sufficient distance to oscillate freely in response to stimulation. In one or more embodiments, each of the scanning fiber displays has a separate reflector at its distal tip, and the reflector extends from the distal tip by a sufficient distance to vibrate freely in response to stimulation. In one or more embodiments, each of the scanning fiber displays comprises discrete single mode optical fibers.

[00135] In one or more embodiments, each of the scanning fiber displays includes an individual machine transducer coupled to move at least a distal tip of the single mode optical fiber. In one or more embodiments, the individual machine transducers are respective piezoelectric actuators. In one or more embodiments, each of the single mode optical fibers has a distal tip and the distal tips have a hemispherical lens shape. In one or more embodiments, each of the single mode optical fibers has a distal tip and the distal tips have a refractive lens attached to them.

[00136] In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a transparent holder substrate that holds the plurality of single mode optical fibers together. In one or more embodiments, the transparent holder substrate has a refractive index that at least approximately matches the refractive index of the cladding of the single mode optical fibers. In one or more embodiments, the transparent holder substrate holds a plurality of single mode optical fibers each angled toward a common spot.

[00137] In one or more embodiments, the system further includes at least one machine transducer coupled to move a plurality of single mode optical fibers together. In one or more embodiments, at least one mechanical transducer vibrates a plurality of single mode optical fibers at a machine resonant frequency of the plurality of single mode optical fibers, As shown in FIG. In one or more embodiments, the macro projectors include individual waveguides of a plurality of planar waveguides, and portions of each of the planar waveguides extend cantilevered from the holder substrate. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises at least one machine transducer coupled to move a plurality of the planar waveguides together.

[00138] In one or more embodiments, the at least one mechanical transducer oscillates the holder substrate at the machine resonant frequency of the plate waveguides. In one or more embodiments, the microprojectors comprise piezoelectric actuators of a plurality of piezoelectric actuators coupled to move the individual waveguides of the planar waveguides relative to the holder substrate. In one or more embodiments, each of the planar waveguides defines an internal total reflection path along a respective length of the planar waveguide, and the planar waveguides define a plurality of electronically switchable And individual DOEs of diffractive optical elements (DOEs). In one or more embodiments, the array of microprojectors comprises an array of optical fibers, each of the optical fibers having a distal tip and at least one beveled edge. In one or more embodiments, the at least one beveled edge is at a distal tip, and the distal tip is a polished distal tip.

[00139] In one or more embodiments, each of the optical fibers has a reflective surface at its respective distal tip. In one or more embodiments, the distal tip has an output edge at the distal tip at a critical angle defined relative to the longitudinal axis of the discrete optical fiber. In one or more embodiments, the defined critical angle is approximately 45 degrees (45) degrees relative to the longitudinal axis of the individual optical fibers. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a focusing lens for receiving a plurality of beams of light in an optical path of light exiting distal ends of the optical fibers, wherein the beams are in phase with each other. In one or more embodiments, the system includes at least one optical element coupled to move at least one of the optical fibers in an XY Cartesian coordinate system to move light emitted by the at least one optical fiber in an XZ Cartesian coordinate system, Lt; / RTI > transducer. In one or more embodiments, the at least one transducer is a first piezoelectric actuator that resonates a cantilevered portion of the optical fibers in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the cantilevered portions extend.

[00140] In one or more embodiments, the optical fibers comprise a thin ribbon of optical fibers. In one or more embodiments, the at least one transducer is a second piezoelectric actuator that moves at least a cantilevered portion of the optical fibers in a longitudinal direction to the direction in which the cantilevered portions extend. In one or more embodiments, the microprojectors include at least one single-axis mirror operable to provide a slow scan along the longitudinal axis of at least one of the optical fibers. In one or more embodiments, the array of optical fibers comprises multi-core fibers. In one or more embodiments, the multi-core fibers comprise a plurality of -non-approximately seven-elastically positioned clusters in a single duct, each cluster comprising three optical fibers, each optical fiber comprising To carry individual colors of three different colors of light.

[00141] In one or more embodiments, the multi-core fibers comprise a plurality of - approximately 19 - resiliently positioned clusters in a single conduit, each cluster comprising three optical fibers, each optical fiber comprising To carry the individual colors of the three different colors of light to create a triad of overlapping spots of three different colors. In one or more embodiments, the multi-core fibers comprise at least one cluster in a single duct, the clusters comprise at least three optical fibers, each of the optical fibers carrying at least two different colors of light .

[00142] In one or more embodiments, the multi-core fibers comprise at least one cluster in a single conduit, wherein at least one cluster comprises four optical fibers, each optical fiber comprising an individual of four different colors of light Color, and one of the four colors is infrared or almost infrared. In one or more embodiments, the multi-core fiber further comprises a plurality of cores of a rigid bundle and further comprises at least one transducer coupled to move the cores in a coarse spiral pattern. In one or more embodiments, at least one beveled edge is spaced inwardly from the distal tip. In one or more embodiments, at least one beveled edge is polished.

[00143] In one or more embodiments, the system includes at least one optical element coupled to move at least one of the optical fibers in an XY Cartesian coordinate system to move light emitted by the at least one optical fiber in an XZ Cartesian coordinate system, Lt; / RTI > transducer.

[00144] In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a focusing lens for receiving a plurality of beams of light in an optical path of light exiting beveled edges of optical fibers, wherein the beams are in phase with each other. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises at least one phase modulator that optically couples the output of the laser to the plurality of cores of the multi-core fiber to obtain a laser and mutual coherence.

[00145] In one or more embodiments, the system includes a lenslet array optically coupled to the upstream of the input end of the individual cores of the plurality of cores of the multi-core fiber, and a lenslet array optically coupled to the multi- Further comprising a prism array optically coupled between the input end of the cores of the multi-core fibers and the plurality of collimating lenses for biasing into the cores.

[00146] In one or more embodiments, the system includes a lenslet array optically coupled to the upstream of the input end of the individual cores of the plurality of cores of the multi-core fiber, and a lenslet array optically coupled to the multi- And a shared focusing lens optically coupled between the input end of the cores of the multi-core fibers and the lenslet array for biasing into the cores.

[00147] In one or more embodiments, the array of microprojectors further comprises at least one reflector, wherein at least one reflector is operable to generate a scan pattern and is optically coupled to the array of optical fibers. In one or more embodiments, the at least one reflector is operable to generate at least one of a raster scan pattern, a Lissajous scan pattern, or a helical scan pattern of a multi-focus beam. In one or more embodiments, each core of multi-core fibers addresses a separate portion of the image plane without overlap. In one or more embodiments, each core of the multi-core fibers addresses a separate portion of the image plane without substantial overlap.

[00148] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content comprises: an image-source to provide one or more frames of image data to be presented to a user; an optical scanning display; a light scanning display to display one or more Wherein the plurality of fibers are scanned using an actuator and a processor for controlling the fiber scanning display in such a manner that a bright field is provided to the user .

[00149] In one or more embodiments, the actuator is shared between all the fibers of the fiber scanning display. In one or more embodiments, each fiber has its own individual actuator. In one or more embodiments, the plurality of fibers are mechanically coupled by a grating to allow a plurality of fibers to move together. In one or more embodiments, the grating is a graphene plane. In one or more embodiments, the lattice is a lightweight brace.

[00150] In another embodiment, a system for providing at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience to a user includes a display system that is carried by a frame, a frame, and is positionable in front of at least one eye of the user when the frame is worn by a user, And a local controller communicatively coupled to the display system for providing image information to the display system, wherein the local controller includes at least one processor, and at least one non-transitory processor readable communicatively coupled to the at least one processor, And at least one non-volatile processor readable medium, when executed by the at least one processor, causes the at least one processor to perform at least one of processing, caching, and storing data, end At least one of processor-executable instructions or data that causes the display to provide image information to generate at least one of a phase or augmented reality visual experience.

[00151] In one or more embodiments, the display includes at least one wedge-shaped waveguide, wherein the wedge-shaped waveguide includes at least two planar surfaces opposite to each other across the thickness of the first wedge- And the length of the wedge-shaped waveguide, the light entering along the length of the wedge-shaped waveguide at defined angles through the entrance of the wedge-shaped waveguide propagates through the total internal reflection, and the thickness of the wedge- ≪ / RTI > In one or more embodiments, the wedge-shaped waveguide provides bimodal internal total reflection.

[00152] In one or more embodiments, the system further includes at least two projectors that are optically coupled to the wedge-shaped waveguide at discrete different locations along the entrance portion of the wedge-shaped waveguide. In one or more embodiments, the system further includes a first linear array of a plurality of projectors optically coupled to the wedge-shaped waveguide at discrete different locations along the entrance portion of the wedge-shaped waveguide.

[00153] In one or more embodiments, the projectors of the first linear array of a plurality of projectors are scanning fiber displays. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a stack of a plurality of spatial light modulators optically coupled to the wedge-shaped waveguide along the entrance portion of the wedge-shaped waveguide. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises multi-core optical fibers optically coupled to the wedge-shaped waveguide at one or more locations along the entrance portion of the wedge-shaped waveguide.

[00154] In one or more embodiments, the projectors of the first linear array of projectors are optically coupled to a wedge-shaped waveguide for injecting light into the wedge-shaped waveguide at a first angle, Further comprising a second linear array of a plurality of projectors optically coupled to the wedge-shaped waveguide at discrete different locations along the entrance portion, wherein the projectors of the second linear array of projectors project light to the wedge-shaped waveguide at a second angle Shaped waveguide, and the second angle is different from the first angle.

[00155] In one or more embodiments, the inlet portion is a longitudinal end of the wedge-shaped waveguide. In one or more embodiments, the inlet portion is a lateral edge of the wedge-shaped waveguide. In one or more embodiments, the inlet portion is one of the planar surfaces of the wedge-shaped waveguide. In one or more embodiments, the system further includes at least one optical component optically coupled to the projector, wherein the at least one optical component includes a plurality of angles to obtain total internal total reflection of light in the wedge-shaped waveguide Changes the angle of light received from the projector to optically couple light to the wedge-shaped waveguide.

[00156] In another aspect, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes: an array of microprojectors for projecting light beams associated with one or more frames of image data to be presented to a user, - a frame for housing an array of microprojectors, one or more light beams transmitted from one or more projectors are arranged in an array of microprojectors Projectors to control one or more light beams in a manner that enables them to be transmitted as a function of the position of one or more microprojectors relative to the microprojectors And a ray the one or more micro-projector, the processor operatively coupled to the.

[00157] In one or more embodiments, one microprojector of the array of microprojectors is coupled to the lens. In one or more embodiments, the array of microprojectors is arranged in a manner that is based on the desired resolution of the image to be presented to the user. In one or more embodiments, the array of microprojectors is arranged based on the desired field of view. In one or more embodiments, the light beams of the plurality of microprojectors overlap. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises an actuator, wherein the actuator is coupled to one or more microprojectors, and wherein the actuator is operable to move one or more microprojectors.

[00158]  In one or more embodiments, the actuator is coupled to a plurality of microprojectors. In one or more embodiments, the actuator is coupled to a single microprojector. In one or more embodiments, one microprojector of the array of microprojectors is mechanically coupled to the grating.

[00159] In one or more embodiments, the contact lens for interfacing with the cornea of a user's eye of a virtual or augmented reality display comprises a partially hemispherical substrate and a selectivity filter. In one or more embodiments, the selective filter is configured to selectively pass light beams to the user's eye. In one or more embodiments, the selectable filter is a notch filter. In one or more embodiments, the notch filter substantially blocks wavelengths (maximum blue) of approximately 450 nm and substantially passes other wavelengths of the visible portion of the electromagnetic spectrum. In one or more embodiments, the notch filter substantially blocks wavelengths (green) of approximately 530 nm and substantially passes other wavelengths of the visible portion of the electromagnetic spectrum. In one or more embodiments, the notch filter substantially blocks wavelengths of approximately 650 nm and substantially passes other wavelengths of the visible portion of the electromagnetic spectrum.

[00160] In one or more embodiments, the notch filter includes a plurality of layers of dielectric material carried by the substrate. In one or more embodiments, the filter has a pinhole opening of less than 1.5 mm in diameter. In one or more embodiments, the pinhole opening allows light beams of a plurality of wavelengths to pass through. In one or more embodiments, the size of the pinhole is altered based at least in part on the desired depth of focus of the display. In one or more embodiments, the contact lens further comprises a plurality of modes of operation. In one or more embodiments, the contact lens further comprises a multi-depth focus display configuration of the virtual content.

[00161] In one or more embodiments, the contact lens further comprises a perspective adjustment tracking module to determine a perspective adjustment of the user's eye. In one or more embodiments, the focus depth of a particular display object is changed based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment. In one or more embodiments, the image is relayed through the waveguide and the relayed image is associated with a focus of a certain depth.

[00162] In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content to a user includes providing one or more frames of image data to be provided to a user, projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data And receiving the projected light through a partially hemispherical substrate coupled to the user ' s pupil and selectively filtering out light beams to the user ' s pupil.

[00163] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes: a light projection system for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data to user eyes, the light projection system comprising a plurality , And a processor for modulating the depth of focus of the plurality of pixels displayed to the user.

[00164] In one or more embodiments, the focus depth is spatially modulated. In one or more embodiments, the focus depth is modulated over time. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises an image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner. In one or more embodiments, the focus depth is modulated on a frame-by-frame basis. In one or more embodiments, the light projection system includes a plurality of optical fibers, wherein the focus depth is selected such that a portion of the plurality of optical fibers is associated with a first focus depth, Modulated over a plurality of optical fibers to be associated with a focus depth, wherein the first focus depth is different from the second focus depth.

[00165] In one or more embodiments, a first display object of a particular frame is displayed through a first focus depth, a second display object of a particular frame is displayed through a second focus depth, 2 differs from the focus depth. In one or more embodiments, a first pixel of a particular frame is associated with a first focus depth, a second pixel of a particular frame is associated with a second focus depth, the first focus depth is associated with a second focus depth It is different. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a perspective adjustment tracking module for determining a perspective adjustment of user eyes, wherein the focus depth is modulated based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment.

[00166] In one or more embodiments, the pattern of light generation associated with the light generating system is dynamically dependent on the determined perspective adjustments. In one or more embodiments, the pattern is a scanning pattern of a plurality of optical fibers. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a blur module for blurring one or more portions of the image data, wherein the blur is a transition between a first scan pattern and a second scan pattern, 1 resolution scan pitch to the second resolution scan pitch.

[00167] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes: a light projection system for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data to user eyes, the light projection system comprising a plurality , And a processor for modulating the size of the plurality of pixels displayed to the user.

[00168] In one or more embodiments, the light projection system is a fiber scanning display. In one or more embodiments, the projected light is displayed through a scanning pattern. In one or more embodiments, the processor modulates the size of a particular pixel based at least in part on the type of scanning pattern. In one or more embodiments, the size of one or more of the pixels may be modulated based, at least in part, on the distance between the scan lines of the scanning pattern. In one or more embodiments, the size of the first pixel is different from the size of the second pixel of the same frame.

[00169] In another aspect, a method for displaying virtual content to a user includes, in one or more embodiments, projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data, Wherein the excess light beams correspond to one or more pixels and the light is projected through a fiber scanning display, and modulating the size of one or more of the pixels displayed to the user.

[00170] The size of a particular pixel is altered, in one or more embodiments, based at least in part on the scanning pattern of the fiber scanning display. The size of one or more of the pixels is modulated based, at least in part, on the distance between the scan lines of the scanning pattern in one or more embodiments. The size of one or more of the pixels is variable in one or more embodiments.

[00171] In yet another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes, in one or more embodiments, a display system-display system that conveys light associated with one or more frames of image data, Wherein the display system scans light having a variable line pitch, and wherein the display system scans light having a variable line pitch to variably blur one or more of the plurality of pixels to modify the size of one or more pixels A blur module, and a processor for controlling the blur module in such a way that the pixel size is changed based at least in part on the line pitch of the display system. The display system is, in one or more embodiments, a fiber scanning system. The pixel size is increased in one or more embodiments. The pixel size is reduced in one or more embodiments. The pitch line may be, in one or more embodiments, a sparse. The pitch line is dense in one or more embodiments.

[00172] In another aspect, there is provided a method for displaying virtual content to a user, the method comprising projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data to be provided to a user, Selectively attenuating at least a portion of the projected light beams, and delivering the attenuated light beams to user eyes.

[00173] The light beam, in one or more embodiments, is selectively attenuated based at least in part on the angle of incidence of the light beam. The different portions of the frame are attenuated to different amounts in one or more embodiments. The focus depth of the attenuated light beams is changed in one or more embodiments.

[00174] In one or more embodiments, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes an image generation source for providing one or more frames of image data, a stack of two or more SLMs (spatial light modulators) Wherein the stack is positioned to cause the stack to transmit light associated with one or more frames of image data to a user, the SLM spatially attenuating light from an external environment, and wherein the light beams are incident on one or more of the SLMs Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > SLM < / RTI >

[00175] The system further includes a set of display optics, wherein the set of display optics is positioned between the user's eye and the external environment, in one or more embodiments. SLMs in the stack of SLMs are cholesteric LCDs. At least one of the SLMs is, in one or more embodiments, a cholesteric LCD. The stack of SLMs is positioned to allow the user to view the outside world through a stack of SLMs, and SLMs are at least translucent in one or more embodiments.

[00176] The spatial light modulator arrays may be used in one or more embodiments to provide a plurality of liquid crystal arrays, a plurality of digital mirror device elements of digital light processing systems, a plurality of micro-electro-mechanical system (MEMS) RTI ID = 0.0 > MEMS < / RTI > The system may further comprise a visor comprising at least one optical component and wherein the processor is operable, in one or more embodiments, to generate a dark field representation of the dark virtual object, And controls the optical component.

[00177] In another aspect, there is provided a system for displaying virtual content, the system comprising: an array of array-space optical modulators of spatial light modulators configured to generate light patterns, the array of spatial light modulators including at least two modulators; And a processor for controlling the array of spatial modulators in such a way that at least two spatial modulators form a Moire pattern, wherein the Moiré pattern comprises a period of light patterns formation through at least two spatial light modulators, Is a periodic spatial pattern that attenuates light at different periods.

[00178] The spatial light modulator arrays, in one or more embodiments, include at least two spatial light modulator arrays optically coupled to one another and control the passage of light through the Moire effect. Each of the at least two spatial light modulator arrays, in one or more embodiments, produces an individual attenuation pattern. Each of the at least two spatial light modulator arrays yields an individual optimum-pitch sinusoidal pattern that is printed, etched, or otherwise engraved on or in, in one or more embodiments. The at least two spatial light modulator arrays are in registration with each other in one or more embodiments. Each of the at least two spatial light modulator arrays, in one or more embodiments, produces an individual attenuation pattern.

[00179] In yet another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes: a light generating source for providing light associated with one or more frames of image data; a light generating source is a spatial light modulator; The pinhole of the spatial light modulator being positioned relative to the spatial light modulator in such a way that it receives light from the plurality of cells of the spatial light modulator, wherein the first light beam passing through the pinhole comprises a second light beam passing through the pinhole, Corresponding to different angles, and the cell of the spatial light modulator selectively attenuates the light.

[00180] The external environment is viewed through the pinhole array and the SLMs, and the light beams are selectively attenuated, in one or more embodiments, based at least in part on the angle of incidence of the light beams. The light from different parts of the field of view is selectively attenuated in one or more embodiments. The system further includes a selectively damping layer operable to selectively damp transmission of light passing therethrough, wherein the selective damping layer is optically in series with the pinhole layer in one or more embodiments.

[00181] The selective damping layer comprises, in one or more embodiments, a liquid crystal array, a digital light projector system, or spatial light modulator arrays that produce individual attenuation patterns. The pinhole array is disposed at a distance of approximately 30 mm from the cornea of the user's eye, and the selective damping panel is located opposite the pinhole array from the eye, in one or more embodiments. The pinhole array includes a plurality of pinholes, and the processor may be configured in such a way that in one or more embodiments the light beams are generated as a function of the angles through which the light beams pass through the plurality of pinholes, To control the SLMs. The aggregate bright field, in one or more embodiments, causes occlusion at a desired focal length.

[00182] In another embodiment, the system includes a light source for providing light associated with one or more frames of image data, the light generating source is a spatial light modulator, and the lens of the lens array comprises a plurality of spatial light modulators Wherein the first light beam received by the lens corresponds to an angle different from the second light beam received by the lens, and wherein the spatial light modulator The cells selectively attenuate light in one or more embodiments.

[00183] The external environment is viewed through the lens arrays and SLMs, and the light beams are selectively attenuated, in one or more embodiments, based at least in part on the angle of incidence of the light beams. The light from different parts of the field of view is selectively attenuated in one or more embodiments. The lens array includes a plurality of lenses, and in one or more embodiments, the processor is configured to cause the light beams to be generated as a function of the angles at which the light beams are received by the plurality of lenses, To control the SLMs. The aggregate bright field, in one or more embodiments, causes occlusion at the desired focal length.

[00184] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes a light projector for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data, at least one light source for receiving light and for rotating the polarization of light A polarization sensitive layer, and an array of polarization modulators for modulating the polarization of the polarization sensitive layer, the state of the cells of the array determining how much light passes through the polarization sensitive layer. The system is arranged in an eye-proximity configuration, in one or more embodiments. The polarization modulator is, in one or more embodiments, a liquid crystal array.

[00185] The system further includes, in one or more embodiments, a parallax barrier for offsetting the polariser so that different exit pupils have different paths through the polariser. The polarizer is, in one or more embodiments, an xpol polarizer. The polarizer is, in one or more embodiments, a multiPol polarizer. The polarizer is, in one or more embodiments, a patterned polariser. The light interacts with one or more MEMs arrays in one or more embodiments.

[00186] The system further includes SLMs for projecting light, wherein the SLMs are positioned between one or more optical elements, the optical elements corresponding to a zero magnification telescope in one or more embodiments do. The user, in one or more embodiments, sees the external environment via a zero magnification telescope. At least one SLM is positioned in the image plane in the zero magnification telescope, in one or more embodiments. The system further includes a DMD, which in one or more embodiments corresponds to a transparent substrate.

[00187] Wherein the system further comprises a visor comprising at least one optical component, wherein the processor controls, in one or more embodiments, at least one optical component of the visor to produce an ambiguous representation of the dark virtual object do. The system further includes one or more LCDs, wherein one or more LCDs selectively attenuate the light beams in one or more embodiments. The system further includes one or more LCDs, wherein one or more of the LCDs, in one or more embodiments, function as polarization rotators. The shield is, in one or more embodiments, a louver MEMs device.

[00188] The louver MEMs device is opaque, and the louver MEMs device, in one or more embodiments, changes the angle of incidence on a pixel-by-pixel basis. The shield is a sliding panel MEMs device, and the sliding panel MEMs device slides back and forth in one or more embodiments to modify the covering range.

[00189] In another embodiment, there is provided a method for displaying virtual content, the method comprising projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data, projecting the projected light through a polarization sensitive layer Rotating the polarization of the light, and modulating the polarization of the light to selectively attenuate the light passing through the polarization layer.

[00190] The polarization modulator is, in one or more embodiments, a liquid crystal array. The method further includes creating a parallax barrier for offsetting the polarizer so that different exit pupils have different paths through the polariser, in one or more embodiments. The polarizer is, in one or more embodiments, an xpol polarizer. The polarizer is, in one or more embodiments, a multiPol polarizer. The polarizer is, in one or more embodiments, a patterned polariser.

[00191] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content includes: a light generating source for providing light associated with one or more frames of image data; a light generating source is a spatial light modulator; and a micro-electro wherein the MEMs louvers are housed in a substantially transparent substrate, the MEMs louvers are configurable to change the angle at which light is transmitted to the pixels, and the angle of the first pixel delivered to the user is And is different from the second pixel to be transmitted.

[00192] The at least one optical component includes, in one or more embodiments, a first array of micro-electro-mechanical system (MEMS) louvers. The array of MEMS louvers include, in one or more embodiments, a plurality of substantially opaque louvers carried by an optically transparent substrate. The array of micro-electro-mechanical system (MEMS) louvers, in one or more embodiments, has a louver pitch that is sufficiently high to selectively hide light on a pixel-by-pixel basis. Wherein the system further comprises at least one optical component of the visor, wherein the optical component comprises a second array of MEMS louvers, and wherein the second array of MEMS louvers comprises, in one or more embodiments, 1 array and stack configuration.

[00193] The array of MEMS louvers comprises, in one or more embodiments, a plurality of polarizing louvers carried by an optically transparent substrate, wherein the individual polarization states of each of the louvers are selectively controllable. The louvers of the first and second arrays of MEMS panels are, in one or more embodiments, polarizers. At least one optical component of the visor includes, in one or more embodiments, a first array of micro-electro-mechanical system (MEMS) panels mounted for movement in a frame.

[00194] The panels of the first array of MEMS panels, in one or more embodiments, are slidably mounted for movement in the frame. The panels of the first array of MEMS panels are pivotally mounted for movement in a frame, in one or more embodiments. The panels of the first array of MEMS panels are mounted translationally and pivotally for movement in the frame, in one or more embodiments. In one or more embodiments, the panels are movable to produce a moiré pattern. At least one optical component of the visor further comprises a second array of MEMS panels mounted for movement in the frame and the second array is in a first array and stack configuration in one or more embodiments . The panels of the first and second arrays of MEMS panels are polarizers. The at least one optical component of the visor includes, in one or more embodiments, a reflector array.

[00195] In another embodiment, the system includes at least one waveguide for receiving light from an external environment and directing the light to one or more spatial light modulators, wherein one or more spatial light modulators are located within a user's field of view And selectively attenuates the received light at different portions. The at least one waveguide includes first and second waveguides and the second waveguide is configured to transmit light out of the SLMs to the user's eye in one or more embodiments.

[00196] In another embodiment, the method includes receiving light from an external environment, directing light to the selective attenuator, and selectively attenuating the received light at different portions of the user's view through the selective attenuator .

[00197] The at least one waveguide includes first and second waveguides and the second waveguide is configured to transmit light out of the SLMs to the user's eye in one or more embodiments. The selectivity attenuator is, in one or more embodiments, a spatial light modulator. The spatial light modulator is, in one or more embodiments, a DMD array. In one or more embodiments, the light is directed to one or more spatial light modulators through one or more waveguides. The method further comprises, in one or more embodiments, partially recombining the light into the waveguide so that the light is partially directed towards the user's eye. The waveguide, in one or more embodiments, is oriented substantially orthogonal to the selectable attenuator.

[00198] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes: a light generating source for providing light associated with one or more frames of image data, the light generating source including a plurality of micro projectors; and And a waveguide configured to receive light from the plurality of microprojectors and transmit the light to the user's eye.

[00199] The microprojectors are arranged in a linear array, in one or more embodiments. The microprojectors, in one or more embodiments, are disposed at one edge of the waveguide. Microprojectors are placed at multiple edges of the waveguide. The microprojectors, in one or more embodiments, are arranged in a two-dimensional array. The microprojectors, in one or more embodiments, are arranged in a three-dimensional array. The microprojectors, in one or more embodiments, are disposed at a plurality of edges of the substrate. The microprojectors are arranged in multiple angles, in one or more embodiments.

[00200] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content includes an image generation source for providing one or more frames of image data, wherein the image data comprises one or more virtual objects to be presented to the user, and And a rendering engine for rendering one or more virtual objects in such a way that a halo is perceived by the user around one or more virtual objects.

[00201] The system further includes an optical attenuator that, in one or more embodiments, balances the light intensity of the halo throughout the user's field of view.

[00202] In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content includes providing one or more frames of image data, the image data including one or more virtual objects to be presented to a user, and a halo ) Is recognized by the user around one or more virtual objects, thereby rendering the virtual object more visible to the user, wherein the virtual object is a dark virtual object .

[00203] The method further comprises selectively attenuating light received from an external environment through an optical attenuator, wherein the optical attenuator balances the light intensity of the halo over the user ' s view, in one or more embodiments .

[00204] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content includes, in one or more embodiments, a camera system for capturing a view of the real world, an optical system for displaying one or more virtual objects overlapping a view of the real world, Time-through system - a captured view is used to render one or more virtual objects provided to a user, and at least a portion of the correlation between one or more real objects and one or more virtual objects To modulate the light intensity of the view of the real world based on the light intensity of the dark virtual object, such that the dark virtual object is visible in contrast to one or more real objects.

[00205] The captured view is used to generate a halo around one or more virtual objects, and in one or more embodiments, the halo is blurred across the space. The system further includes an optical attenuator that, in one or more embodiments, balances the light intensity of the halo throughout the user's field of view.

[00206] In another embodiment, a method of driving an augmented reality display system includes rendering a first virtual object at a location in the user's field of view, and substantially simultaneously rendering the first virtual object, And rendering the visual highlight at least spatially close to the virtual object.

[00207] The step of rendering the visible highlight comprises, in one or more embodiments, rendering a visible highlight with intensity gradients. The step of rendering the visible highlight comprises, in one or more embodiments, blurring near the periphery of the visible highlight to render the visible highlight.

[00208] Rendering the visible highlight at least spatially close to the rendered first virtual object comprises rendering the halo visual effect spatially close to the rendered first virtual object in one or more embodiments do. Rendering the halo visual effect at least spatially close to the rendered first virtual object comprises rendering the halo visual effect to be brighter than the rendered first virtual object in one or more embodiments do.

[00209] Rendering the halo visual effect to be brighter than the rendered first virtual object is performed in response to a determination that the rendered first virtual object is darker than the dark threshold in one or more embodiments . Rendering the halo visual effect includes rendering the halo visual effect in a focal plane separate from the first virtual object rendered in the perceived three-dimensional space in one or more embodiments. The step of rendering the halo visual effect includes, in one or more embodiments, rendering a halo visual effect having an intensity gradient. The step of rendering the halo visual effect may comprise, in one or more embodiments, having a intensity gradient matching the dark halo resulting from the occlusion applied to the rendering of the first virtual object to compensate for the dark field effect of the occlusion Halo includes steps to render visual effects

[00210] The step of rendering the halo visual effect includes, in one or more embodiments, blurring near the halo visual effect to render the halo visual effect. The rendered first visual object has a non-circular perimeter, and in one or more embodiments, the rendered halo visual effect follows a non-circular perimeter. Rendering the visible highlight at least spatially close to the rendered first virtual object comprises, in one or more embodiments, rendering the visible first highlight in a separate focal plane from the first virtual object rendered in the perceivable three- And rendering the effect. The step of rendering the visual effect in a separate focal plane from the first virtual object rendered in the perceived three-dimensional space may comprise, in one or more embodiments, And rendering the visible effect in a focal plane relatively far away from the user.

[00211] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content includes an image generation source for providing one or more frames of image data to be provided to a user, one or more frames of image data comprising at least one dark virtual object And a rendering image for rendering one or more frames of image data, the rendering engine rendering the dark virtual object as a blue virtual object in order to make the dark virtual object visible to the user.

[00212] Rendering a first virtual object at a location in the user's field of view includes, in one or more embodiments, first changing any dark intonations of the first virtual object to a dark blue color.

[00213] In yet another embodiment, a system for transmitting light beams for display of virtual content comprises at least one waveguide-at least one waveguide having a first end and a second end spaced from the first end over the length of the at least one waveguide, Wherein light enters the individual waveguides at angular frequencies defined by total internal reflection along the length of the at least one waveguide to optically reflexively recombine the light at the first end of the at least one waveguide, At least one edge reflector positioned at least proximate to the first end and at least one edge reflector positioned at least near the second end of the at least one waveguide for optically reflectively recombining the light at the second end of the at least one waveguide, And one edge reflector.

[00214] The at least one waveguide has a plurality of transverse reflective and / or diffractive surfaces within the waveguide that, in one or more embodiments, redirect at least a portion of the light transversely to the exterior of the waveguide. The transverse reflectivity and / or diffraction surfaces are, in one or more embodiments, low diffraction efficiency diffractive optical elements (DOEs). The at least one edge reflector positioned at least near the first end of the at least one waveguide includes a plurality of reflectors positioned at least near the first end of the at least one waveguide in one or more embodiments do.

[00215] The at least one edge reflector positioned at least proximate to the second end of the at least one waveguide includes a plurality of positioned reflectors at least adjacent to the second end of the at least one waveguide in one or more embodiments do. The at least one waveguide is, in one or more embodiments, a single waveguide.

[00216] In another embodiment, a system for transmitting light beams for display of virtual content comprises a waveguide assembly comprising a plurality of flat waveguides, each flat waveguide having at least two Each having a plane parallel perimeters, a first end, and a second end opposite the first end over the length of the waveguide, wherein light enters the individual waveguides at angles propagated through the total internal reflection, Two planar major edges are opposed across the width of the waveguide and a plurality of planar waveguides are arranged along a first axis parallel to the thicknesses of the planar waveguides and along the widths of the planar waveguides And is stacked along a parallel second axis.

[00217] In one or more embodiments there are at least three flat waveguides stacked in the direction of the first axis. In one or more embodiments there are at least three flat waveguides stacked in the direction of the second axis. In one or more embodiments there are at least three flat waveguides stacked in the direction of the second axis. In one or more embodiments, the continuous plate waveguides of the stack along the first axis are immediately adjacent to each other, and the continuous plate waveguides of the stack along the second axis are immediately adjacent to each other. The waveguide assembly further includes a plurality of reflective layers carried on at least one surface of at least one of the planar waveguides in one or more embodiments.

[00218] The reflective layers include fully reflective metallic coatings. The reflective layers comprise wavelength-specific reflectors in one or more embodiments. The reflective layers separate planar waveguides of each successive pair of planar waveguides along at least one of the first or second axes in one or more embodiments. The reflective layers separate planar waveguides of each successive pair of planar waveguides along both the first and second axes in one or more embodiments.

[00219] Each of the plurality of planar waveguides includes a plurality of transverse reflective and / or diffractive surfaces that laterally redirect at least a portion of the light received by the individual planar waveguides to the outside of the planar waveguide in one or more embodiments. The transverse reflector and / or diffractive surfaces comprise diffractive optical elements sandwiched between separate planar waveguides between the major faces of the individual planar waveguides in one or more embodiments. In one or more embodiments, the diffractive optical elements are selectively operable to change the focal length.

[00220] In one or more embodiments, the first axis is a curved axis and at least one of the major edges of each of the planar waveguides of at least one set of waveguide assemblies is oriented to focus on a single line, The lengths of which are parallel to each other.

[00221] In one or more embodiments, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes, in one or more embodiments, a light projector for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data, - the optical projector is a fiber scanning display; And a waveguide assembly for variably deflecting light to the user's eye, wherein the waveguide is curved concave towards the eye.

[00222] In one or more embodiments, the curved waveguide extends the field of view. In one or more embodiments, the curved waveguide efficiently directs light to the user's eye. In one or more embodiments, the curved waveguide includes a time-variable grating to create an axis for scanning light for the fiber scanning display.

[00223] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes, in one or more embodiments, an input for receiving light, and at least a portion of the light received at the entrance to a user's eye outside the transmissive beam splitter substrate A transmissive beam splitter substrate having a plurality of internal reflective or diffractive surfaces angled with respect to the entrance to redirect transversely, the plurality of reflective or diffractive surfaces having a plurality of transverse reflections and / or diffractive surfaces spaced along the longitudinal axis of the transmissive beam- Wherein each of the transversal and / or diffractive surfaces are angled or angled relative to the entrance to reflect at least a portion of the light received at the entrance transversely to the exterior of the transmissive beam splitter substrate along the optical path towards the user's eye, It is possible to constitute -; A light generating system for transmitting light to the transmissive beam splitter; And a local controller communicatively coupled to the display system to provide image information to the display system, wherein the local controller comprises at least one processor, and at least one non-transitory processor readable communicatively coupled to the at least one processor, And at least one non-volatile processor readable medium, when executed by the at least one processor, causes the at least one processor to perform at least one of processing, caching, and storing data, At least one of processor-executable instructions or data that causes the display to provide image information to generate at least one of a virtual or augmented reality visual experience.

[00224] In one or more embodiments, the transverse reflector and / or diffractive surfaces comprise at least one diffractive optical element (DOE), and the collimated beam entering the beam splitter at a plurality of defined angles comprises a beam splitter Total internal along the length, and intersects the DOE at one or more locations. At least one diffractive optical element (DOE) comprises a first grating in one or more embodiments. The first grating is a first Bragg grating in one or more embodiments.

[00225] In one or more embodiments, the DOE comprises a second grating, wherein the first grating is on a first plane, the second grating is on a second plane, and the second plane comprises a first and a second The gratings are spaced from the first plane to allow them to interact to create a moiré beat pattern. In one or more embodiments, the first grating has a first pitch, the second grating has a second pitch, and the first pitch is equal to the second pitch. In one or more embodiments, the first grating has a first pitch, the second grating has a second pitch, and the first pitch is different from the second pitch. In one or more embodiments, the first grating pitch is controllable to change the first grating pitch over time. In one or more embodiments, the first grating comprises a resilient material, and a mechanical deformation is made.

[00226] The first grating is carried in one or more embodiments by an elastic material that undergoes mechanical deformation. The first grating pitch is controllable to change the first grating pitch over time in one or more embodiments. The second grating pitch is controllable to change the second grating pitch over time in one or more embodiments. In one or more embodiments, the first grating is an electro-active grating having at least one ON state and an OFF state. In one or more embodiments, the first grating comprises a polymer dispersed liquid crystal, and a plurality of liquid crystal droplets of the polymer dispersed liquid crystal is controllably activated to change the refractive index of the first grating.

[00227] In one or more embodiments, the first grating is a time-variable grating, the first grating is a time-variable grating, and the local controller controls at least a first grating to extend the view of the display. In one or more embodiments, the first grating is a time-variable grating, and the local controller uses at least a time-varying control of the first grating to correct chromatic aberration. In one or more embodiments, the local controller drives at least a first grating to change the red sub-pixel placement of the pixels of the image for at least one of the blue or green sub-pixels of a corresponding pixel of the image do. The local controller drives at least the first grating to laterally shift the projection pattern to fill the gap in the outbound image pattern in one or more embodiments.

[00228] The at least one DOE element has, in one or more embodiments, a first round-symmetric term. In one or more embodiments, the at least one DOE element has a first linear term and the first linear term is summed with the first circular-symmetric term. The circular-symmetry term is controllable in one or more embodiments. At least one DOE element has a second first circular-symmetric term in one or more embodiments. The at least one diffractive optical (DOE) element comprises a first DOE in one or more embodiments. The first DOE is a circular DOE in one or more embodiments.

[00229] The circular DOE is a time-varying DOE in one or more embodiments. The circular DOE is layered relative to the waveguide for focus modulation in one or more embodiments. The diffraction pattern of the circular DOE is static in one or more embodiments. The diffraction pattern of the circular DOE is dynamic in one or more embodiments. In one or more embodiments, the system includes additional circular DOEs, and additional circular DOEs are positioned relative to the circular DOE so that many focus levels are achieved through a small number of switchable DOEs.

[00230] The system further includes a matrix of switchable DOE elements in one or more embodiments. The matrix is utilized to extend the field of view in one or more embodiments. The matrix is utilized to extend the size of the exit pupil in one or more embodiments.

[00231] In one or more embodiments, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes, in one or more embodiments, at least one or more of the following: light for projecting light beams associated with one or more frames of image data Projecting system; And a diffractive optical element (DOE) for receiving the projected light beams and delivering the light beams to a desired focus, wherein the DOE is a circular DOE.

[00232] The DOE is stretchable along a single axis to adjust the angle of the linear DOE term in one or more embodiments. The DOE may be used in one or more embodiments to provide at least one, at least one, and / or at least one And a transducer. In one or more embodiments, the DOE is embedded in a stretchable medium so that the pitch of the DOE can be adjusted by physically stretching the stretchable media. In one or more embodiments, the DOE is stretched in two axes, and the stretching of the DOE affects the focal length of the DOE. The system further includes a plurality of circular DOEs in one or more embodiments, and the DOEs are stacked along the Z-axis. The circular DOE is layered before the waveguide for focuser modulation. The DOE is static in one or more embodiments.

[00233] In one or more embodiments, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes, in one or more embodiments, at least one or more of the following: light for projecting light beams associated with one or more frames of image data Projecting system; A first waveguide-first waveguide without any DOEs (diffractive optical elements) propagates light received by the first waveguide at a plurality of defined angles along at least a portion of the length of the first waveguide through total internal reflection And externally providing light from the first waveguide as collimated light; A second waveguide having at least a first circular-symmetric diffractive optical element (DOE), the second waveguide being optically coupled to receive the collimated light from the first waveguide; And a processor for controlling the gratings of the DOE.

[00234] The first DOE is selectively controllable in one or more embodiments. In one or more embodiments, the display comprises a plurality of additional DOEs in addition to the first DOE, and the DOEs are arranged in a stack configuration. Each of the DOE's of a plurality of additional DOEs is selectively controllable in one or more embodiments. The local controller controls the first DOE and the plurality of additional DOEs to dynamically modulate the focus of light passing through the display in one or more embodiments. In one or more embodiments, the processor selectively switches respectively the first DOE and the plurality of additional DOEs to realize multiple focus levels, and the number of feasible focus levels is greater than the total number of DOEs in the stack Big.

[00235] In one or more embodiments, each of the DOEs in the stack has discrete optical power, and the optical powers of the DOEs in the stack are additionally statically controllable relative to each other. In one or more embodiments, the discrete optical power of at least one of the DOEs in the stack is twice the discrete optical power of at least one other of the DOEs in the stack. In one or more embodiments, the processor selectively switches the first DOE and the plurality of additional DOEs, respectively, to modulate the individual linear and radial terms of the DOEs over time. In one or more embodiments, the processor selectively switches the first DOE and the plurality of additional DOEs on a frame sequential basis, respectively.

[00236] The stack of DOEs includes a stack of polymer dispersed liquid crystal elements. In one or more embodiments, in the absence of an applied voltage, the host medium index of refraction matches the index of refraction of the set of dispersed molecules of polymer dispersed liquid crystal elements. In one or more embodiments, the polymer dispersed liquid crystal elements comprise a plurality of transparent indium tin oxide layer electrodes on either side of the host medium and molecules of lithium niobate, The molecules controllably change the refractive index in the host medium and functionally form a diffraction pattern.

[00237] In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content includes, in one or more embodiments, projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data to a user; Receiving light at a first waveguide - the first waveguide has no diffractive optical elements - propagating light through an inner reflection; And receiving collimated light in a second waveguide having at least a first circular-symmetric diffractive optical element (DOE), wherein the second waveguide is optically coupled to receive the collimated light from the first waveguide, The grating of the circularly symmetric DOE is changed and the first waveguide and the second waveguide are assembled in the stack of DOEs.

[00238] In one or more embodiments, an optical element for displaying virtual content to a user comprises, in one or more embodiments, at least one diffractive optical element (DOE) positioned to receive light, The at least one DOE comprises a first array of a plurality of separately addressable sections having at least one electrode for each of the separately addressable sub-sections, each of the separately addressable sub-sections having at least a first state and a second state Wherein the second state is different from the first state, wherein the second state is different from the first state.

[00239] In one or more embodiments, the field of view is expanded by multiplexing adjacent addressable subsections. In one or more embodiments, the first state is an ON state and the second state is an OFF state. In one or more embodiments, each of the separately addressable sub-sections has a separate set of at least two indium tin oxide electrodes. In one or more embodiments, the first array of the plurality of separately addressable sections of the at least one DOE is a one-dimensional array. In one or more embodiments, the first array of the plurality of separately addressable sections of the at least one DOE is a two-dimensional array. In one or more embodiments, the first array of separately addressable sections are sections of the first DOE that reside on the first planar layer.

[00240] In one or more embodiments, at least one DOE comprises at least a second DOE, and the second DOE comprises a plurality of separately addressable sections having at least one electrode for each separately addressable sub-section, Each of the separately addressable subsections responsive to at least one discrete signal received via at least one discrete electrode to selectively switch between at least a first state and a second state, 1 state, the second array of DOEs resides on the second flat plate layer, and the second flat plate layer is in stacked configuration with the first flat plate layer.

[00241] In one or more embodiments, the at least one DOE comprises at least a third DOE, and the third DOE comprises a third plurality of separately addressable sections having at least one electrode for each separately addressable sub- Each of the separately addressable subsections responsive to at least one discrete signal received via at least one discrete electrode to selectively switch between at least a first state and a second state, 1 state, the third array of DOEs resides on the third planar layer, and the third planar layer is stacked with the first and second planar layers.

[00242] In one or more embodiments, the first array of separately addressable subsections is embedded in a single plate waveguide. In one or more embodiments, the local control selectively controls separately addressable subsections to emit collimated light from the planar waveguide at a first time and emit divergent light from the planar waveguide at a second time, 2 hours is different from the first time. In one or more embodiments, the local control selectively controls separately addressable subsections to emit in a first direction from the planar waveguide at a first time and in a second direction from a planar waveguide at a second time And the second direction is different from the first direction.

[00243] In one or more embodiments, the local control controls separately addressable subsections to selectively scan light in one direction over time. In one or more embodiments, the local control controls separately addressable subsections to selectively focus the light over time. In one or more embodiments, the local control controls separately addressable subsections to selectively change the field of view of the exit pupil over time.

[00244] In one or more embodiments, the system includes, in one or more embodiments, a first free-form reflective and lens optical component for increasing the magnitude of the field of view for a defined set of optical parameters, Wherein the one-freestyle reflection and lens optical component comprises a first curved surface, a second curved surface, and a third curved surface, wherein the first curved surface is at least partially optically transmissive and refractive, Shaped surface and imparts a focus change to the light received by the lens optic component through the mold surface and the second curved surface imparts light received by the second curved surface from the first curved surface to the third free- At least partially reflecting towards the curved surface, passing the light received by the second curved surface from the third curved surface, and the third curved surface 2 and the free-form reflecting the first reflected light and an optical lens out of the component, at least in part through a curved surface.

[00245] In one or more embodiments, the first curved surface of the first free-form reflective and lens optical component is a discrete free-form curved surface. In one or more embodiments, the first curved surface of the first free-form reflective and lens optical component adds cinematic stigmatism to the light. In one or more embodiments, the third curved surface of the first free-form reflective and lens optical component is opposite to the first free-form surface of the first free-form reflection and the lens curvature surface added by the first curved surface of the lens optical component Adds a movie score difference. In one or more embodiments, the second curved surface of the first free-form reflective and lens optical component is a discrete free-form curved surface. In one or more embodiments, the second free-form reflection and the second curved surface of the lens optical component reflect at defined angles of light to be reflected by internal total reflection toward the third curved surface.

[00246] In one or more embodiments, the system includes a fiber scanning display for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data in one or more embodiments. Configured to transmit light to the optical element; And a first free-form reflective and lens optical component for increasing the magnitude of the field of view for a defined set of optical parameters, wherein the first free-form reflective and lens optical component comprises a first curved surface, a second curved surface, 3 curved surface, the first curved surface being at least partially optically transmissive and refractive and having a first free-form reflection through the first curved surface and a focus change for the light received by the lens optical component And the second curved surface at least partially reflects light received by the second curved surface from the first curved surface toward the third curved surface and extends from the third curved surface to the second curved surface And the third curved surface passes the first free-form reflection through the second curved surface and the light outside the lens optical component Reflect partially.

[00247]  In one or more embodiments, the free-form optics are TIR free-form optics. In one or more embodiments, the free-form optics have a non-uniform thickness. In one or more embodiments, the free-form optics are wedge optics. In one or more embodiments, the free-form optics are cones. In one or more embodiments, the free-form optics correspond to arbitrary curves.

[00248] In one or more embodiments, the system includes an image generation source for providing one or more frames of image data to be presented to a user in one or more embodiments; A display system for providing light associated with one or more frames of image data; And a free-form optical element for modifying the provided light and delivering the light to a user, wherein the free-form optical element comprises a reflective coating portion, the display system comprising a free-form optical element for matching the wavelength of the light with a corresponding wavelength of the reflective coating, As shown in FIG.

[00249] One or more free-form optical elements are tiled relative to each other. In one or more embodiments, one or more free-form optical elements are tiled along the z-axis.

[00250] In one or more embodiments, the system includes an image generation source for providing one or more frames of image data to be presented to a user in one or more embodiments; A display system for providing light associated with one or more frames of image data, the display system comprising a plurality of microdisks; And a free-form optical element for modifying the provided light and delivering light to the user.

[00251] One or more free-form optics are tiled relative to each other. In one or more embodiments, the light projected by the plurality of microdisplays increases the field of view. In one or more embodiments, the free-form optical elements are configured to allow only one color to be transmitted by a particular free-form optical element. In one or more embodiments, the tiled freeform is a star shape. In one or more embodiments, the tiled free-form optical elements increase the size of the exit pupil. In one or more embodiments, the system further includes other free-form optical elements, and the free-form optical elements are stacked together in a manner that produces a uniform material thickness. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises another free-form optical element, and the other free-form optical element is configured to capture light corresponding to the external environment.

[00252] In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a DMD, wherein the DMD is configured to cover one or more pixels. The system further includes one or more LCDs. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a contact lens substrate, wherein the free-form optics are coupled to the contact lens substrate. In one or more embodiments, a plurality of microdisplays provide an array of small exit pupils collectively forming the same function as a large exit pupil.

[00253] In one or more embodiments, at least one image source may include at least a first monochromatic image source providing light of a first color, at least a second monochromatic image source providing light of a second color, And at least a third monochromatic image source providing light of a third color, wherein the third color is different from the first and second colors. In one or more embodiments, at least a first monochromatic image source comprises a first subgroup of scanning fibers, at least a second monochromatic image source comprises a second subgroup of scanning fibers, The image source comprises a third subgroup of scanning fibers.

[00254] The system further includes a first free-form reflection and a visor positioned in an optical path between the lens optical component and the at least one reflector, wherein the visor is operable to selectively shield the light on a pixel-by-pixel basis. The first free-form reflective and lens optical component forms at least a portion of the contact lens. In one or more embodiments, the system further comprises a compensator lens optically coupled to the first free-form reflection and a portion of the lens optical component.

[00255] In one or more embodiments, the system includes a first free-form reflective and lens optical component for increasing the magnitude of the field of view for a defined set of optical parameters in one or more embodiments, And the lens optical component comprises a first surface, a second surface, and a third surface, wherein the first surface is at least partially optically reflective to light received by the first free- Wherein the second surface is curved and reflects light received by the second surface from the first surface at least partially toward the third surface and passes light received by the second surface from the third surface, The third surface is curved and at least partially reflects light out of the first free-form reflection and lens optical component through the second surface; And a second free-form reflective and lens optical component-a second free-form reflective and lens optical component includes a first surface, a second surface, and a third surface, At least partially optically transmissive to light received by the second free-form reflection and lens optical component through the second free-form reflection and lens optic component, the second surface of the second free-form reflection and lens optic component is curved, At least partially reflecting light received by the second surface from the first surface of the component toward a third surface of the second free-form reflection and lens optical component, and from the third surface of the second free- The third surface of the second free-form reflection and lens optic component is curved, and the third surface of the second free- 2 reflective surface, and at least partially reflects light out of the lens optic component through the second free-form reflection and lens optic components, wherein the first and second free-form reflective and lens optical components are in a stacked configuration oriented oppositely along the Z-axis.

[00256] In one or more embodiments, the second surface of the second free-form reflection and lens optical component is adjacent to the third free-form reflection and the third surface of the lens optical component. In one or more embodiments, the second surface of the second free-form reflective and lens optical component is concave, the third free-form reflection and the third surface of the lens optical component are convex, and the first free- Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > second < / RTI > free-form reflection and the second surface of the lens optical component. In one or more embodiments, the first surface of the first free-form reflective and lens optical component is planar, the first surface of the second free-form reflective and lens optical component is planar, and the system includes a first free- At least a first projector optically coupled to the first free-form reflective and lens optical component through a first surface of the lens optical component; And at least a second projector optically coupled to the second free-form reflective and lens optical component through a first surface of the second free-form reflective and lens optical component.

[00257] The system further comprises, in one or more embodiments, at least one wavelength selective material carried by at least one of the first or second freestyle reflection and lens optical components. The system comprises, in one or more embodiments, at least a first wavelength selective material carried by first free-form reflective and lens optical components, and at least a second wavelength Wherein the first wavelength-selective material selects a first set of wavelengths, the second wavelength-selective material selects a second set of wavelengths, the second set of wavelengths comprises a first set of wavelengths and a first set of wavelengths, It is different.

[00258] The system may further include, in one or more embodiments, at least a first polarizer carried by the first free-form reflective and lens optical components, and at least a second polarizer carried by the second free-form reflective and lens optical components And the first polarizer has a different polarization orientation than the second polarizer.

[00259] In one or more embodiments, the optical fiber cores are in the same fiber cladding. In one or more embodiments, the optical fiber cores are in separate fiber claddings. The perspective adjustment module indirectly tracks perspective adjustments by tracking convergence or gaze of user eyes in one or more embodiments. The partially reflecting mirror has, in one or more embodiments, a relatively high reflectance for the polarization of light provided by the light source and a relatively low reflectance for the other polarization states of the light provided by the outside world. The plurality of partial reflective mirrors, in one or more embodiments, includes a dielectric coating. The plurality of reflective mirrors may have, in one or more embodiments, a relatively high reflectance for the waveguides for the wavelengths of light provided by the light source and a relatively low reflectance for the other waveguides of the light provided by the outer world Respectively. VFE is, in one or more embodiments, a deformable mirror, and the surface shape of the deformable mirror may change over time. In one or more embodiments, the VFE is a electrostatically operated membrane mirror, and the waveguide or additional transparent layer comprises one or more substantially transparent electrodes, and the one or more electrodes The voltage electrostatically deforms the membrane mirror. In one or more embodiments, the light source is a scanning optical display, and the VFE changes focus on a line segment basis. In one or more embodiments, the waveguide includes an exit pupil dilation function, wherein the input light beam is split and out-coupled as a plurality of rays exiting the waveguide at multiple locations. In one or more embodiments, before the waveguide receives one or more of the light patterns, the image data is transmitted to the optical image < RTI ID = 0.0 > And scaled by the processor to compensate for the change and the change.

[00260] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes an image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner, one or more frames of image data, A display assembly for projecting associated rays, the display assembly including a first display element corresponding to a first frame-rate and a first bit depth, and a second display element corresponding to a second frame-rate and a second bit depth And a variable focus element (VFE) that is configurable to change the focus of the projected light and transmit the light to the user's eye.

[00261] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content includes an array of optical fiber cores for transmitting light beams associated with an image to be presented to a user, and a plurality of optical fiber cores output by an array of optical fiber cores through a single nodal point A lens coupled to the array of optical fiber cores for deflecting the light beams, wherein the lens is physically attached to the optical fiber cores for movement of the optical fiber core to move the lens, and a single nodal point is scanned .

[00262] In another embodiment, a virtual reality display system includes a plurality of optical fiber cores for generating light beams associated with one or more images to be presented to a user, and a plurality of optical fiber cores for modulating the optical beams The plurality of phase modulators modulating the light in a manner that affects the resulting wavefront of the plurality of light beams.

[00263] In one embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes a light projection system for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data to user eyes, the light projection system comprising a plurality of Configured to project light corresponding to the pixels, and a processor for modulating the focal spot size of the plurality of pixels displayed to the user.

[00264] In one embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes an image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data, a light source for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data, A plurality of core fibers, one of the plurality of core fibers emitting light at the wavefront, thereby causing the core assembly to produce an algrite wavefront of the projected light -, and inducing phase delays between multi-core fibers in such a way that the aggregate wavefront emitted by the multi-core assembly is altered thereby changing the focal length at which the user recognizes one or more frames of image data And a phase modulator.

[00265] In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user includes: an array of microprojectors for projecting light beams associated with one or more frames of image data to be presented to a user, A frame for housing an array of microprojectors, one or more light beams for one or more microprojectors relative to the array of microprojectors, a frame for housing an array of microprojectors, In order to control one or more light beams transmitted from one or more projectors in such a way as to be able to transmit the bright field image to the user by being modulated as a function of the position of the projectors, And a processor operatively coupled to the one of the array, or a micro-projector of the excess.

[00266] Additional objects, features, and advantages of the present invention and other objects, features, and advantages are set forth in the description, drawings, and claims.

[00267] FIG. 1 illustrates a view of a user of an augmented reality AR via a wearable AR user device, in an illustrative embodiment.
[00268] Figures 2A-2E illustrate various embodiments of wearable AR devices.
[00269] Figure 3 shows a cross-sectional view of a human eye, in one illustrated embodiment.
[00270] Figures 4A-4D illustrate one or more embodiments of various internal processing components of a wearable AR device.
[00271] Figures 5A-5H illustrate embodiments for transmitting light focused on a user through a transmissive beam splitter substrate.
[00272] Figures 6a and 6b illustrate embodiments of coupling the lens element with the transmissive beam-splitter substrate of Figures 5a-5h.
[00273] Figures 7a and 7b illustrate embodiments that utilize one or more waveguides for transmitting light to a user.
[00274] Figures 8A-8Q illustrate embodiments of a diffractive optical element (DOE).
[00275] Figures 9a and b illustrate wavefronts generated from a light projector, according to an illustrative embodiment.
[00276] FIG. 10 illustrates an embodiment of a stacked configuration of multiple transmissive beam splitter substrates coupled with optical elements, in accordance with one illustrated embodiment.
[00277] Figures 11a-11c illustrate a set of beamlets that are projected into a user's pupil, according to the illustrated embodiments.
[00278] Figures 12A-12B illustrate arrangements of arrays of microprojectors, in accordance with the illustrated embodiments.
[00279] Figures 13A-13M illustrate embodiments for combining microprojectors with optical elements, in accordance with the illustrated embodiments.
[00280] Figures 14A-14F illustrate embodiments of spatial light modulators associated with optical elements, in accordance with the illustrated embodiments.
[00281] Figures 15A-C illustrate the use of edge-type waveguides with a plurality of light sources, in accordance with the illustrated embodiments.
[00282] Figures 16a-16o illustrate embodiments for coupling optical elements to optical fibers, in accordance with the illustrated embodiments.
[00283] FIG. 17 illustrates a notch filter, according to one illustrated embodiment.
[00284] FIG. 18 illustrates a spiral pattern of a fiber scanning display according to an exemplary embodiment.
[00285] Figures 19a-19n illustrate occlusion effects in presenting a dark field to a user, in accordance with the illustrated embodiments.
[00286] Figures 20a-20o illustrate embodiments of various waveguide assemblies, in accordance with the illustrated embodiments.
[00287] Figures 21a-21n illustrate various configurations of DOEs coupled to different optical elements, in accordance with the illustrated embodiments.
[00288] Figures 22A-22Y illustrate various configurations of a free-form optics, in accordance with the illustrated embodiments.

[00289] Referring to Figures 4A-4D, several general component options are shown. In the portions of the detailed description following the description of Figures 4A-4D, various systems, subsystems, and components may be used for purposes of providing a high quality, comfortably perceived display system for a human VR and / It is presented for solving.

[00290] An AR system user 60 is shown wearing a frame structure 64 that is coupled to a display system 62 that is positioned in front of the user's eyes, as shown in FIG. 4A. A speaker 66 is coupled to the frame 64 of the illustrated configuration and is positioned adjacent to the user's ear canal (in one embodiment, another speaker (not shown) Positioned adjacent to the ear canal). The display 62 is operatively coupled 68 to the local processing and data module 70, such as by wired leads or wireless connections, and the local processing and data module 70 is coupled to the frame 4b, fixedly attached to the helmet or hat 80 as shown in the embodiment of Fig. 4b, embedded in the headphones, Detachably attached to the torso 82 of the user 60 in a backpack-style configuration as shown in the embodiment, or detachably attached to the torso 82 of the user 60 in a backpack- 60, respectively.

[00291] The local processing and data module 70 includes a power-efficient processor or controller as well as a digital memory, such as a flash memory, two of which include a) image capture devices (such as cameras) Such as inertial measurement units, accelerometers, compasses, GPS units, radio devices, and / or gyros, which are operably coupled to the frame 64, and b) To assist in the processing, caching, and storage of data that is captured and / or processed using remote processing module 72 and / or remote data repository 74, which allows for passage to the display 62 after retrieval Can be used. The local processing and data module 70 may be operatively coupled 76 to the remote processing module 72 and the remote data repository 74 via wired or wireless communication links, 72 and 74 are operably coupled to each other and are available as resources to the local processing and data module 70. In one embodiment, remote processing module 72 may include one or more relatively powerful processors or controllers configured to analyze and / or process data and / or image information. In one embodiment, the remote data repository 74 may include a relatively large-scale digital data storage facility that may be available over the Internet or other network configurations in a "cloud" resource configuration. In one embodiment, all of the data is stored and all calculations are performed in the local processing and data module, allowing full automatic use from any remote modules.

[00292] 5A through 22Y, there is shown an example of a system that has photonic-based radiation patterns that can be perceived comfortably as enhancements to the physical reality, and which can display two-dimensional content as well as having high- Various display configurations are designed to represent human eyes.

[00293] 5A, in a simplified example, a transmissive beam-splitter substrate 104 having a 45-degree reflective surface 102 passes from a lens (not shown) through the pupil 45 of the eye 58, Which directs the incoming radiation 106 that may be output to the light source 54. The field of view for such a system is limited by the geometry of the beam splitter 104. In one embodiment, to accommodate the desire to have comfortable viewing with minimal hardware, in one embodiment, for example, the output of various different reflective and / or diffractive surfaces / reflections using a frame- A large field of view can be created, and eye 58 is represented by a sequence of frames at a high frequency that provides a perception of a single coherent scene. As an alternative to, or in addition to, presenting different image data through different reflectors in a time-sequential manner, the reflectors may separate the content by other means such as polarization selectivity or wavelength selectivity. In addition to being able to relay two-dimensional images, reflectors can relay three-dimensional wavefronts associated with true three-dimensional viewing of actual physical objects.

[00294] Referring to FIG. 5B, there is shown a substrate 108 comprising a plurality of reflectors at a plurality of angles 110, each reflectively actively reflecting in the configuration shown for illustrative purposes. Reflectors may be switchable elements that facilitate selection of time. In one embodiment, the reflective surfaces are intentionally activated sequentially using the frame-sequential input information 106, and each reflective surface is represented by different reflective surfaces to form a composite wide-view image. Images that are tiled together with other narrow field of view sub-images. For example, referring to Figures 5c, 5d and 5e, the surface 110 centered on the center of the substrate 108 is switched "on" in the reflective state, so that the other potential reflective surfaces are in the transmissive state The surface reflects the image information 106 that leads to a relatively narrow field of view sub-image in the middle of a larger field of view.

[00295] Referring to FIG. 5C, the angles of the beams 106 entering the substrate 108 input interface 112, and by the resulting angles as they exit the substrate 108, The incoming image information 106 arriving from the right side of the narrow view sub-image is reflected from the reflective surface 110 toward the eye 58. [ Figure 5d shows the active state of the same reflector 110 as it is shown by the angle of the input information 106 at the input interface 112 and the angle at which it exits the substrate 108, Image from the center of the sub-image. Figure 5e shows the image information that has image information being drawn from the left side of the field of view as shown by the angle of the input information 106 at the input interface 112 and the resulting exit angle at the surface of the substrate 108 The same reflector 110 is shown active. 5F shows a configuration in which the lower reflector 110 is active, in which the image information 106 is entering from the far right side of the entire field of view. For example, Figures 5c, 5d and 5e show one frame representing the center of a frame-sequential tile image, and Figure 5f can show a second frame representing the far-right side of the tile image.

[00296] In one embodiment, light carrying image information 106 is not reflected first from the surfaces of the substrate 108, but rather enters the reflective surface 110 immediately after entering the substrate 108 at the input interface 112 You can hit. In one embodiment, the light carrying image information 106 is reflected from one or more surfaces of the substrate 108 after being input to the input interface 112 and before hitting the reflective surface 110 Can be; For example, the substrate 108 may serve as a flat waveguide that propagates light carrying image information 106 by total internal reflection. The light may also be reflected from one or more surfaces of the substrate 108 from a partially reflective coating, a wavelength-selective coating, an angle-selective coating, and / or a polarization-selective coating.

[00297] In one embodiment, the angled reflectors may be configured with an electroactive material such that upon application of a voltage and / or current to a particular reflector, the refractive index of the material comprising such reflector is greater than the refractive index of the rest of the substrate 108 And in this case the reflector is a transmissive configuration with respect to the reflective configuration and the refractive index of the reflector is inconsistent with the refractive index of the substrate 108 so that a reflective effect is produced. For example, the electroactive material includes lithium niobate and electroactive polymers. Suitable substantially transparent electrodes for controlling a plurality of such reflectors may include materials such as indium tin oxide used in liquid crystal displays.

[00298] In one embodiment, the electroactive reflectors 110 may comprise a liquid crystal embedded in a substrate 108 host medium, such as glass or plastic. In some variations, a liquid crystal that changes the refractive index as a function of the applied electrical signal can be selected, so that more analogue changes can be achieved in contrast to binary (from one transmissive state to a one-reflective state). In one embodiment, in which six sub-images are shown in an eye frame-sequence to form a large tile image at a total refresh rate of 60 frames per second, an electro-active reflector array capable of sustaining about 360 Hz is used It is desirable to have an input display that can be refreshed at this rate of frequencies. In one embodiment, lithium niobate can be used as an electroactive reflective material in contrast to liquid crystals; Lithium niobate is used in the photonics industry for high speed switches and fiber optic networks and has the ability to switch refractive indices in response to voltages applied at very high frequencies; This high frequency can be used to steer line-sequential or pixel-sequential sub-image information, especially if the input display is a scanned optical display such as a fiber-scanned display or a scanning mirror-based display .

[00299] In another embodiment, the variable switchable angled mirror configuration may include one or more high speed mechanical relocatable reflective surfaces, such as micro-electro-mechanical system (MEMS) devices. MEMS devices may include what are known as "digital mirror devices" or "DMDs" (often referred to as "digital light processing" or "DLP" systems, such as those available from Texas Instruments). In other electromechanical embodiments, a plurality of air gap (or vacuum) reflective surfaces can be mechanically moved into and out of place at high frequencies. In another electromechanical embodiment, one reflective surface can be moved up and down and re-pitch at very high frequencies.

[00300] 5G, the switchable variable angle reflector arrangements described herein can transmit not only collimated or planar wavefront information to the retina 54 of the eye 58, It is noted that the curved wavefront 122 may convey image information. This is generally not the case with other waveguide-based configurations, and the total internal reflection of the curved wavefront information causes undesirable side effects, and therefore inputs must generally be collimated. The ability to transmit curvilinear wavefront information can be used to detect inputs that are recognized as focused at various distances from the eye 58, as well as optical infinity (which will be the interpretation of other cues without collimated light) Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > 5B-5H < / RTI >

[00301] Referring to Figure 5h, in another embodiment, an array of static partial reflective surfaces 116 (i. E., Always in reflective mode, in other embodiments, they may be electro- Can be embedded in the substrate 114 with the high frequency gating layer 118 controlling the outputs to the eye 58 by merely allowing transmission through the aperture 120 in a controllably movable state. In other words, everything except for transmissions through aperture 120 can be selectively blocked. The gating layer 118 may be any suitable structure that is configured to transmit or transmit at relatively high frequency switching and high transmittance when switched to a liquid crystal array, a lithium niobate array, an array of MEMS shutter elements, an array of DLP DMD elements, An array of MEMS devices.

[00302] 6A-6B, other embodiments are described, and the arrayed optical elements can be combined with the exit pupil extending configurations to facilitate the user's virtual or augmented reality experience. Using a large "exit pupil" for the optical configuration, the position of the person's eyes in relation to the display (which can be mounted on the user's head by categorizing the glasses of the configuration, as in Figures 4A- Because there is a larger acceptable area in which the user's anatomic pupil can still be arranged to receive information from the display system as desired, owing to the larger exit pupil of the system. That is, with a larger exit pupil, the system is less likely to be sensitive to some misalignment of the display with respect to the anatomical pupil of the user, and the more comfort for the user, the more the relationship with his or her display / glasses Can be achieved through low geometric constraints.

[00303] As shown in FIG. 6A, the left display 140 provides a set of parallel rays to the substrate 124. In one embodiment, the display is configured to project an image through a lens or other optical element 142 that can be used to collect angularly-scanned light and convert it into a bundle of parallel rays. And may be a scanned fiber display that scans back and forth a beam of obliquely narrow light as indicated. The rays of light may be arranged in a series that may be configured to partially reflect and partially transmit the incoming light so that the light can be approximately equally shared across the group of reflective surfaces 126, 128, 130, 132, 134, 128, 130, 132, 134, 136 of the reflective surfaces 126, Depending on the small lens 138 disposed at each injection point from the waveguide 124, an array of exit pupils, or a functional equivalent of one large exit pupil that can be used by or upon the user as it strikes towards the display system And may be scanned out through the nodal point and toward the eye 58 to provide a desired image.

[00304] For virtual real configurations where it is desirable to also be visible through the waveguide to the real world 144, a similar set of lenses 139 may be provided on the opposite side of the waveguide 124 to compensate for a subset of the lenses ; Thus, an equivalent of a zero-magnification telescope is produced. Each of the reflective surfaces 126, 128, 130, 132, 134, 136 may be arranged at approximately 45 degrees as shown, or may be configured to have different arrangements similar to, for example, . The reflective surfaces 126, 128, 130, 132, 134, 136 may comprise wavelength selective reflectors, bandpass reflectors, half mirror mirrors, or other reflective configurations. The illustrated lenses 138, 139 are refractive lenses, but diffractive lens elements can also be used.

[00305] 6A, a more or less similar configuration is shown wherein a plurality of curved reflective surfaces 148, 150, 152, 154, 156, 158 are formed by the lenses of the embodiment of FIG. 6A ) And the reflector (elements 126, 128, 130, 132, 134, 136 of FIG. 6A) functioning to couple the lenses (element 138 of FIG. 6A) ≪ / RTI > The curved reflective surfaces 148, 150, 152, 154, 156, 158 can be various curved configurations selected to both reflect and transmit each change, such as parabolic or elliptic curved surfaces . For a parabolic shape, a concurrent set of incoming rays will be collected at a single output point; For an elliptical configuration, the set of rays emitted from a single point of origin is collected into a single output point. 6A, the curved reflective surfaces 148, 150, 152, 154, 156, 158 preferably partially reflect the incoming light to be shared over the length of the waveguide 146, As shown in FIG. The curved reflective surfaces 148, 150, 152, 154, 156, and 158 may include wavelength-selective notch reflectors, half-gold mirrors, or other reflective configurations. In another embodiment, the curved reflective surfaces 148, 150, 152, 154, 156, 158 may be replaced by diffractive reflectors configured to reflect and also deflect.

[00306] Referring to FIG. 7A, the perceptions of the Z-axis difference (i. E., The distance straight from the eye along the optical axis) can be facilitated by using a waveguide with a variable focus optical element configuration. As shown in FIG. 7A, the image information from the display 160 may be modulated using, for example, configurations such as those described with reference to FIGS. 6A and 6B, or other substrate-guiding optical methods known to those skilled in the art, And the variable focus optical element capability then changes the focus of the wavefront of the light coming out of the waveguide and causes the light coming from the waveguide 164 to focus on a particular focus Can be used to provide the eye with the perception that it is from a distance. That is, since the incoming light is collimated to avoid problems in the inner total reflection waveguide configurations, the light requires the viewer's eye to adjust the perspective to that point to bring the far point to the focus on the retina, And will be interpreted as inherently from optical infinity unless some other intervention causes the light to refocus and be recognized as from a different viewing distance, and one such suitable intervention is a variable focus lens.

[00307] 7A, the collimated image information is injected as part of the glass 162 or other material at an angle such that the information is internally total and transmitted to the adjacent waveguide 164. The waveguide 164 is configured to receive the waveguides (124, 146, and 146, respectively) of Figure 6a or 6b, such that the collimated light from the display is distributed such that it is more or less uniformly distributed over the distribution of reflectors or diffraction features along the length of the waveguide. )). ≪ / RTI > (In dependence on the controlled focus of the variable focus lens element 166) in which outgoing light is transmitted through the variable focus lens element 166 as it travels toward the eye 58, 166 and enter the eye 58 will have different levels of focus (a collimated planar wavefront for expressing optical infinity, an even greater number for expressing a closer viewing distance for eye 58) Beam divergence / wavefront curvature).

[00308] To compensate for the variable focus lens element 166 between the eye 58 and the waveguide 164, another similar variable focus lens element 167 is used to compensate for the light coming from the world 144 for the augmented reality, (I.e., as described above, one lens compensates for the other lens and produces the same function as the zero-magnification telescope, as described above) to eliminate the optical effects of the waveguide 166 box).

[00309] The variable focus lens element 166 may be a liquid lens, an electro-active lens, a conventional refractive lens with a moving element, a fluid-filled membrane lens, or a lens similar to a human lens lens, (E.g., retracted and relaxed by actuators), mechanical-strain-based lenses, an electrowetting lens, or a plurality of fluids having different refractive indices. The variable focus lens element 166 may also include a switchable diffractive optical element (an element that features a polymer diffused liquid crystal approach (e.g., a host medium such as a polymer material has microcavities of liquid crystal diffused in the material) Is applied, the molecules may be re-adapted such that their refractive indices no longer match the refractive index of the host medium, thereby creating a high frequency switchable diffraction pattern.

[00310] One embodiment includes a host medium in which micro-liquids of a quartz-based electro-active material, such as lithium niobate, are diffused in a host medium and exposed to a fiber-scanning display or a scanning-mirror- Enables refocusing of image information on a pixel-by-pixel or line-by-pixel basis when combined with the same scanning optical display. In a variable focus lens element 166 configuration in which a liquid crystal, lithium niobate, or other technique is used to present the pattern, the pattern spacing may be adjusted such that the focus power of the variable focus lens element 166 But can also be modulated to change the focus power of the entire optical system.

[00311] In one embodiment, the lenses 166 may be positioned such that the focus of the display image can be modified while maintaining the magnification constant, in the same manner that the photo zoom lens can be configured to dock the focus from the zoom position Lt; / RTI > In another embodiment, the lenses 166 may be non-telecentric so that the focus changes will also be dependent on the zoom changes. For such a configuration, such magnification changes can be compensated in software using dynamic scaling of the output from the graphics system by syncing with focus changes.

[00312] Referring back to the issue of how to supply the projector or other video display unit 160 and images to the optical display system, in a "frame sequential" configuration, a stack of sequential two- Can be supplied to the display sequentially to generate a 3-dimensional perception over time in a manner similar to the way of using stacked image slices to represent a dimensional structure. A series of two-dimensional image slices can be presented to the eye with different focal distances to the eye, respectively, and the eye / brain will incorporate such a stack with the perception of a coherent three-dimensional volume. Depending on the display type, line-by-line or even pixel-by-pixel sequencing can be performed to generate awareness of the three-dimensional viewing. For example, for a scanned optical display (such as a scanning fiber display or a scanning mirror display), the display then presents the waveguide 164 as one line or one pixel at a time in a sequential manner.

[00313] If the variable focus lens element 166 can be maintained in a high frequency pixel or line presentation, each line or pixel is presented through the variable focus lens element 166 to be recognized at different focal distances from the eye 58 And can be dynamically focused. Pixel-based focus modulation generally requires extremely fast and / or high-frequency variable focus lens elements 166. For example, a 1080P resolution display with a full frame rate of 60 frames per second typically presents about 125 million pixels per second. Such a configuration may also be constructed using a solid state switchable lens, such as a lens using an electro-active material, e.g., lithium niobate or electro-active polymer. In addition to its compatibility with the system illustrated in FIG. 7A, a frame sequential multi-focus display drive approach may be used with the multiple display systems and optical embodiments described herein.

[00314] 7B, for an electro-active layer 172 (such as a layer comprising liquid crystal or lithium niobate) surrounded by functional electrodes 170 and 174 that may be comprised of indium tin oxide, conventional permeability A waveguide 168 having a substrate 176 (e.g., a substrate comprised of glass or plastic with a refractive index matching the known total internal reflectance features and the on or off state of the electro-active layer 172) The paths can be controlled to be able to be dynamically modified to essentially generate a time-varying optical field.

[00315] Referring to FIG. 8A, a stacked waveguide assembly 178 may be used to transmit image information to the eye at various levels of wavefront curvature, for each respective waveguide level that represents the focal length to be perceived for each waveguide level Can be used to provide three-dimensional perception to the eye / brain by having a plurality of waveguides 182, 184, 186, 188, 190 and a plurality of weak lenses 198, 196, 194, . A plurality of displays 200, 202, 204, 206, 208 or other embodiments may be used to inject the collimated image information into the waveguides 182, 184, 186, 188, 190 with a single multiplexed display And each of the waveguides can be configured to dispense substantially equally light over the length of each waveguide to go down towards the eye, as described above.

[00316] The nearest-eye waveguide 182 is configured to transmit collimated light to the eye as injected into such waveguide 182, which can represent a focal plane of optical infinity. The next upper waveguide 184 is configured to transmit its collimated light transmitted through the first weak lens 192 (e. G., A weak negative lens) to the outside before the collimated light can reach the eye 58 ; Such first weakened lens 192 may be configured to interpret light coming from the next upper waveguide 184 such that the eye / brain comes from a first focal plane that is internally closer to the person from optical infinity To produce a slightly convex wavefront curvature. Similarly, the third on-top waveguide 186 transmits its output light through both the first 192 and second 194 lenses before reaching the eye 58, The combined optical power of the first and second (194) and second (194) lenses is greater than the optical power from the next upper waveguide 184 to the eye / eye, as coming from a second focal plane internally closer to the person from optical infinity The brain may be configured to generate another incremental amount of wavefront divergence to interpret the light coming from waveguide 186 above that third.

[00317] The other waveguide layers 188 and 190 and the weaker lenses 196 and 198 may be used for both the highest waveguide and the weaker lenses between the eyes for the aggregate focus power representing the focal plane closest to the human eye And is similarly constructed using the highest waveguide 190 in the stack that transmits its output. To compensate for the stack of lenses 198, 196, 194, 192 when viewing / interpreting light coming from the world 144 on the other side of the stacked waveguide assembly 178, , And is disposed at the top of the stack to compensate for the aggregate power of the lens stacks (198, 196, 194, 192) below. Such a configuration again provides as many perceived focal planes as there are available waveguide / lens pairs for a relatively large exit pupil configuration, as described above. Both the reflective aspects of the waveguides and the focusing aspects of the lenses can be static (i. E. Not dynamic or electro-active). In an alternative embodiment, they may be dynamic using electro-active properties as described above, and may be multiplexed so that a small number of waveguides can be multiplexed in a time-sequential manner to produce a greater number of effective focal planes do.

[00318] 8B-8N, various aspects of diffractive arrangements for focusing / redirecting collimated beams are shown. Other aspects of diffraction systems for such purposes are described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 61 / 845,907 (U.S. Patent Application No. 14 / 331,218), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety . Referring to FIG. 8B, transmitting a collimated beam through a linear diffraction pattern 210, such as Bragg grating, will deflect or "steer" the beam. Transferring the collimated beam through the radially symmetric diffraction pattern 212, or "Fresnel zone plate", will change the focal point of the beam. FIG. 8C illustrates the effect of transferring the collimated beam through the linear diffraction pattern 210; FIG. 8D illustrates the focusing effect of transmitting a collimated beam through a diffractive pattern 212 that is radially symmetric.

[00319] 8E and 8F, the combined diffraction pattern with both linear and radiating elements 214 produces both the deflection and focusing of the collimated input beam. These deflection and focusing effects can be generated in the transmission mode as well as the reflection mode. These principles can be applied with waveguide configurations, for example, to allow additional optical system control, as shown in Figures 8G-8N. Diffracting optical element "(or" DOE "), as shown in Figures 8G-8N, is such that when the collimated beam is internally totalized along planar waveguide 216, And is embedded within the planar waveguide 216 to traverse the refraction pattern 220 in the planar waveguide.

[00320] 8H, DOE 220 has a relatively low diffraction efficiency such that only a portion of the beam's light is deflected away toward eye 58 with respect to each intersection of DOE 220, while the rest Continues to travel through planar waveguide 216 through total internal reflection; Accordingly, the light carrying the image information is divided into a plurality of associated light beams exiting the waveguide at a plurality of locations, and the result is that the eye 58 for this particular collimated beam bouncing around in the planar waveguide 216 Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > of a < / RTI > Beams directed towards the eye 58 are shown in Figure 8h as being substantially parallel because DOE 220 has only a linear diffraction pattern in this case. As shown in the comparison between Figures 8l, 8m, and 8n, changes to this linear diffraction pattern pitch can be used to controllably deflect the exiting parallel beams so that the scanning or tiling function .

[00321] Referring again to Fig. 8i, for changes in the diffractive pattern component that is radially symmetric to the embedded DOE 220, the exiting beam pattern is further diverted, which results in a more diverging beam pattern to bring the exiting beam pattern to focus on the retina Will require the eye to adjust for near distance, and will be interpreted by the brain as light from a viewing distance closer to the eye than optical infinity. 8J, DOE 221 embedded in this other waveguide 218, such as a linear diffraction pattern, for the addition of another waveguide 218, where the beam can be injected (e.g., by a projector or a display) , Which may function to diffuse the light across the entire larger planar waveguide 216, which may result in a larger planar waveguide 216, i. E., A larger planar waveguide 216, depending on the particular DOE configurations in operation, And to provide a very large incoming field of light to the eye 58.

[00322] DOEs 220 and 221 are shown bisecting the associated waveguides 216 and 218, but this need not be the case; They may be placed closer to or above the side of either of the waveguides 216, 218 to have the same function. 8k, for a single collimated beam injection, the entire field of the replicated collimated beams can be guided toward the eye 58. As shown in FIG. Additionally, for a combined linear diffraction pattern / radial symmetry diffraction pattern scenario as shown in Figures 8f (214) and 8I (220), it is possible to have a Z-axis focusing capability (For the same configuration as in Fig. 8k, the exit pupil can be as large as the optical element itself, which can be a very significant advantage for user convenience and ergonomics)) beam distribution waveguide optics is presented, Both the divergence angle of the beams and the wavefront curvature of each beam represent light coming from points closer to optical infinity.

[00323] In one embodiment, one or more DOEs are switchable between "on" states where they actively diffract and "off " states where they do not diffract significantly. For example, the switchable DOE may comprise a layer of polymer-dispersed liquid crystals wherein the micro-liquids comprise a diffraction pattern in the host medium, and the refractive index of the micro-liquids is switched to substantially match the refractive index of the host medium (In this case, the pattern does not clearly diffract the incident light), and the undiluted solution can be switched to an index that does not match the index of the host medium (in this case, the pattern actively diffracts the incident light). Additionally, for dynamic changes to the diffraction terms, such as linear diffraction pitch terms, as in Figures 8l-8n, a beam scanning or tunneling function can be achieved. As shown above, it is desirable to have a relatively small diffraction grating efficiency in each of the DOEs 220, 221, because its efficiency facilitates dispersion of light, and also because diffraction of the DOE 220 (E.g., light coming from the world 144 to the eye 58 in an augmented reality configuration) is less influenced by the waveguides that are preferably transmitted, and therefore, A better view of the real world is achieved.

[00324] Configurations such as those illustrated in Figure 8k are preferably driven using the injection of image information in a time-sequential approach, and frame sequential drive is most direct to implementation. For example, an image of the sky in optical infinity may be injected at time 1 and a diffraction grating that maintains the collimation of light may be used; The DOE then controllably transmits the focus change, i.e., one diopter or one meter away, to provide the eye / brain with the knowledge that the optical information of the branch is coming from a closer focus range, The image can be injected at time 2. This kind of paradigm can be repeated in a fast-time-sequential manner so that the eye / brain recognizes the input as being all parts of the same image. This is only an example of two focal planes; Preferably the system will be configured to have more focal planes to provide a smoother transition between the objects and their focal distances. This kind of configuration generally assumes that the DOE is switched at a relatively low rate (i.e., by syncing with the frame-rate of the display that is injecting images in the range of tens to hundreds of cycles per second).

[00325] The opposite extreme may be a configuration in which the DOE elements can shift focus from tens to hundreds of megahertz or more because the pixels are scanned into the eye 58 using the approach of the optical display type of scanning, Facilitates switching of the focus state of the DOE elements on a pixel-by-pixel basis. This means that it can be maintained only low enough (in the range of about 60-120 frames per second) to ensure that the entire display frame-rate can be kept very low, i.e., "flicker" Therefore, it is preferable.

[00326] Between these ranges, if DOEs can be switched at KHz rates, the focus on each scan line may be adjusted on a line by line basis, which can be adjusted, for example, in terms of visual artifacts This can be given to the user. For example, different focal planes in the scene may be interleaved in this manner to minimize visual artifacts in response to head motion (as discussed in more detail later in the present invention). The line-by-line focus modulator may be operably coupled to a line scan display, such as a grating light valve display, wherein a linear array of pixels is swept to form an image; Such as fiber-to-scan displays and mirror-scanning optical displays.

[00327] A stacked configuration similar to that of FIG. 8A may use dynamic DOEs (rather than the static waveguides and lenses of the embodiment of FIG. 8A) to simultaneously provide multi-plane focusing. For example, for three simultaneous focal planes, the primary focal plane (e.g., based on measured eye perspective adjustments) may be presented to the user and may include + margins and - margins (i.e., one focal plane closer , One farther) can be used to provide a large focus range that the user can adjust for perspective before the planes need to be updated. This increased focus range may provide a temporal benefit when the user switches to a closer focus or a far focus, (i.e., as determined by perspective adjustment measurements); The new plane of focus may then be fabricated to be a mid-depth focus, and the + and - margins prepare for a quick switchover to any one again while the system catches up.

[00328] 8O, a stack 222 of planar waveguides 244, 246, 248, 250 and 252 is shown and each of the waveguides has a reflector 254, 256, 258, 260, , Collimated image information injected at one end by displays 224, 226, 228, 230, 232 is configured to bounce down the reflector by total internal reflection, wherein some or all of the light at that point is directed to the eye or other target Lt; / RTI > Each of the reflectors may have slightly different angles to reflect the exit light towards a common destination, such as a pupil. Such a configuration is somewhat different from the configuration of FIG. 5B, except that each different angled reflector of the embodiment of FIG. 8o has its own waveguide for smaller interference while the projected light is moving to the targeted reflector. similar. The lenses 234, 236, 238, 240, 242 may be interposed between the displays and the waveguides for beam steering and / or focusing.

[00329] 8P shows that reflectors 276, 278, 280, 282, and 284 are positioned within waveguides 266, 268, 270, 272, and 274 so that exit beams can be relatively easily aligned with objects such as anatomical pupils. Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > staggered < / RTI > Using the information as to how far the stack 264 is from the eye (such as 28 mm (typically comfortable geometry) between the cornea of the eye and the spectacle lens), the reflectors 276, 278, 280, 282, 284, The geometries of the eyes 266, 268, 270, 272, and 274 may be set up to fill the pupil of the eye (typically spanning about 8 mm or less) with the exiting light. By guiding light to a larger eye box than the pupil diameter of the eye, the viewer can perform eye movements while maintaining the ability to observe the displayed image. Referring back to the discussion relating to Figs. 5A and 5B for field of view expansion and reflector size, the extended field of view is also presented by the configuration of Fig. 8P, which does not involve the complexity of the switchable reflective elements of the embodiment of Fig. .

[00330] Figure 8q illustrates a version in which many reflectors 298 form a relatively continuous curved reflective surface in aggregates or discrete flat facets oriented to align with the entire curve. The curve may be a parabolic or elliptical curve and is shown as cutting across a plurality of waveguides 288, 290, 292, 294, 296 to minimize any cross-talk issues, but it may be a monolithic waveguide configuration It can also be used.

[00331] In one implementation, high-frame-rate and lower persistence displays may be combined with lower-frame-rate and higher persistence displays and variable focus elements to include a relatively high-frequency frame sequential volume display. In one embodiment, a high-frame-rate display has a lower bit depth, a lower-frame-rate display has a higher bit depth, and an efficient high-frame, which is very suitable for presenting image slices in a frame- - rate and a high bit depth display. For such an approach, the preferably represented three-dimensional volume is functionally divided into a series of two-dimensional slices. Each of these two-dimensional slices is projected in frame sequentially into the eye and syncs with this presentation, thereby changing the focus of the variable focus element.

[00332] In one embodiment, to obtain a sufficient frame rate to support such a configuration, a full-color high-resolution liquid crystal display ("LCD") with backlighted ferroelectricity A display may also be used in other embodiments; in a further embodiment a scanning fiber display may be used), and aspects of a higher-frequency DLP system may be integrated. Instead of illuminating the back side of LCD panels in a conventional manner (i.e., using full size fluorescent lamps or LED arrays), a conventional illumination arrangement uses a DLP projector to project a mask pattern on the back side of the LCD (In one embodiment, the mask pattern may be binary in that DLP projects either illumination or non-illumination; in another embodiment, described below, the DLP may be < RTI ID = 0.0 > Which may be used to project a gray scale mask image).

[00333] DLP projection systems can operate at very high frame rates; In one embodiment, for six depth planes of 60 frames per second, the DLP projection system is operated for the back of the LCD display at 360 frames per second. The DLP projector is then used to selectively illuminate portions of the LCD panel with a high-frequency variable focus element (such as a deformable membrane mirror) disposed between the viewing side of the LDC panel and the user's eye, Element is used to change the global display focus every frame at 360 frames per second. In one embodiment, the variable focus element is positioned optically conjugate to the exit pupil to enable adjustments of the focus without affecting the image magnification or "zoom" simultaneously. In another embodiment, the variable focus element is not conjugate to the exit pupil, so image magnification changes are accompanied by focus adjustments, and the software may pre-scramble or distort the images to be presented, It is used to compensate for distortions.

[00334] In operation, the sky in the background will be in the viewing distance of the optical infinity, and the branches coupled to the tree, located at a specific location closer to the user than the optical infinity, extend in the direction toward the user from the tree trunk, It is useful to reconsider the example in which the end of the branch is provided to the user with a three-dimensional scene closer to the user than the proximal part of the trunk-contacting branch.

[00335] In one embodiment, for a provided global frame, the system may be configured to provide an all-in-focus image of the full-color of the tree branches in front of the sky on the LCD. Thereafter, in subframe 1 in the global frame, the tree branches and the cloudy sky are represented by functionally black-masking (i.e., failing to illuminate) portions of the LCD representing other elements not to be recognized at the same focal distance as the sky The DLP projector of the binary masking configuration (i.e., the absence of illumination or illumination) can be used to illuminate only the portion of the LCD that is in the subframe 1, and the sub- To position the focal plane in optical infinity, a variable focus element (e.g., a deformable membrane mirror) may be utilized.

[00336] Thereafter, in subframe 2, the variable focus element is switched to focus on a point that is about 1 meter away from the user's eyes (or whatever distance is required, where 1 meter for the position is used for illustrative purposes) (I.e., failing to illuminate) a portion of the LCD that represents the other elements that will not be recognized at the same focal length as the sky, and the tree branches, The pattern of illumination from the DLP can be switched to illuminate only the light source. Thus, the eye gets a fast flash of clouds in optical infinity, followed by a fast flash of the tree in one meter, and the sequence is integrated by the eye / brain, forming a three-dimensional perception. As the branches can be positioned diagonally relative to the viewer, they extend through a range of viewing distances, for example, while the ends of the branches are at a closer position of 1 meter, You can touch the body.

[00337] In this case, the display system may divide the 3-D volume of the tree branch into a plurality of slices, rather than a single slice at 1 meter. For example, while this single focus slice can be used to represent the sky (using DLP to mask all areas of the tree during the representation of one focus slice) (Using DLP to mask all parts of the tree except one part and the sky), the tree branch is divided over five focus slices. Preferably, the depth slices are positioned at an interval equal to or less than the focal depth of the eye so that the viewer will not notice the transition between the slices and instead will perceive a smooth, continuous flow of branches through the focus range .

[00338] In an alternative embodiment, instead of utilizing a DLP in binary (illumination or darkfield only) mode, a gray scale (e.g., a gray scale of 256 shades) mask may be applied to the back of the LCD panel Projecting can be utilized. Grayscale shades can be used to tell the eye / brain that there is something resident between adjacent depths or focal planes. Returning to the branch and clouds scenario, if the leading edge of the branch closest to the user is at focal plane 1, then in subframe 1 that part of the LCD, from the DLP system using the variable focus element at focal plane 1 The maximum intensity can be turned to white.

[00339] Thereafter, in subframe 2, using the variable focus element at focal plane 2 immediately behind the part that was revealed, no illumination would be present. These are similar steps to the above binary DLP masking configuration. However, in a position between the focal plane 1 and the focal plane 1, for example, when there is a part of the branch to be recognized in the middle, gray scale masking can be utilized. DLP can project an illumination mask to that portion during both subframe 1 and subframe 2, but can project with half the illumination for each subframe (e.g., level 128 of 256 gray scales). This provides a perception of blending of the depth of focus layers, where the perceived focus distance is proportional to the illumination ratio between subframe 1 and subframe 2. For example, for a portion of a tree branch that should lie in the third quarter of the way between focal plane 1 and focal plane 2, a about 25% intensity gray scale mask may be used to illuminate that portion of the LCD in subframe 1 And about 75% gray scale mask can be used to illuminate the same portion of the LCD in subframe 2.

[00340] In one embodiment, to create a high dynamic range display, the bit depths of both the low-frame-rate display and the high-frame-rate display may be combined for image modulation. To include a high dynamic range multi-focus 3-D display, high dynamic range driving can be performed simultaneously with the focal plane addressing function described above.

[00341] In another embodiment, which may be more efficient for computational resources, only certain portions of the display (i.e., LCD) output may be mask-illuminated by the DMD and may be variably focused on the way to the user's eyes. For example, the middle portion of the display may be mask illuminated, while the periphery of the display does not provide the user with various perspective adjustment cues (i.e., the periphery may be uniformly illuminated by the DLP DMD, Masked and variably focused on the way to the eye).

[00342] In the embodiment described above, the refresh rate of about 360 Hz allows six depth planes at about 60 frames per second each. In another embodiment, by increasing the operating frequency of the DLP, much higher refresh rates can be achieved. The standard DLP configuration employs an array of micro-mirrors that toggle between MEMS devices and modes that reflect light toward the display or user, or between modes that reflect light away from the display or the user, e.g., to the shading plate. These are essentially binary. DLPs typically use a pulse width modulation scheme to generate gray scale images where a variable amount of time for a variable duty cycle to produce a brighter pixel, or a pixel of intermediate brightness, "State. Thus, in order to generate the gray scale images at an intermediate frame rate, they are being performed at a much higher binary rate.

[00343] In the configurations described above, this setup works well to create gray scale masking. However, if the DLP drive scheme is adapted to flash sub-images in a binary pattern, then the frame rate can be greatly increased-by thousands of frames per second, which may result in hundreds to thousands of depth planes having 60 frames / Second, which can be utilized to eliminate depth-to-face greyscale interpolation as described above. A typical pulse width modulation scheme for a Texas Instruments DLP system has an 8-bit command signal (the first bit is the first long pulse in the mirror; the second bit is a pulse that is half as long as the first bit; Is again a half as long pulse), so this configuration can produce the second through eighth power different illumination levels. In one embodiment, backlighting from the DLP can cause its intensity to be changed synchronized with the different pulses of the DMD to equalize the brightness of the generated sub-images, Which is a realistic second solution for causing high frame rates.

[00344] In an alternative embodiment, direct control changes to the DMD drive electronics and software may be utilized to ensure that the mirrors always have the same on-time, instead of the usual variable on-time configuration, . In another embodiment, the DMD drive electronics may be configured to provide low bit depth images at a frame rate that exceeds the frame rate of high bit depth images but at a lower frame rate than the binary frame rate, To allow any gray scale blending between the focal planes.

[00345] In another embodiment, moving these six depth planes back and forth so that they are the most useful in the scene being presented to the user when limited to a finite number, e.g., six depth planes in the above example desirable. For example, if a user is standing in a room and a virtual monster is placed in a user's augmented reality view (the virtual monster is at a depth of about 2 feet from the Z axis away from the user's eyes), around the center of the monster's current location Clustering all six depth planes (and dynamically moving the monsters along with the monsters as they move with respect to the user) is reasonable, and therefore more abundant perspective control cues can be provided to the user, All of the depth planes are in the direct area of the monster (eg, 3 in front of the center of the monster, 3 behind the center of the monster). This assignment of depth planes is content dependent.

[00346] For example, the same monster would be provided in the same room, but a virtual window frame element would also be presented to the user, and then, in the scene above, a virtual view of optical infinity would be provided out of the virtual window frame, , One depth plane for the depth of the wall that will house the virtual window frame, and perhaps the remaining four depth planes for the monster in the room. If the content causes the virtual window to disappear, the two depth planes can be dynamically reallocated to the area around the monster - if computing and presentation resources are provided, the focal plane resources to provide the richest experience to the user Content - based dynamic allocation.

[00347] In another embodiment, phase delays in an array of multi-core fibers or single-core fibers may be utilized to produce variable focus optical wavefronts. Referring to Figure 9a, the multi-core fibers 300 may comprise an aggregation of a plurality of discrete fibers 302; Figure 9b shows an enlarged view of the multi-core assembly, which emits light from each core in the form of a spherical wavefront 304 from each of them. When the cores are transmitting coherent light, for example from a coherent laser source, these small spherical wavefronts ultimately interfere structurally and destructively with each other, and when they are emitted in phase from the multicore fibers, Likewise, they will develop plate wavefront 306 almost at the aggregate. However, when phase delays are induced between cores (e.g., using a conventional phase modulator, such as using lithium niobate to slow down the path of some cores in relation to other cores) To represent an object from a closer point in the eye / brain, a curved or spherical wavefront can be generated in the aggregate, which provides another option that can be used in place of the variable focus elements described above. In other words, such a phased multi-core configuration or phased array can be utilized to generate multiple optical focus levels from a light source.

[00348] In other embodiments involving the use of optical fibers, known Fourier transforms of multi-mode optical fibers or optical guiding rods or pipes can be utilized for control of wavefronts output from such fibers. Optical fibers are typically available in two categories: single mode and multi-mode. Multi-mode optical fibers typically have larger core diameters and allow light to propagate along multiple angular paths, rather than just one angular path of single mode fiber. It is known that when an image is injected into one end of a multi-mode fiber, the angular differences encoded in the image will be maintained to some extent as the image propagates through the multi-mode fiber, and in some configurations, Will be very similar to the Fourier transform of the image that was output.

[00349]  Thus, in one embodiment, after passing through the fiber optically conducting the Fourier transform, the wavefront (e.g., to provide a focal plane closer to the user than the optical infinite) so that the output is a desired shape or a focused wavefront. Diverging spherical wave surface) can be input. For example, such an output end may be film scanned for use as a scanned fiber display, or may be used as a light source for a scanning mirror to form an image. Thus, this configuration can be utilized as another focus modulation subsystem. Different types of light patterns and wavefronts can be injected into the multi-mode fiber, so that a specific spatial pattern is emitted on the output end. (In optics, the optical system can be analyzed in terms of something called Zernicke coefficients; images can similarly be analyzed for smaller main components, or for a relatively simpler Can be characterized and decomposed into weighted combinations of image components). Thus, when light is scanned into the eye using the main components on the input side, a higher resolution image can be reconstructed at the output end of the multi-mode fiber.

[00350] In another embodiment, a Fourier transform of the hologram can be injected at the input end of the multi-mode fiber to output a wavefront that can be used for three-dimensional focus modulation and / or resolution enhancement. Certain single fiber cores, multi-core fibers, or concentric core + cladding configurations may also be utilized in the aforementioned inverse Fourier transform configurations.

[00351] In another embodiment, rather than physically manipulating the wavefronts by approaching the user's eye at a high frame rate regardless of the user's particular perspective adjustment or eye-gaze state, the system may be configured to monitor the user's perspective adjustment, Rather than providing a plurality of different sets of optical wavefronts, the system can be configured to provide a single wavefront at a time corresponding to the perspective control of the eye. Perspective adjustments may be made either directly (e.g., by infrared magnetic refraction media or by eccentric light refraction) or indirectly (e.g., by measuring the convergence level of the user's two eyes; So that an estimate of the perspective adjustment can be made based on the convergent geometry). Thus, say, using the determined distance adjustment of 1 meter from the user, then the wavefront representations in the eye can be configured for a 1 meter focal length using any of the above variable focus configurations. If a perspective adjustment change to focus on a 2 meter is detected, then the wavefront representation in the eye may be reconstructed for a 2 meter focal length.

[00352] Thus, in one embodiment incorporating perspective adjustment tracking, the variable focus element may be placed in the optical path between the output coupler (e.g., waveguide or beam splitter) and the user eye such that the focus changes with the eye's perspective adjustment changes (I. E., Preferably at the same rate as the eye's perspective adjustment changes). (E.g., Gaussian) to unfocused objects to simulate the optical blur expected in the retina when the object was at its viewing distance and to improve the three-dimensional perception by the eyes / brain In order to do so, software effects can be utilized.

[00353] Although the simple embodiment is a single plane - the focus level of this single plane is subordinate to the perspective adjustment level of the viewer - performance requirements for a perspective adjustment tracking system can be mitigated even when multiple planes of low number are used . Referring to FIG. 10, in another embodiment, a stack 328 of about three waveguides 318, 320, 322 may be utilized to simultaneously generate three focal planes having values of wavefronts. In one embodiment, weak lenses 324 and 326 may have static focal distances and variable focus lens 316 may be subject to a perspective adjustment tracking of the eyes such that one of the three waveguides (say, While the other two waveguides 322 and 318 output a + marginal wavefront and a marginal wavefront (i. E., Slightly larger than the detected focal distance) A wavefront, a wavefront slightly closer than the detected focal distance), which can improve 3-dimensional perception and also provide a sufficient difference for the brain / eye perspective control system to detect any blur as negative feedback Which allows for a range of perspective adjustments before improving the reality and requiring physical adjustment of the focus levels.

[00354]  A variable focus compensation lens 314 is also shown to ensure that the light coming from the real world 144 in the augmented reality configuration is not refocused or magnified by the stack 328 and assembly of the output lens 316. [ Variable focus at lenses 316 and 314 can be achieved using refraction, diffraction, or reflection techniques, as discussed above.

[00355] In another embodiment, each of the waveguides of the stack may have a focus (e.g., by having an electronically switchable DOE included therein) such that the variable focus elements do not need to be centralized as in the stack 328 of the configuration of FIG. You can include your own ability to make changes.

[00356] In another embodiment, the variable focus elements may be interleaved between the waveguides of the stack (i. E., By way of example, in order to eliminate the need for a combination of weak focus lenses of fixed focus and full-stack-refocusing variable focus elements) Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > 10 < / RTI >

[00357] Such stacking arrangements can be used in the perspective adjustment tracking variants described herein, and also in a frame-sequential multi-focus display approach.

[00358] In a configuration in which light enters a pupil with a small exit pupil, e.g., a pupil with exit pupil of 1/2 mm diameter or less, those skilled in the art will appreciate that the beam is uniformly distributed in the pinhole lens configuration , E.g., a scanned optical display using a 0.5 mm diameter beam to scan images in the eye. This configuration is known as the Maxwellian view configuration, and in one embodiment, to derive the blur using software on image information to be perceived as a focal plane either in front of, or beyond, the focal plane determined from the perspective adjustment tracking , Perspective adjustment tracking input may be utilized. In other words, when a person skilled in the art starts with a display that presents a Maxwellian view, everything can be focused on theoretically, and simulated optical blur can be induced in software to provide rich, , And can be subject to a perspective adjustment tracking state.

[00359] In one embodiment, the scanning fiber display fits this configuration because the scanning fiber display can be configured to output only small-diameter beams in the Maxwellian form. In an alternative embodiment, one or more scanning fiber displays may be used with a pitch in the array of provided exit pupils, e.g., one or more, to ensure that only one will price the anatomical pupil of the user at any given time. To increase the functional eye box of the system (and also to reduce the effect of light-blocking particles that may reside in the vitreous or cornea of the eye, by a DOE configuration as described with reference to Figure 8k) ), An array of exit pupils may be created (e.g., if the average anatomical pupil diameter is 4 mm, one configuration may include 1/2 mm exit pupils spaced apart from each other at approximately 4 mm intervals). These exit pupils may also be switchable in response to the eye position so that the eye always receives only one, and only one, small active pupil at a time; This allows a denser array of exit pupils. Such a user will have a large depth of focus in which software-based blur techniques can be added to improve perceived depth perception.

[00360] As discussed above, an object in optical infinity produces a substantially planar wavefront; For example, a closer object 1 m from the eye produces a curved wavefront (with a curvature of about 1 m convex radius). The optical system of the eye needs to have enough optical power to bend the incoming rays of light so that the incoming rays of light are eventually focused on the retina (the convex wavefront is turned concave and then down to the focal point on the retina). These are the basic functions of the eye.

[00361] In many of the embodiments of the embodiments described above, the eye-directed light is treated as being part of one continuous wavefront, and any subset of them will price the pupil of a particular eye. In another approach, the optically directed light may be effectively discretized or split into a plurality of beamlets or individual beams, each of which has a diameter of less than about 0.5 mm, And has a unique propagation path as part of the larger articulated wavefront that can be functionally generated. For example, by agitating a plurality of discrete neighboring collimated beams, the curved wavefront can be approximated and each of these beams can be approximated to the center of the radius of curvature of the desired aggregate wavefront Approaching the eye at an angle.

[00362] When the beamlets have a diameter of about 0.5 mm or less, it is as if they are coming through a pinhole lens configuration, which means that each individual beamlet is always relative to the retina, regardless of the eye's perspective control Meaning, however, the trajectory of each beamlet will be affected by the state of perspective control. For example, if the beamlets approach the eye in parallel (representing a discretized collimated aggre- gation wavefront), the infinitely precisely-perceived eye will deflect the beamlets so that they are all converging to the same shared spot on the retina, . If the eye is perspective-controlled to say 1 m, the beams will converge to a spot in front of the retina, will cross paths, and fall on a number of neighboring or partially overlapping spots (shown as blurred) on the retina will be.

[00363] With a 1 meter shared origin from the viewer, when the beamlets approach the eye in the diverging configuration, a 1 m perspective adjustment will steer the beams to a single spot on the retina and will appear as in-focus; When the viewer is pointed at infinity, the beamlets will diverge to a spot beyond the retina and create a number of neighboring or partially overlapping spots on the retina, which produces a blurred image. More generally stated, perspective control of the eye determines the degree of overlap of the spots on the retina, and the provided pixels are "in focus" when all of the spots are directed to the same spot on the retina, It becomes "defocusing" This idea that all beamlets of 0.5 mm diameter or less are always in focus and that they can be agitated so that they are perceived by the eyes / brain as if they are substantially the same as coherent wavefronts, It can be used when creating configurations for whether a virtual or augmented reality.

[00364] In other words, a set of multiple narrow beams may be used to emulate what is happening with the variable diameter focus beam of larger diameter, and if the beamlet diameters are maintained at a maximum of about 0.5 mm, To maintain the level and produce the perception of out-focus when desired, beamlet angular orbits can be selected to produce an effect that is approximately the same as a larger out-focus beam (such defocusing processing is larger Which may not be the same as the Gaussian blur processing for the beam, but will generate a multiple modal point spread function that can be interpreted in a manner similar to Gaussian blur).

[00365]  In a preferred embodiment, the beamlets are not mechanically deflected to form the aggregate focus effect, but rather the eye is made up of a number of incidence angles and many beamlets, including both multiple positions at which the beamlets intersect the pupil Receiving a super set; To represent the pixels provided from a particular viewing distance, a subset of the beamlets from the superset containing the intersections of the pupils with the proper incidence angles (as if they were being emitted from the same shared origin in space) The beamlets in the superset that do not coincide with the shared origin are not turned on with that color and intensity, while, on the other hand, they are turned on to match the color and intensity to represent the gate wavefront (however, Some of which may turn on to some other color and intensity).

[00366] Referring to FIG. 11A, each of the plurality of incoming beamlets 332 passes through a small exit pupil 330 with respect to the eye 58 in a discretized wavefront display configuration. Referring to FIG. 11B, a subset 334 of groups of beamlets 332 can be driven to match color and intensity levels so that they are perceived as if they are part of the same larger-sized beam of light Group 334 may be considered an "assembled beam"). In this case, the subset of beamlets is parallel to each other, which represents a collimated aggate beam from optical infinity (e.g., light from a distant source). As the eye is infinitely adjusted in perspective, a subset of the beamlets is deflected by the cornea and lens of the eye, all of which are perceived as substantially falling at the same position of the retina and containing a single at the focus pixel.

[00367] FIG. 11C illustrates an angled collimated beam 336 from the right side of the visual field of the user's eye 58 when the eye 58 is viewed in a coronal-style flatbed view from above. Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > a < / RTI > Again, the eye is shown to be infinitely adjustable so that the beamlets fall on the same spot on the retina, and the pixels are perceived as being in focus. On the other hand, if a different subset of the beamlets that had reached the eye were selected as the diverging fan of rays, the beamlets would shift the perspective adjustment to the nearest point where the eye matches the geometric origin of the fan of rays Would not have fallen (and not be focused) on the same position of the retina until it would have been.

[00368] With respect to the patterns of the intersections of the beamlets through the anatomical pupil of the eye (i. E., The pattern of exit pupils), they may have an effective hexagonal-grating (e.g., shown in FIG. 12A) or a square grating or other two- Array < / RTI > In addition, time-varying arrays of exit pupils as well as a three-dimensional array of exit pupils can be generated.

[00369] The discrete aggregate wavefronts may be optically conjugated to the exit pupils of microdisplay arrays or microdisplay arrays, such as viewing optics coupled to a direct field of view substrate (e.g., spectacle lenses) Microdisplays or microprojectors or an array of microprojectors so that they can be used in conjunction with additional interlaced viewing optics, continuous spatial light modulating array techniques, or as described in connection with FIG. 8k Projects light directly into the eye without waveguide techniques.

[00370] Referring to FIG. 12A, in one embodiment, a bright field can be created by bundling a group of small projectors or display units (e.g., scanned fiber displays). 12A shows a hexagonal lattice projection bundle 338 that may, for example, generate a 7 mm-diameter hexagonal array with each fiber display outputting sub-image 340. If such an array has an optical system such as lenses disposed in front of it such that the array is placed optically conjugate with the entrance pupil of the eye, this will produce an image of the array in the pupil of the eye shown in Figure 12B , Which essentially provide the same optical arrangement as the embodiment of Figure 11a.

[00371]  Each of the small exit pupils of the configuration is created by a dedicated small display, e.g., a scanning fiber display, in its bundle 338. Optically, it is as if the entire hexagonal array 338 were immediately positioned in the anatomical pore 45. These embodiments may be used to drive different sub-images with different small exit pupils in the larger anatomical incidence pupil 45 of the eye, including a superset of beamlets with different crossing points and incidence angles with the pupil of the eye. It is means. Each of the separate projectors or displays can be driven through a slightly different image, thereby creating sub-images that subtract different sets of rays to drive at different light intensities and colors.

[00372] In one variation, a rigid image conjugate may be generated as in the embodiment of Figure 12B, where there is a direct 1-to-1 mapping of the array 338 with the pupil 45. In another variation, the spacing between the displays in the array and the optical system (lens 342 in Fig. 12B) can vary, so that instead of obtaining a conjugate mapping of the array to the pupil of the eye, May catch rays from arrays at some other distance. In such an arrangement, the angular diversity of the beams that will allow a discrete aggregate wavefront representation to be generated will still be obtained, but the mathematical processing of how to drive with certain rays and with certain power and intensity will become more complex (However, on the other hand, such a configuration may be considered simpler in terms of viewing optics). Mathematical processing followed by bright field image capture can affect these calculations.

[00373] 13A, another bright field generation embodiment is shown wherein an array 346 of microdisplays or microprojectors is coupled to a frame 344 (e.g., a spectacle frame) to be positioned in front of the eye 58 . The arrangement shown is an unbalanced arrangement, wherein no large-scale optical elements are inserted between the displays (e.g., scanning fiber displays) of the array 346 and the eye 58. A pair of glasses can be conceived and a plurality of displays, e.g., scanning fiber engines, positioned to be orthogonal to the surface of the glasses are coupled to the glasses and angled all inwardly to point them to the user's pupil. Each display can be configured to generate a set of rays representing different elements of the beamlet superset.

[00374] In such an arrangement, at the anatomical pore 45, the user would receive results similar to those received in the embodiments discussed with reference to FIG. 11A, where all points in the user's pupil are contributed from different displays Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > incident angles. ≪ / RTI > 13B features a reflective surface 348 for enabling the embodiment of FIG. 13B to move the display array 346 away from the field of view of the eye 58, Illustrating an uncombed configuration similar to that of FIG. 13A, except that the views of real world 144 are allowed.

[00375] Thus, another configuration for generating the angular diversity required for the discrete aggal wavefront display is presented. To optimize this configuration, the size of the displays can be reduced to the maximum. Scanning fiber displays that may be utilized as displays may have baseline diameters in the range of 1 mm, but a reduction in enclosure and projection lens hardware can reduce the diameters of these displays to about 0.5 mm or less, Less annoying. Another downsizing geometric enhancement may be applied to the tip of the scanning fiber itself in the case of a fiber scanning display array, which may include a collimating lens (which may include, for example, a tilted index or "GRIN" lens, a conventional curved lens or a diffractive lens Quot;). ≪ / RTI > For example, referring to FIG. 13D, a GRIN lens 354 is shown fused to the end of a single mode optical fiber. An actuator 350 (e.g., a piezoelectric actuator) is coupled to the fibers 352 and can be used to scan the fiber tips.

[00376]  In yet another embodiment, the ends of the fibers may be hemispherical shaped using a curved polishing process of optical fibers to create a lens effect. In another embodiment, a standard refractive lens can be bonded to the end of each optical fiber using an adhesive. In another embodiment, the lens can be made of a small amount of transparent polymeric material or glass, e.g., epoxy. In another embodiment, the ends of the optical fibers may be fused to produce a curved surface for lens effect.

[00377] (I.e., scanning fiber displays having a GRIN lens shown in the close-up view of Fig. 13c-1) can be fabricated on the outside of the assemblies, (If the refractive index matching of the cladding is performed correctly, the larger cladding / housing becomes transparent, and only very small cores, preferably about 3 microns in diameter, will interfere with the view.) Optical fibers Through a single transparent substrate 356 that preferably has a refractive index that closely matches the cladding of the first and second transparent substrates 352 and 352. In one embodiment, the matrix of displays 358 may all be angled inwardly so that they are directed towards the anatomical pupil of the user (although in another embodiment they can be kept parallel to each other, Is less efficient).

[00378] 13E, another embodiment is shown, wherein a thin series of planar waveguides 358, rather than using circular fibers to travel cyclically, is formed by a larger substrate structure 356, As shown in FIG. In one variation, the substrate 356 can be moved to produce a cyclic movement of the planar waveguides (i.e., at the resonant frequency of the cantilevered members 358) relative to the substrate structure. In another variation, the cantilevered waveguide portions 358 can be actuated via piezoelectric or other actuators relative to the substrate. The image illumination information may be injected, for example, from the right side 360 of the substrate structure to be coupled to the cantilevered waveguide portions 358. In one embodiment, the substrate 356 is configured to internally reflect the incoming light 360 along its length and then redirect it to the cantilevered waveguide portions 358 (e.g., an integrated DOE as described above) Waveguide). ≪ / RTI > The plate waveguides are configured to minimize any dispersion and / or focus changes due to their plate shape factors, such as when a person is looking through cantilevered waveguide portions 358 and through the real world 144.

[00379] In the context of the discrete aggregate wavefront displays discussed, there are values in which some angular diversity is generated for all points in the exit pupil of the eye. In other words, it is desirable to have a plurality of incident beams for representing each pixel in the displayed image. Referring to Figures 13F-1 and 13F-2, one approach to obtaining additional angular and spatial diversity is to use multi-core fibers and use a GRIN lens such that the exit beams are deflected through a single nodal point 366 Placing the same lens at the injection point; The nodal point can then be scanned back and forth in the fiber type being scanned in the array (e.g., by the piezoelectric actuator 368). If the retinal conjugate is placed in a plane defined at the end of the GRIN lens, a functionally equivalent display with the discrete aggate wavefront configuration of the general case described above can be generated.

[00380] Referring to FIG. 13G, similar effects can be achieved by scanning the face of the multi-core system at the correct conjugate of the optical system 372 rather than using a lens, and the goal is to create higher angles and spatial diversity of the beams . In other words, rather than having a plurality of individually scanned fiber displays as in the bundled example of Fig. 12a described above, some of this required angular and spatial diversity may be used to create a plane that can be relayed by waveguides Can be generated through the use of multiple cores. 13H, the multi-core fibers 362 may be used to create a set of beamlets (e.g., to create a set of beamlets with different crossing points and angles of incidence that can be relayed by the waveguide 370 to the eye 58 ). ≪ / RTI > Thus, in one embodiment, the collimated bright field image can be injected into the waveguide, and without any additional refocusing elements, the bright field display can be directly converted to the human eye.

[00381] Figures 13i-13l illustrate one variant 363 having a rectangular cross-section, as well as variations having flat exit faces 372 and angled exit faces 374 (such as those sold by Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd. of Japan Lt; / RTI > illustrate certain commercially available multi-core fiber (362) configurations.

[00382] Referring to FIG. 13M, some additional angular diversity may be generated by having a waveguide 376 supplied through a linear array 378 of displays, such as scanning fiber displays.

[00383] 14A-14F, another group of configurations for generating a fixed view bright field display is described. Referring again to FIG. 11A, a two-dimensional plane was created, which intersected all of the very small beams from the left - each beamlet would have a specific intersection with the plane. If another plane was created at a different distance to the left, all beamlets could intersect that plane at different locations. 14A, if the multiple positions on the two or more planes can be allowed to selectively transmit or block the opticalradiation through which the various positions are directed, then this multi-plate configuration can be used to separate the individual beamlets independently To generate a bright field selectively.

[00384] The basic embodiment of Figure 14A includes liquid crystal display panels 380 and 382 (in other embodiments, they may be MEMS shutter displays or DLP DMD arrays < RTI ID = 0.0 >Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > spatial light modulators. ≪ / RTI > 14A, if the second panel 382 intercepts or attenuates the transmission of the rays at point "a" 384, all of the visible rays will be blocked, but only the first panel 380 will point blocking or attenuating the transmission of the rays at "b" 386 will only block / attenuate the lower incoming ray 388, while the remainder will be transmitted towards the pupil 45. Each of the controllable panels or planes may be considered a "spatial light modulator" or "fat ". The intensity of each transmitted beam passing through a series of SLMs will be a function of the combination of transparency of various pixels in various SLM arrays. Thus, without any kind of lens elements, a set of beamlets with various angles and intersections (or "bright field") can be created using a plurality of stacked SLMs. The additional numbers of SLMs exceeding 2 provide more opportunities to control which beams are selectively attenuated.

[00385] As described briefly above, in addition to using stacked liquid crystal displays such as SLMs, the planes of DMD devices from DLP systems can be stacked into functions such as SLMs, (For the mirror element in the first state, the reflectivity for the next element on the way to the eye can be quite efficient, and the mirror in the second state Element, the mirror angle can be shifted by an angle equal to twelve degrees so as to direct light away from the path to the eye). 14B, in one DMD embodiment, two DMDs 390, 390 are arranged in pairs in a periscope type configuration to maintain a large amount of optical transmission from the real world 144 to the user eye 58 The lenses 394 and 396 of FIG. The embodiment of Figure 14c includes two lenses 398 and 400 for beam control and six different DMDs 402, 404, 406, 408, 408 that will mediate from the SLM function when the beams are routed to the eye 58. [ 410, 412) plane opportunities.

[00386] Figure 14d illustrates a more complex periscope type arrangement with up to four DMDs 422, 424, 426, 428 and four lenses 414, 420, 416, 418 for the SLM function; This configuration is designed to ensure that the image does not flip backwards as it passes through the eyes 58 as it passes. 14E shows that, in a hall-type arrangement of mirrors operating in a mode substantially similar to that illustrated in Fig. 14A, where the display can be viewed through a "hall of mirrors & (The lenses in the above designs are useful in these configurations to integrate image information from the real world). ≪ RTI ID = 0.0 > [0040] < / RTI > 14F shows an embodiment in which the non-display portions of the two facing DMD chips 434 and 436 can be covered with a reflective layer to propagate light to and from the active display areas 438 and 440 of the DMD chips Respectively. In other embodiments, instead of DMDs for SLM functionality, arrays of sliding MEMS shutters (e.g., those available from a sales company such as Pixtronics, a subsidiary of Qualcomm, Inc.) may be utilized to transmit or block light . In yet another embodiment, arrays of small louvers moving out of place to present the light-transmitting apertures can similarly be agitated for SLM functionality.

[00387] The bright field of many small beamlets (indicated by diameters less than about 0.5 mm) can be injected into and propagated through a waveguide or other optical system. For example, a conventional "birdbath" type optical system may be suitable for delivering light of a bright field input, a free-form optical design as described below, or for many waveguide configurations. 15A-15C illustrate the use of a wedge-type waveguide 442 with a plurality of light sources, as another configuration useful for creating a bright field. 15A, light may be injected into the wedge-shaped waveguide 442 from two different positions / displays 444, 446 and may be directed at different angles 448 based on the points of entry into the waveguide, The total internal reflection characteristics of the wedge-shaped waveguide.

[00388] 15B, when a linear array 450 of displays (e.g., scanning fiber displays) projecting to the end of the waveguide shown is created, the large angular diversity 452 of the beams is shown in FIG. 15C As will be seen, the waveguide will exit in one dimension. Indeed, if it is contemplated to add another linear array of displays injected into the end of the waveguide at slightly different angles, the angular diversity of similarly outgoing beams can be generated in the spreading pattern shown in Figure 15C in the orthogonal axis Have; Together they can be used to create a two-dimensional fan of rays exiting each location of the waveguide. Thus, another configuration may be used to form a bright field display using one or more scanning fiber display arrays (or alternatively, using other displays that will meet space requirements, such as miniaturized DLP projection configurations) To produce angular diversity.

[00389] Alternatively, as an input to the wedge-shaped waveguides shown here, a stack of SLM devices may be utilized, in which case the bright field output from the SLM configuration, rather than the direct view of the SLM output as described above, Can be used as an input to a configuration as shown in Fig. 15C. One of the key concepts here is that the conventional waveguide is optimally suited for successfully relaying the beams of collimated light, but in the field of view of small-diameter collimated beams, conventional waveguide technology is based on beam size / collimation To further manipulate the output of such a bright field system, such as being injected into the side of a waveguide, such as a wedge-shaped waveguide.

[00390] In another related embodiment, rather than projecting onto a plurality of discrete displays, the multicore fiber may be used to create a bright field and inject it into the waveguide. In addition, the time-variant bright field can be utilized as an input so that there may be some dynamic elements that methodically change the path of the set of beams, rather than creating a static distribution of beamlets coming out of the bright field. These may be accomplished using components such as waveguides with embedded DOEs (such as those described above with reference to Figures 8b-8n or as described with reference to Figure 7b), where 2 One smaller total internal total path in which the liquid crystal layer is placed in the first voltage state so as to have a refractive index mismatch with other substrate materials that cause total internal reflection of just below the waveguide of the other substrate material; One larger total internal total optical path in which the liquid crystal layer is placed in the second voltage state so as to have a refractive index that matches the other substrate material so that light is totally internally reflected through a synthetic waveguide including both of the other substrate portions. Similarly, the wedge-shaped waveguide may be configured to have a bi-modal internal total internal paradigm (e.g., in one variation, the wedge-shaped elements are configured such that when the liquid crystal portion is activated, Lt; / RTI >

[00391] One embodiment of a scanning optical display can be simply characterized as a scanning fiber display with a lens at the end of the fiber being scanned. Many lens modifications, such as GRIN lenses, are suitable, which is more than the mode field diameter of the fiber, which produces an increase in the number of apertures (or "NA") increase and is advantageous to avoid optical invariants, It can be used to focus light below a small spot or to collimate light. Smaller spot sizes generally allow a higher resolution opportunity from the display point of view, which is generally preferred. In one embodiment, the GRIN lens is compared to fibers that may include a vibrating element - a configuration that can be considered a "GRIN lens display to be scanned" (i.e., rather than a conventional distal fiber tip vibration through a fiber display to be scanned) It can be long enough.

[00392]  In another embodiment, the diffractive lens can be utilized at the injection end of the scanning fiber display (i.e., patterned onto the fiber). In yet another embodiment, the curved mirror can be positioned on the end of the fiber operating in a reflective configuration. Essentially any of the configurations known to collimate and focus the beam may be used at the end of the scanning fiber to produce a suitable scanned optical display.

[00393] Two important utilities having a lens coupled to or including the end of the fiber being scanned (as opposed to configurations where the unbonded lens can be utilized to direct light after leaving the fiber) are: a) That outgoing light can be collimated to eliminate the need to do so using other external optics; b) the angle or NA of the cone in which light is projected onto the end of the single-mode fiber core can be increased, thereby reducing the associated spot size for the fiber and increasing the available resolution for the display.

[00394] As described above, a lens, such as a GRIN lens, may be formed from a portion of the end of the fiber using techniques such as fused or coupled to the end of the optical fiber, or polishing. In one embodiment, a typical optical fiber having an NA of about 0.13 or 0.14 may have a spot size of about 3 microns (also known as "mode field diameter" for optical fibers given NA). This provides relatively high resolution display possibilities given industry standard display resolution paradigms (e.g., a typical microdisplay technique such as an LCD or organic light emitting diode or "OLED " has a spot size of about 5 microns). Thus, the scanning optical display described above can have 3/5 of the minimum pixel pitch available over conventional displays; Additionally, using a lens at the end of the fiber, the configuration described above can produce a spot size in the range of 1-2 microns.

[00395] In yet another embodiment, a cantilevered portion of the waveguide (e.g., a waveguide created using microfabrication processes such as masking and etching rather than the microfibre techniques shown), rather than using a cylindrical fiber to be scanned, And can be adapted to the lengthening at the injection ends.

[00396] In yet another embodiment, the number of increased apertures for the fibers to be scanned can be generated using a disperser (i.e., one that is configured to disperse light and create a larger NA) that covers the exit end of the fiber . In one variant, the disperser can be created by etching the end of the fiber to produce small bits of the terrain in which the light is dispersed; In yet another variation, bead and sandblasting techniques or direct sanding / scuffing techniques can be utilized to create dispersed terrain. In another variation, an engineered diffuser similar to the diffractive element can be created to maintain a clean spot size with the desired NA, which is bound to the concept of using a diffractive lens as described above.

[00397] 16A, an array of optical fibers 454 are arranged such that light exiting the angled faces will go out as it passes through the prism, and their ends are bent Is shown coupled to a coupler 456 that is configured to hold them together in parallel so that they can be grounded and polished to have an output edge at a critical angle 458 (e.g., 42 degrees with respect to glass) for the longitudinal axes of the input fibers . The beams going out of the fibers 454 in the bundle will overlap but will be vertically phase due to different path lengths (see FIG. 16B, for example, from the exit plane at an angle to the different cores The difference in path lengths to the focusing lens is visible).

[00398] Before leaving the angled faces, what was the separation of the X-axis type in the bundle would be Z-axis separation, which helps to create a multifocal light source from this configuration. In yet another embodiment, multi-core fibers such as those available from Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd. of Japan may be angle polished rather than using bundled / bonded plurality of single mode fibers.

[00399] In one embodiment, if a 45 degree angle is polished to the fiber and then covered with a reflective element, such as a mirror coating, the outgoing light can be reflected off the polished surface and, in one embodiment, the flat- The fiber will now functionally perform as equally as XZ scanning when the fiber can be seen from the side of the fiber, at the location where the window was created at the side of the fiber, so that the fiber would normally be the XY Cartesian coordinate system axis, It is changed during the course of scanning. This configuration can also be beneficially used to change the focus of the display.

[00400] Multicore fibers can be configured to act in enhanced display resolution (i.e., higher resolution). For example, in one embodiment, in the case where individual pixel data is transmitted in strict bundles of 19 cores in multi-core fibers and such clusters are scanned with sparse helical patterns in which the pitch of the spirals is approximately equal to the diameter of the multiple cores, Will effectively produce a display resolution of about 19 times the resolution of a single core fiber being similarly scanned. In practice, seven clusters 464 of three fibers 464 housed in conduit 462 are used for exemplary purposes, since it is an efficient tiling / hex pattern; e.g., like 19 clusters; It may be more practical to allow the fibers to be more aggressively positioned relative to each other, such as in the arrangement of FIG. 16C with different patterns or numbers being utilized and the composition being scaling up or down possible.

[00401] For a sparse configuration as shown in FIG. 16 (c), scanning of multiple cores is performed in such a manner that the cores are all rigidly packed and scanned together (where cores overlap with scanning; Are not large enough and very tightly packed cores are blurred to some extent and do not create a spot for display distinctly) Scanning. Thus, for resolution increases, both will be valid, but it is desirable to have coarse tiling rather than high-density tiling.

[00402] The concept that densely packed scanned cores can generate blur in a display is that a plurality (e. G., Red, green, and blue) of triads are formed to form a triad of overlapping spots in which each triad features red, green, , And cores or triads for carrying blue light) can be intentionally packed together densely as an advantage in one embodiment. For such a configuration, one can have an RGB display without the need to combine red, green, and blue into a single-mode core, which is a common mechanism for combining multiple (e.g., three) wavelets of light into a single core This is an advantage because it suffers significant losses in optical energy. Referring to Figure 16C, in one embodiment, each string of clusters of three fiber cores comprises a core that relays red light, a core that relays green light, and a core that relays blue light And the three fiber cores are sufficiently close together to ensure that their position differences are not resolvable by subsequent relay optics to form effectively overlapping RGB pixels; Thus, while the coarse tiling of the seven clusters creates resolution enhancement, it is not necessary to utilize the glossy RGB fiber combiners (e.g., those that use wavelength division multiplexing or evanescent combining techniques) Strict packing facilitates seamless color blending.

[00403] 16D, in another simpler variant, the conduit 468 may be used for red / green / blue (and in other embodiments, another core may be added for infrared light for applications such as eye tracking) Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > 464 < / RTI > In another embodiment, additional cores may be placed in strict clusters to carry additional wavelengths of light to construct a multi-primary display for the increased color gamut. Referring to FIG. 16E, in another embodiment, a coarse array of single cores 470 (a single deformation in which red, green, and blue are combined in each of them) in conduit 466 may be utilized; Such a configuration is operational, albeit somewhat less efficient, for increasing resolution, but is not optimal for red / green / blue coupling.

[00404] Multicore fibers can also be utilized to generate bright field displays. Indeed, rather than keeping the cores sufficiently separated from each other, as described above in the context of creating a scanning optical display, rather than keeping the cores scanning on each other's local area in the display panel, , It is desirable to scan a plurality of densely packed fibers because each of the resulting beams represents a particular portion of the bright field. The light escaping from the bundled fiber tips may be relatively narrow, if the fibers have a small NA; Bright field configurations can take advantage of this and can have an arrangement in the anatomical cavity in which a plurality of slightly different beams are received from the array. Thus, there are optical configurations for scanning multiple cores, functionally equivalent to an array of single scanning fiber modules, and thus by scanning multiple cores instead of scanning a group of single mode fibers, a bright field can be created have.

[00405] In one embodiment, to facilitate three-dimensional perception, a multi-core phased array approach may be used to create a large exit pupil variable wavefront configuration. A single laser configuration with phase modulators is described above. In a multi-core embodiment, phase delays can be induced in different channels of the multi-core fiber such that light of a single laser is injected into all of the cores of the multi-core configuration, such that there is mutual coherence.

[00406] In one embodiment, the multi-core fibers may be combined with a lens, such as a GRIN lens. Such a lens can be, for example, a refracted lens, a diffractive lens, or a polished edge that functions as a lens. The lens may be a single optical surface, or it may comprise a plurality of stacked optical surfaces. Indeed, in addition to having a single lens that extends the diameter of multiple cores, for example, at the exit point of light from the cores of multiple cores, a smaller lenslet array may be desirable. 16F shows an embodiment in which the multicore fibers 470 are emitting a plurality of beams into a lens 472, such as a GRIN lens. The lens collects the beams down to the focus point 474 in the space in front of the lens. In many conventional arrangements, the beams will escape from the multicore fibers while diverging. The GRIN or other lens is configured to direct them down to a single point and to collimate them so that the collimated result can be scanned, e.g., for a bright field display.

[00407] Referring to FIG. 16g, smaller lenses 478 may be placed in front of each of the cores of the multiple core 476 configuration, and such lenses may be utilized to collimate; The shared lens 480 may then be configured to focus the collimated beams down, with the diffraction limited spot 482 aligned for all three spots. The final result of such a construction is that by combining together the three collimated narrow beams by a narrow NA, as shown, it is possible, for example, in a head mount optical display system that can be next in a chain of light transmission to the user To effectively combine all three of them with a much larger emission angle, which is interpreted as a smaller spot size.

[00408] 16H, an embodiment includes a multi-core fiber 476 having an array of lenslets 478 that provide light to a small prism array 484 that deflects the beams produced by the separate cores to a common point. ). Alternatively, the light may have a small lenslet array that is shifted with respect to the cores such that the light is deflected down to a single point and focused. Such a configuration can be utilized to increase the number of apertures.

[00409] Referring to Figure 16i, there is shown an array of small lenslets 478 that capture light from multi-core fibers 476, followed sequentially by a 2- A step configuration is shown. Such a configuration can be utilized to increase the number of apertures. As discussed above, the larger NA corresponds to a smaller pixel size and a higher possible display resolution.

[00410] Referring to Figure 16J, a beveled fiber array, which may be held together by coupler 456, such as those described above, may be scanned with a reflective device 494 (e.g., a DMD module of a DLP system). Overlapping light can be directed through one or more focusing lenses 490, 492 to produce a multi-focus beam, with multiple single fibers 454 being coupled into an array or alternatively into multiple cores ; Due to the angulation and overlap of the array different sources are at different distances from the focusing lens so that when the beams deviate from the lens 492 and are directed towards the retina 54 of the user's eye 58, And generates focus levels. For example, the furthest optical route / beam may be set up to be a collimated beam representing the optical infinite focus positions. Closer roots / beams may be associated with diffracting spherical wavefronts of closer focus positions.

[00411] The multifocal beam is configured to generate a raster scan (or, for example, a Lissajous curve scan pattern or a spiral scan pattern) of a multifocal beam that can be passed through a series of focusing lenses and then into the lens of the eye and the cornea Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > mirror. ≪ / RTI > The various beams deviating from the lenses produce different pixels or voxels of overlapping varying focal distances.

[00412] In one embodiment, different data may be written to each of the optical modulation channels at the front end, thereby creating an image projected into the eye with one or more focus elements. By varying the focal length of the lens (i.e., by adjusting the perspective), as shown in Figures 16K and 16L where the lens is at different Z-axis positions, the user can focus and move the different incoming pixels out of focus have. In another embodiment, the fiber array can be actuated / moved by a piezoelectric actuator. In another embodiment, when the piezoelectric actuator is activated, a relatively thin ribbon array may be resonated in a cantilevered fashion along an axis orthogonal to the array of array fibers (i.e., in the thin direction of the ribbon). In one variant, a separate piezoelectric actuator can be utilized to create a vibrational scan with a long axis that is orthogonal. In another embodiment, a single mirror axis scan may be used for slow scans along the long axis as the fiber ribbon is resonantly oscillated.

[00413] Referring to FIG. 16M, an array 496 of scanning fiber displays 498 may advantageously be bundled / tiled for an effective resolution increase, and the concept is that, for such a configuration, 16N, wherein each portion of the image plane is addressed by emissions from at least one bundle. In other embodiments, optical configurations may be utilized that allow for a slight magnification of the beams as the beams exit the optical fiber such that there is some overlap in the hexagonal or other lattice pattern reaching the display plane, It is understood that while there are better fill factors, they also maintain a suitably small spot size in the image plane, and there is a fine magnification in such image plane.

[00414] Rather than having individual lenses at the end of each scanned fiber enclosure housing, in one embodiment, a single lenslet array can be utilized, so that the lenses can be packed as close as possible, Which allows for smaller spot sizes, because it allows the use of lower magnifications in the optical system. Thus, arrays of fiber scan displays can be used to increase the resolution of the display, or they can be used to increase the visibility of the display, which allows each engine to be used to scan different parts of the field of view Because.

[00415] For a bright field configuration, the emissions may moreover overlap in the image plane. In one embodiment, the bright field display may be generated using a plurality of small diameter fibers scanned in space. For example, instead of having all the fibers address different portions of the image plane, as described above, it may be desirable to superimpose more and more fibers at an angle to the inner side or the like, or to change the focus power of the lenses, Ensure that small spot sizes do not match the tiled image plane configuration. Such a configuration can be used to generate a bright field display, for scanning a number of smaller diameter lasers that are intercepted in the same physical space.

[00416] Referring again to Figure 12b, one method of generating a bright field display is to cause the output of the elements on the left side to collimate to narrow beams and then to cause the projection array to be conjugated with the eye pupil on the right It was discussed.

[00417] With reference to Figure 16O, together with the common substrate block 502, a single actuator can be utilized to jointly operate a plurality of fibers 506 together. A similar configuration is discussed above with reference to Figures 13-C-1 and 13-C-2. It may be difficult to cause all of the fibers to maintain the same resonance frequency, to vibrate in a desired phase relationship with respect to each other, or to have the same dimensions of cantilevering from the substrate block. To overcome this difficulty, the tips of the fibers can be mechanically coupled to a grating or sheet 504, such as a very thin, rigid, lightweight graphene sheet. With such a coupling, the entire array can oscillate similarly and have the same phase relationship. In another embodiment, a matrix of carbon nanotubes may be utilized to couple the fibers, or a piece of very thin flat glass (such as the type used to create liquid crystal display panels) may be bonded to the fiber ends . In addition, a laser or other precision cutting device can be utilized to cut all associated fibers into the same cantilevered length.

[00418] 17, in one embodiment, it may be desirable to have a contact lens that is configured to facilitate eye focusing on a display that is directly interfaced with the cornea and that is fairly close (e.g., a typical distance between the cornea and the spectacle lens) have. Rather than placing the optical lens as a contact lens, in one variant, the lens may comprise a selective filter. Figure 17 shows a plot 508 that can be considered a "notch filter ", and due to its design it blocks only certain wavelength bands such as 450nm (maximum blue), 530nm (green), and 650nm, Generally pass or transmit wavelengths. In one embodiment, several layers of dielectric coatings can be agitated to provide a notch filtering function.

[00419] Such a filtering arrangement can be combined with a scanning fiber display that produces very narrow band illumination for red, green, and blue, and contact lenses with notch filtering can be combined, with the exception of transmissive wavelengths, (Such as a mini display, such as an OLED display mounted in a < RTI ID = 0.0 > position). ≪ / RTI > Narrow pinholes can be created in the middle of the contact lens filtering layers / film, thus allowing passage of wavelengths where small apertures (i.e., less than about 1.5 mm in diameter) otherwise block. Thus, in order to accommodate images from a mini display, a pinhole lens configuration that functions only in a pinhole fashion for red, green, and blue is created, while light from a real world, which is typically broadband illumination, Lt; / RTI > Thus, a large focus depth virtual display configuration can be assembled and operated. In another embodiment, the collimated image emerging from the waveguide will be visible in the retina, due to the pinhole large-focus-depth configuration.

[00420] It may be useful to create a display that can change the focus depth of the display over time. For example, in one embodiment, the display has a first mode that combines a small exit pupil diameter with a very large depth of focus (i. E., All the time at all times) and a second mode with a larger exit pupil and a narrower focus depth (Preferably, toggling rapidly between the two at the operator ' s command), which may be selected by the operator, such as in a second mode with the operator. In operation, when the user wishes to play a three-dimensional video game with objects to be perceived at multiple depths of the field, the operator can select the first mode; Alternatively, in order to have the convenience of a larger exit pupil and a sharper image, in the case of a user attempting to type into a long essay (i.e., for a relatively long time period) using a two-dimensional word processing display configuration, May be more preferable.

[00421] In another embodiment, it may be desirable to have a multi-focus depth display configuration in which some sub-images are provided with a large depth of focus while other sub-images are provided with a small depth of focus. For example, one configuration may have red and blue wavelength channels provided as very small exit pupils, and so they are always focused. Thereafter, only the green channel can be provided with a large exit pupil configuration with multiple depth planes (i.e., because the human perspective adjustment system has a tendency to preferentially target green wavelengths to optimize the focus level to be). Thus, in order to reduce the costs associated with having too many elements to represent in full depth planes of red, green, and blue, the green wavelengths can be prioritized and expressed in a variety of different wavefront levels. The red and blue colors can be classified to be represented by a further Maxwell approach (and software can be utilized to derive the Gaussian levels of the blur, as described above with respect to Maxwell displays). Such a display would provide multiple focus depths simultaneously.

[00422] As described above, there are portions of the retina that have a higher density of photosensors. The center portion, for example, generally has about 120 cones per view. Display systems that save computational resources are used in the past by using eye or line-of-sight tracking as input and creating a very high resolution rendering only where the person is staring at that point while providing a lower resolution rendering to the rest of the retina ≪ / RTI > In such an arrangement, the positions of the high to low resolution portions may be dynamically dependent on the tracked eye position, which may be referred to as "centered display ".

[00423] Improvements to such arrangements may include a scanning fiber display having a pattern spacing that can be dynamically dependent on the eye line being tracked. For example, the leftmost portion 510 of the image in FIG. 18 illustrates the helical motion pattern of the scanned multicore fibers 514; the rightmost portion 512 of the image in FIG. For a typical scanning fiber display that operates in a spiral pattern, as shown in Figure 3B, which illustrates a helical motion pattern of a single fiber 516 scanned for a given pattern 516, a uniform pattern pitch provides a uniform display resolution.

[00424] In the center-to-center display configuration, a non-uniform scanning pitch can be utilized and dynamically dependent on the eye position where a smaller / more stringent pitch (and thus a higher resolution) is detected. For example, if the user's gaze is detected to move towards the edge of the display screen, at such a position, the spirals can be clustered more densely, which creates a toroid-type scanning pattern for the high- And the rest of the display is in a lower-resolution mode. In a configuration where gaps can be created in portions of the display in the lower-resolution mode, in order to facilitate switching between high-resolution to lower-resolution scan pitch, as well as between scans, Blur can be intentionally generated dynamically.

[00425] The term bright field can be used to describe the volumetric 3-D representation of light traveling from the object to the viewer's eye. However, an optical see-through display may not reflect the absence of light, but merely reflect light to the eye, and ambient light from the real world will be added to any light that represents the virtual object. That is, when a virtual object provided to the eye includes black or a very dark portion, ambient light from the real world can pass through such a dark portion, making it unclear what is intended to be dark.

[00426] Nevertheless, it is possible to provide a dark virtual object over a bright real background, and it is preferred that such a dark virtual object appears to occupy the volume at the desired viewing distance; That is, it is useful to create a "dark field" representation of such a dark virtual object in which the absence of light is to be located at a particular point in space. Even in well-lit real world environments, certain aspects of the spatial light modulator described above, such as the provision of information to the user's eyes and the occluding elements that enable him or her to perceive the darkness aspects of the virtual objects, Or "SLM" configurations are appropriate. As described above, for a light-sensing system such as an eye, one way to achieve selective recognition of the dark field is to selectively attenuate light from those portions of the display, Since it relates to manipulation and provision of light; That is, the dark field can not be specifically projected - it is the lack of illumination that can be perceived as dark field, and consequently, configurations have been developed for selective attenuation of the light.

[00427] Referring back to the discussion of SLM configurations, one way to selectively attenuate for darkness is to block all light from one angle, while allowing light from other angles to pass through. This is due to the fact that, as described above, the liquid crystal (which may not be optimal due to its relatively low transparency when in the transmissive state), the DMD elements of the DLP systems (the high transmission / , And a plurality of SLM planes including elements such as MEMS arrays or shutters configured to controllably shutter or pass optical radiation.

[00428] With respect to suitable liquid crystal display ("LCD") configurations, a cholesteric LCD array may be utilized for the controlled / interrupted array. In contrast to the conventional LCD paradigm where the polarization state varies with voltage, for a cholesteric LCD configuration, the pigment is constrained to the liquid crystal molecules, and then the molecules are physically tilted in response to the applied voltage. Such a configuration can be designed to achieve greater transparency than a conventional LCD when in a transmissive mode, and a stack of polarizing films is not required, unlike in a conventional LCD.

[00429] In another embodiment, a plurality of layers of controllably interrupted patterns can be utilized to controllably block the selected presentation of light, using moiré effects. For example, in one configuration, two arrays of attenuation patterns, each of which may include optimized-pitch sine waves printed or painted on a transparent plate material, such as, for example, a glass substrate, In view, if the view is inherently transparent but the viewer sees through both sequentially ordered patterns, even if the two attenuation patterns are placed in order relatively close to the user's eyes, Can be provided to the user's eye at a distance sufficiently close enough to view the frequency moire attenuation pattern.

[00430] The bit frequency depends on the pitch of the patterns on the two attenuation planes, and therefore, in one embodiment, the attenuation pattern for selectively blocking the specific light transmission for darkness is generated using two sequential patterns And each of them will otherwise be transparent to the user, but together they produce a spatial beat frequency moire attenuation pattern that is selected to be attenuated according to whether it is the dark field required in the augmented reality system.

[00431] In another embodiment, a controlled dimming paradigm for darkfield effects can be generated using a multi-view display style mask. For example, one configuration may be implemented with other optional damping layer configurations, such as an LCD, a DLP system, or other optional damping layer configurations such as those described above, with the exception of small apertures or pinholes, And may include a completely pinned-hole layer. In one scenario, a pinhole array is placed at a typical eyeglass lens distance (about 30 mm) from the cornea, and a selective damping panel is located on the opposite side of the pinhole array from the eye, creating a perception of sharp mechanical edge-out in space . In essence, the recognition of a very sharp pattern, such as a sharp edge projection, can be generated if the configuration allows certain angles of light to pass and allows other angles to be blocked or obscured. In other related embodiments, the pinhole array layer may be replaced with a second dynamic damping layer to provide a configuration that is somewhat similar but more control than a static pinhole array layer (although a static pinhole layer may be simulated , It is not necessary).

[00432] In another related embodiment, the pinholes may be replaced by cylindrical lenses. Closure of the same pattern as in the pinhole array layer configuration can be achieved, but with cylindrical lenses, the array is not limited to very small pinhole geometries. In order to prevent distortions from being visible to the eyes due to the lenses when viewing the real world through the lenses, the second lens array basically uses a zero power telescope configuration to view and provide view- May be added on the side of the lens array or aperture of the opposite side of the nearest side.

[00433] In another embodiment, the light may be bent or bounced, or the polarization of the light may be altered if the liquid crystal layer is utilized, rather than physically blocking the light for generating and blocking the dark field. For example, in one variant, each liquid crystal layer may serve as a polarization rotator so that if the patterned polarizing material is included on one side of the panel, the polarization of the individual rays coming from the real world can be selectively manipulated , Therefore, they catch the part of the patterned polariser. There are polarizers known in the art having checkerboard patterns, where half of the "checker boxes" have vertical polarization and the other half have horizontal polarization. In addition, when a material such as a liquid crystal is used in which the polarization can be selectively manipulated, the light can be selectively attenuated using it.

[00434] As described above, selective reflectors can provide greater transmission efficiency than LCDs. In one embodiment, when the lens system is arranged to take light originating from the real world, to focus the plane from the real world onto the image plane, and to "on" When a DMD (i.e., DLP technique) is placed in the image plane to reflect light when in a state, and such lenses also have a DMD at their focal length, it is possible to create an attenuated pattern focused on the eye have. In other words, the DMDs can be used in a selective reflector plane of a zero magnification telescope configuration, as shown in FIG. 19A, to controllably hide the dark field and to generate dark field light.

[00435] As shown in FIG. 19A, the lens 518 takes light from the real world 144 and focuses the light on the bottom image plane 520; If the DMD (or other spatial attenuation device) 522 is located at the focal length of the lens (i.e., in the image plane 520), the lens 518 may take any light that originates from optical infinity, Will focus on the image plane 520. Next, a space attenuator 522 may be utilized to selectively block those to be attenuated. 19A shows the attenuator DMDs in transmission mode, which pass the beams shown as traversing the device. Next, the image is placed at the focal length of the second lens 524. Preferably, the two lenses 518 and 524 have the same focus power, and thus they are eventually a zero-power telescope or "relay ", which does not magnify the views for the real world 144. [ This configuration can be used to represent unexpanded views of the real world while also allowing selective blocking / attenuation of certain pixels.

[00436] In another embodiment, additional DMDs are added, as shown in Figures 19b and 19c, so that light is reflected from each of the four DMDs 526, 528, 530, and 532 before passing through the eye. Figure 19b shows two lenses preferably having the same focus power (focal length "F") arranged in a 2F relationship (the first focal length being utilized for the second focal length) to have a zero-power telescope effect ≪ / RTI > Figure 19c shows an embodiment without lenses. Although the orientation angles of the four reflective panels 526, 528, 530, 532 in the illustrated embodiments of Figures 19b and 19c are shown as being approximately 45 degrees for simple exemplary purposes, a specific relative orientation is required (e.g., A typical DMD reflects at an angle of about 12 degrees).

[00437] In other embodiments, the panels may also be ferroelectric, or may be any other type of reflective or selective attenuator panel or array. In one embodiment, similar to that shown in Figures 19b and 19c, one of the three reflector arrays can be a simple mirror, the other three can be selective attenuators, and therefore, Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > 3, < / RTI > By having a number of dynamic reflection attenuators in series, masks can be generated at different optical distances to the real world.

[00438] Alternatively, referring back to Figure 19C, one or more DMDs can be configured to be arranged in a reflective periscope configuration without any lenses. This configuration can be driven into brightfield algorithms to selectively attenuate certain rays while other rays pass.

[00439] In another embodiment, a DMD or similar matrix of devices that are controllably movable on a transparent substrate as opposed to a generally opaque substrate may be created for use in a transmissive configuration, such as a virtual reality.

[00440] In another embodiment, two LCD panels may be utilized as bright field shields. In one variant, they can be thought of as attenuators due to their damping capability as described above; Alternatively, they can be considered as polarization rotators with a shared polariser stack. Suitable LCDs may include components such as blue liquid crystal, cholesteric liquid crystal, ferroelectric liquid crystal, and / or twisted nematic liquid crystal.

[00441] One embodiment may include an array of direction-selective shielding elements, such as a MEMS device, characterized by a set of louvers capable of changing rotation so that they pass most of the light originating at a particular angle, (The plantation shutters are somewhat similar to the way that plantation shutters can be utilized with conventional human-scale windows). The MEMS / louver configuration, along with substantially opaque louvers, can be placed on an optically transparent substrate. Ideally, such a configuration would have a sufficiently fine louver pitch to selectively mask the light in pixel units. In other embodiments, louvers of two or more layers or stacks may be combined to provide further control. In another embodiment, rather than selectively blocking light, the louvers may be polarisers configured to controllably vary the polarization state of the light based on the variable.

[00442] As described above, another embodiment for selective occlusion can include an array of sliding panels in a MEMS device, so that the sliding panels can be used to transmit light through a small frame or aperture (i.e., By sliding in a two-position planar manner; or by rotating from a first orientation to a second orientation; or by controllably opening, e.g., by combined rotational orientation and displacement), and preventing transmission by blocking the frame or aperture Lt; / RTI > The array can be configured to open or cover various frames or apertures so that they attenuate the rays to be attenuated to a maximum and attenuate the rays to be transmitted only to a minimum.

[00443] In an embodiment in which a fixed number of sliding panels can occupy a first position covering a first aperture and a second position opening a first aperture or covering a second aperture and opening a first aperture (Since 50% of the apertures are obscured and the other 50% is open when using this configuration), the local position changes of the shutters or doors will be reflected by the various sliding panels Dynamic positioning can be used to generate moire or other effects targeted for ambiguity. In one embodiment, the sliding panels may comprise sliding polarizers and may be utilized to selectively attenuate when placed in a stacked configuration with other polarizing elements that are static or dynamic.

[00444] Referring to Figure 19D, another configuration is shown, such as providing an opportunity for selective reflection through a DMD style reflector array 534, such that a pair of focus elements 540, 542 and a reflector 534 (such as DMD May be used to capture a portion of the incoming light using an inlet reflector 544. The stacked set of two waveguides 536, The reflected light can be totally internally filtered by the focusing element 540 below the length of the first waveguide 536 and then the DMD is focused on the focusing element 540 For total internal reflection down to the lens 542 (again configured to facilitate the injection of light into the second waveguide) and to the exit reflector 546 configured to exit the light from the waveguide and toward the eye 58 And selectively attenuate and reflect a portion of the light to the second waveguide 538.

[00445] This configuration may have a relatively thin shape factor and is designed to allow the light from the real world 144 to be selectively attenuated. Because the waveguides work best with collimated light, this configuration can be quite suitable for virtual reality configurations, and the focal lengths are within optical limitlessness. For closer focus lengths, the bright field display can be used as a layer on top of the silhouette generated by the selective damping / dark field construction described above to provide other cues from the different focal distances to the user's eye . The masking mask may be out of focus and may even have been undesirably out of focus and then, in one embodiment, on the top of the masking layer to mask the fact that the dark field may be at the wrong focus distance Bright field can be used.

[00446] 19E, an embodiment featuring two waveguides 552, 554 each having two angled reflectors 558, 544; 556, 546 shown at approximately 45 degrees for illustrative purposes, ; In practical configurations, the angle is defined by a reflective surface that directs the portion of light that is drawn from the real world into each side of the first waveguide (or below two separate waveguides if the top layer is not monolithic) Reflectivity, refraction / refraction properties, etc., so that it hits the DMDs that can be used for the reflectors 548, 550, such as selective damping, at each end, and then the reflected light returns to the second waveguide (Or two separate waveguides if the bottom layer is not monolithic) and two angled reflectors (again, they do not need to be 45 degrees as shown) Lt; / RTI >

[00447] Focusing lenses may also be disposed between the reflectors and the waveguides at each end. In other embodiments, the reflectors 548 and 550 at each end may include standard mirrors (such as aluminum mirrors). In addition, the reflectors may be wavelength selective reflectors, such as dichroic mirrors or film interference filters. In addition, the reflectors may be diffractive elements configured to reflect the incoming light.

[00448] 19F shows a configuration in which four reflective surfaces of a pyramidal configuration are utilized to direct light through two waveguides 560 and 562 and light that is drawn from the real world can be split and reflected on four different axes . The pyramid-shaped reflector 564 may have more than four facets and may reside within the substrate prism like the reflectors of the configuration of Figure 19e. The configuration of Fig. 19F is an extension of the configuration of Fig. 19E.

[00449] 19g, one or more reflective surfaces 574, 576, 578, 580, 582 are used to capture light from the world 144 and pass it 570 to an optional attenuator 568 A single waveguide 566 can be utilized to relay it back to the same waveguide and propagate 572 to one or more other reflective surfaces 584, 586, 588 One or more of the other reflective surfaces 584, 586, 588, 590, and 592 at least partially exits 594 the waveguide on the path toward the user's eye 58 . Preferably, the waveguide includes selective reflectors so that one group 574, 576, 578, 580, 582 can be switched on to capture the incoming light and direct it to the lower selective attenuator, (584, 586, 588, 590, 592) may be switched on to direct the light returning from the selective attenuator towards the eye 58.

[00450] For simplicity, an optional attenuator oriented substantially perpendicular to the waveguide is shown; In other embodiments, various optical components, such as refractive or reflective optics, may be utilized to have an optional attenuator in a different and more compact orientation relative to the waveguide.

[00451] Referring to Fig. 19H, a modification to the configuration described with reference to Fig. 19D is illustrated. This configuration is somewhat similar to that discussed above with reference to FIG. 5B, and a switchable array of reflectors can be embedded within each of the pair of waveguides 602,604. Referring to FIG. 19H, the controller may be configured to sequentially turn on and off the reflectors 598, 600 such that the plurality of reflectors can operate based on the frame sequence; Next, the DMD or other optional attenuator 594 may also be sequentially driven in synchronization with the different mirrors being turned on and off.

[00452] Referring to FIG. 19i, a pair of wedge-shaped waveguides similar to those described above (e.g., with reference to FIGS. 15A-15C) may be formed by the same two long surfaces of each wedge-shaped waveguide 610, 612 - < / RTI > is not on a planar surface. Turning films 606 and 608 (such as those available from 3M Corporation under the trade designation "TRAF ", which in essence comprises a micrometric array) are used to rotate the light rays entering the angle at which the rays are captured by the total internal reflection Or on one or more of the wedge-shaped waveguides to turn outgoing rays as the rays exit the waveguide toward the eye or other target. The incoming rays are directed towards the lower first wedge and toward the optional attenuator 614, such as a DMD, an LCD (e.g., ferroelectric LCD), or an LCD stack operating as a mask.

[00453] After selective attenuator 614, the reflected light is again coupled to a second wedge-shaped waveguide, and then the second wedge-shaped waveguide relays the light by internal total reflection along the wedge. The characteristics of the wedge-shaped waveguide are intentionally such that each bounce of light causes an angle change; The point at which the angle is changed enough to become the critical angle to exit the total internal reflection becomes the injection point from the wedge-shaped waveguide. Typically, the injection portion will be oblique, so that another layer of the turning film can be used to "turn" light that is directed toward a targeted object such as the eye 58.

[00454] Referring to Figure 19j, a number of arcuate lenslet arrays 616, 620, 622 are positioned relative to the eye and a spatial attenuator array 618 is configured to be positioned in the focus / image plane, Can be focused. The first array 616 and the second array 620 are configured such that, in the aggregate, light passing through the eye from the real world is essentially passed through the zero power telescope. The embodiment of Figure 19j shows a third array of lenslets 622 that can be utilized for improved optical compensation, but in general case this third layer is not required. Having telescopic lenses that are the diameter of the viewing optics, as discussed above, can produce undesirably large form factors (somewhat similar to having multiple small sets of binoculars at the front of the eyes).

[00455] One way to optimize the overall geometry is to reduce the diameter of the lenses by dividing the lenses into smaller lenslets as shown in Figure 19j (i.e., an array of lenses rather than a single large lens). (Or the system may experience optical problems such as lack of dispersion, aliasing, and / or focus), to ensure that the beams that enter the pupil are aligned through appropriate lenslets, Arranged lenslet arrays 616, 620 and 622 are shown. Thus, all of the lenslets are "toed in" orientated and point to the pupil of the eye 58, and the system detects the presence of scenarios in which the rays propagate through the unintentional sets of lenses on the way to the pupil Facilitating avoidance.

[00456] Referring to Figures 19k-19n, various software approaches may be utilized to assist in the representation of darkfields in virtual or augmented reality displacement scenarios. Referring to Figure 19k, a typical tricky scenario for an augmented reality is shown (632) with textured carpet 624 and non-uniform background architectural features 626, both of which are bright-colored . The illustrated black box 628 represents an area of the display in which one or more augmented reality features are to be presented to the user for three-dimensional recognition, and in a black box, for example, a portion of the augmented reality game A robot creature 630, which may be a robot creator, is represented. In the illustrated example, the robot character 630 is dark-colored, which creates a tricky representation in three-dimensional perception, particularly with the background selected for this exemplary scenario.

[00457] As discussed briefly above, one of the major challenges for representing dark field augmented reality objects is that the system can not generally add "darkness" or display colorfully; In general, the display is configured to add light. Thus, with reference to Figure 191, the representation of a robot character in an augmented reality view, without any specialized software processes to improve ambiguity, is not that portions of the robot character that would be essentially flat black in the representation are not visible , Only parts of the robot character that will have some bright areas (such as the bright-colored cover of the gun character's shoulder) are only visible (634) - they have almost similar bright gray scale confusion for other normal background images - will result in a scene.

[00458] Referring to Figure 19 (m), using software-based global attenuation processing (similar to digitally wearing one sunglass) provides improved visibility of the robot character, 640) space, the brightness of the robot character, which is almost black, is effectively increased. Also shown in FIG. 19M is a digitally-added light halo 636, which light halo 636 enhances and distinguishes the robot character shapes 638 that are current-the- Can be added. With halftoning, even portions of the robot character that would be represented as flat black become visible as a contrast to the "aura" or white halo represented around the robot character.

[00459] Preferably, the halo can be represented to the user in a three-dimensional space, with the recognized focal distance behind the focal distance of the robot character. To represent darkness, in configurations where single panel occlusion techniques, such as those described above, are utilized, the light halo can be represented by a intensity gradient that matches the dark halo that can accompany the occlusion so that the visibility effect Is minimized. In addition, the halo can be blurred for the background behind the halo illumination being rendered, for additional segmentation effects. By at least partially matching the color and / or brightness of the relatively light-colored background, a more subtle aura or halo effect can be created.

[00460] 19n, some or all of the dark intonations of the robot character may be changed to dark and cool blue colors to provide a further segmentation effect on the background and a relatively good visualization 642 of the robot.

[00461] For example, with reference to Figs. 15A-15D and 19i, wedge-shaped waveguides have been described above. When using a wedge-shaped waveguide, each time a light beam is bounced from one of the surfaces that are not on the co-planar surface, it acquires an angle change, which ultimately causes its approach angle to one of the surfaces to reach a critical angle , It causes a ray to go out of the total internal reflection. The turning films can be used to redirect the outgoing light so that the outgoing beams leave a trajectory nearly perpendicular to the injection surface, depending on the geometrical or ergonomic issues in the play.

[00462] For example, as shown in FIG. 15C, using an array or series of displays to inject image information into a wedge-shaped waveguide, a wedge-shaped waveguide may be used to create a micro-pitched array of angle- Lt; / RTI > More specifically, to represent a single pixel in space such that the eye is hit by a plurality of different beamlets or beams that are unique to a particular eye position at the front of the display panel everywhere the eye is positioned, Or variable wavefront generating waveguides, both of which can generate multiple beamlets or beams.

[00463] As discussed further above in the context of bright field displays, a plurality of viewing zones may be created in a given pupil, each of which may be used for a different focal length, and the aggate may be similar to that of a variable wavefront- Creating a perception similar to the actual optical physics of the reality of the objects being viewed. Thus, a wedge-shaped waveguide with multiple displays can be utilized to create a bright field. In an embodiment similar to the embodiment of Figure 15C with a linear array of displays for injecting image information, a fan of outgoing rays is generated for each pixel. This concept allows a plurality of linear arrays to be extended in a stacked embodiment for all implant image information to a wedge-shaped waveguide (in one variant, one array is angled with respect to the wedge- The second array can be injected at a second angle relative to the wedge-shaped waveguide plane), in which case the injection beams are fan out from the wedge on two different axes.

[00464] Thus, this configuration can be utilized to generate a plurality of beams that are projected at a number of different angles, and due to the fact that each beam under this configuration is driven using a separate display, each beam is individually driven . In other embodiments, one or more of the arrays or displays may be configured to use a diffraction optics to bend the image information injected into the total internal reflection configuration, such as wedge-shaped waveguides, - to inject image information into the wedge-shaped waveguide through the sides or faces of the shape waveguide.

[00465] Various reflectors or reflective surfaces can also be utilized in conjunction with such a wedge-shaped waveguide embodiment to out-couple and manage light from the wedge-shaped waveguide. In one embodiment, the staggering (geometric and / or temporal) of the different displays and arrays is facilitated so that the Z-axis delta can also be developed as a means for injecting three-dimensional information into the wedge-shaped waveguide , An injection aperture into the wedge-shaped waveguide or injection of image information through different surfaces other than those shown in Fig. 15C can be utilized. For larger array configurations than three-dimensional, the various displays can be configured to enter wedge-shaped waveguides at multiple edges of multiple stacks using staggering to obtain higher dimensional configurations.

[00466] Referring to Fig. 20A, a configuration similar to that shown in Fig. 8H is shown, wherein the waveguide 646 has an intermediate sandwiched diffractive optical element 648 (or "DOE " as mentioned above) , As described above, the diffractive optical element may reside on the front or back surface of the illustrated waveguide). The light beam may enter the waveguide 646 from the projector or display 644. Once in waveguide 646, every time a ray traverses DOE 648, a portion of the ray exits waveguide 646. As described above, the DOE can be designed such that the illumination intensity over the length of the waveguide 646 is rather uniform (e.g., the first such DOE intersection can be configured to cause about 10% of the light to go out; Next, the second DOE intersection may be configured to cause about 10% of the remaining light to go out, so that 81% is passed, etc. In other implementations, the DOE may use its own light source to prepare a more uniform illumination intensity over the length of the waveguide May be designed to have a variable diffraction efficiency along the length, such as a linearly-reduced diffraction efficiency).

[00467] (And in one embodiment, permitting the selection of a relatively low diffraction efficiency DOE that would be desirable in a view-to-the-world transparency perspective) to further disperse the remaining light reaching the end The reflective element 650 may be included at one or both ends. In addition, referring to the embodiment of FIG. 20B, further inclusion of elongated reflectors 652 over the length of the waveguide as shown (including, for example, a wavelength-selective thin film dichroic coating) Can be achieved; Preferably, such a reflector will block light that is reflected upwardly (again toward the real world 144 to leave out in a manner not utilized by the viewer). In some embodiments, this elongated reflector can contribute to whether it is a "ghosting" effect by the user.

[00468] In one embodiment, this ghosting effect is preferably distributed substantially evenly over the length of the waveguide assembly, as shown in Figure 20C, until the light exits the eye 58 Waveguide (dual-waveguide) 646, 654, which is designed to keep the light traveling around in a manner that allows the light to travel around it. Referring to Figure 20C, light can be injected using a projector or display 644 and as the light travels over the DOE 656 of the first waveguide 654, the DOE 656 emits, To eject a uniform pattern toward the eyes 58; The light remaining in the first waveguide is reflected into the second waveguide 646 by the first reflector assembly 660. In one embodiment, the second waveguide 646 may be configured to have no DOE, whereby the second waveguide 646 may merely transport the remaining light back to the first waveguide using the second reflector assembly, .

[00469] In another embodiment (as shown in Figure 20C), the second waveguide 646 is also configured to uniformly emit the moving pieces of light to provide a second plane of focus for three-dimensional recognition DOE 648 < / RTI > In contrast to the arrangements of Figures 20a and 20b, the arrangement of Figure 20c is designed such that the light travels in one direction through the waveguide, which results in the above-mentioned ghosting problem associated with passing light back through the waveguide with DOE Avoid. 20D, instead of having a mirror or box shaped reflector assembly 660 at the ends of the waveguide to recycle light, an array of smaller retroreflectors 662, or a retro-reflective material, may be utilized .

[00470] 20E, after light is injected by the display or projector 644, a waveguide (not shown) having a sanded DOE 648 so that the light traverses waveguide 646 back and forth several times before reaching the bottom An embodiment that utilizes some of the light recirculation arrangements of the embodiment of Figure 20c to cause the light to "snake" through 646 is shown at the bottom point, for additional recirculation, It can be recycled back up to the upper level. Such a configuration not only facilitates the use of relatively low diffraction efficiency DOE elements to recirculate light and exit light into the eye 58, but also provides a large exit pupil configuration similar to that described with respect to Figure 8k To distribute light.

[00471] 20F, scanning or other input projection 106 is maintained within the scope of the prism - which means that the geometry of such a prism is fairly limited - without total internal reflection (i.e., There is shown an exemplary configuration similar to that of FIG. 5A, in which incident light is injected into the reflector 102 along a conventional prism or beam splitter substrate 104 (without being considered to be visible). In another embodiment, the waveguide may be utilized in place of the simple prism of Figure 20f, which facilitates the use of total internal reflection to further provide geometric flexibility.

[00472] Other configurations described above are configured to benefit from the inclusion of waveguides for similar operations and light. For example, referring again to FIG. 7A, the general concept illustrated in FIG. 7A is that, in a configuration also designed to facilitate viewing light from the real world, the collimated image injected into the waveguide is refocused . Instead of the refractive lens shown in Fig. 7A, a diffractive optical element can be used as the variable focus element.

[00473] Referring again to FIG. 7B, a liquid crystal isolation region in which the liquid crystal is switched in a mode in which refractive indexes substantially match between a smaller path (total internal reflection through the waveguide) and a larger path (the original waveguide, and the main waveguide and the auxiliary waveguide) Another total waveguide configuration in a situation having multiple layers stacked on top of each other with controllable access toggling between the total reflection through the hybrid waveguide included, The controller can be tuned. High-speed switching electro-active materials, such as lithium niobate, facilitate such path changes using such a configuration at gigahertz rates, which allows to alter the path of light on a pixel-by-pixel basis.

[00474] Referring again to FIG. 8A, a stack of waveguides paired with weak lenses is illustrated to show a multi-focal configuration in which the lens and waveguide elements may be static. Each pair of waveguide and lens may be functionally replaced with a waveguide as described with reference to Figure 8i, with the built-in DOE element (which may be static in close similarity to the configuration of Figure 8a, or may be dynamic) .

[00475] 20G, a transparent prism or block 104 (not shown) is used to hold a mirror or reflector 102 in a periscope type configuration to receive light from a lens 662 and other components such as a projector or display 664. [ I.e., not a waveguide, is utilized, the field of view is limited by the size of such a reflector 102 (the larger the reflector, the wider the field of view). Thus, in order to have a larger field of view in such a configuration, a thicker substrate may be needed to maintain a larger reflector; Otherwise, the functionality of a plurality of reflector assemblies can be exploited to increase the functional field of view, as described with reference to Figures 8o, 8p, and 8q. 20h, a stack 664 of flat waveguides 666, each of which is provided with a display or projector 644 (or, in other embodiments, a multiplexing of a single display) and having an emission reflector 668, Can be utilized to aggregate toward the function of a single reflector. In some cases, the exit reflectors may be the same angle or, in other cases, may not be the same angle, which is in accordance with the positioning of the eye 58 relative to the assembly.

[00476] Figure 20i illustrates a related configuration wherein the reflectors 680, 682, 684, 686, 688 of each of the planar waveguides 670, 672, 674, 676, 678 are offset from each other, It is possible to absorb the light from the projector or display 644 that may be transmitted through the lens 690 and ultimately reflectors 680 and 682 of the respective planar waveguides 670, 672, 674, 676 and 678 , 684, 686, 688 contribute to the escape of light to the pupil 45 of the eye 58. If it is possible to generate a total range of all angles to be expected to be seen in the scene (i.e. preferably without blind spots in the key field of view), then a useful view is achieved. As described above, the eye 58 functions based on at least the angles of rays coming into the eye, which can be simulated. The rays do not have to pass through exactly the same point in the space in the pupil - instead, the rays just need to be detected by the retina through the pupil. 20k illustrates a variation in which a shaded portion of an optical assembly can be utilized as a compensation lens to functionally pass light from an actual world 144 through an assembly, such as light passes through a zero power telescope.

[00477] Referring to Figure 20J, each of the above-mentioned rays may also be a relatively wide beam reflected through suitable waveguides 670, 672 by total internal reflection. The reflector 680, 682 facet size will determine what can be the width of the beam going out.

[00478] With reference to Figure 20l, an additional segmentation of the reflector is shown wherein a plurality of small linear angular reflectors are gathered through a waveguide or stack of such reflectors 696 to form an approximately parabolic reflective surface 694 have. The light coming from the displays 644 (e.g., a single MUXed display) is directed both toward the same shared focus of the pupil 45 of the eye 58, as through the lens 690. [

[00479] Referring again to FIG. 13M, a linear array of displays 378 injects light into the shared waveguide 376. In another embodiment, a single display can be multiplexed into a series of entrance lenses to provide similar functionality to the embodiment of Figure 13m, and entry lenses create parallel paths of rays that follow through the waveguide.

[00480] In the conventional waveguide approach, which relies on total internal reflection for light propagation, the field of view is limited because only light rays in a particular angular range propagate through the waveguide (other rays can escape). In one embodiment, when a red / green / blue (or " RGB ") laser line reflector is located at one or both ends of the plate surfaces, it is highly reflective only for certain wavelengths and poorly reflective for other wavelengths Similar to non-thin film interference filters, the range of angles of light propagation can be functionally increased. To allow light to escape at predetermined locations, windows (without coating) may be provided. Also, in order to have directional selectivity (which is highly reflective only for certain angles of incidence, somewhat similar to reflective elements), a coating may be selected. Such a coating can be most related to the larger planes / spaces of the waveguide.

[00481] Referring again to FIG. 13E, a variation on a scanning fiber display has been discussed, which can be viewed as a scanning thin waveguide configuration, whereby a plurality of very thin plate waveguides 358 are formed, And the configuration will functionally provide a linear array of beams that escape out of the edges of the vibration elements 358. In one embodiment, The illustrated arrangement has approximately five outwardly-projecting planar waveguide portions 358 in the transparent host medium or substrate 356, but it preferably has a different index of refraction, whereby light is ultimately directed to the outside Will remain in total internal reflection in the smaller waveguides of each substrate-range, which feeds the projected planar waveguide portions 358 (in the illustrated embodiment, the planar, curved There is a 90 degree turn in each path at a point where a reflector, type, or other reflector can be utilized).

[00482] Outwardly-projecting planar waveguide sections 358 can be oscillated in groups or individually along the oscillating motion of the substrate 356. Such scanning motion may provide horizontal scanning, and in the case of vertical scanning, an input 360 aspect of the assembly (i.e., one or more scanning fiber displays that are scanning in the vertical axis) may be utilized. Thus, a variation of the scanning fiber display is presented.

[00483] Referring again to FIG. 13H, the waveguide 370 may be utilized to create a bright field. With the waveguides working at their best with collimated beams that can be associated with optical infinity in terms of recognition, all beams that follow the focus can cause inconvenience of recognition (i.e., Thus, the refractive blur does not make a significant difference; in other words, collimated beamlets of narrow diameter, such as 0.5 mm or less, open the eye's perspective adjustment / convergence system, causing discomfort ).

[00484] In one embodiment, a single beam out of the number of cone beamlets can be fed, but if the incoming vector of the incoming beam changes (i. E., Shifting the beam injection position relative to the projector / , It is possible to control where the beam escapes from the waveguide when the beam is directed towards the eye. Thus, by creating a bundle of collimated beams of narrow diameter, a waveguide can be used to create a bright field, and such a configuration does not depend on the actual change in optical wavefront to be associated with the desired recognition in the eye .

[00485] (E.g., by using multi-core fibers and driving each core individually; another configuration is to use a plurality of fiber scanners that come out at different angles, Other configurations may utilize a high-resolution panel display having a lenslet array on top), multiple exit beamlets may be created with different outgoing angles and outgoing positions. Since the waveguide can scramble the bright field, decoding is preferably predetermined.

[00486] Referring to Figures 20m and 20n, there is shown a waveguide 646 assembly 696 comprising waveguide components stacked in a vertical axis or in a horizontal axis. Rather than having one monolithic plate waveguide, the concept of these embodiments is that the light introduced into one waveguide also propagates downward in that waveguide by total internal reflection (i.e., + X, A plurality of smaller waveguides 646 are laminated immediately adjacent to each other so as to be totally internal to the vertical axes (+ y, -Y) in addition to the propagation along the Z axis by internal total reflection at -X , Whereby the light does not spread into other regions. In other words, if the total internal reflection during Z-axis propagation goes from left to right and back again, the configuration can be set up to totally internally total any light that strikes the top or bottom sides; Each layer can be individually driven without interference from other layers. Each waveguide is embedded and configured to emit light into a predetermined distribution along the length of the waveguide, as described above, in a predetermined focal length configuration (shown in the range of 0.5 meters to optical infinity in Figure 20m) DOE 648 < / RTI >

[00487] In another variation, a very dense stack of waveguides with embedded DOEs can be used to span the size of the anatomical pore of the eye (i. E., As illustrated in Figure 20n, where the multiple layers 698 of the composite waveguide are & To be traversed), and may be generated. In such an arrangement, the exit pupil as a result of the total internal reflection and DOEs through the waveguides and through the DOEs, located at the next millimeter, for one wavelength and then the next millimeter, , That is to say, 15 meters away, for a portion that produces a divergent wavefront representing an object coming from the focal distance of the back. Thus, rather than creating a single uniform exit pupil, such a configuration, in combination, produces a plurality of stripes that facilitate the recognition of different focus depths using the eye / brain.

[00488] Such a concept can be extended to configurations including a waveguide with a built-in DOE that is switchable / controllable (i.e., switchable over different focal distances), such as that described with respect to Figures 8b-8n, This allows more efficient optical trapping in the axis across each waveguide. Multiple displays may be coupled to each of the layers, and each waveguide with the DOE will emit rays along the length of the waveguide itself. In another embodiment, rather than relying on total internal reflection, the laser line reflector can be used to increase the angular range. Between the layers of the composite waveguide, a fully reflective metallized coating, such as aluminum, may be utilized to ensure total internal reflection, or alternatively, dichroic or narrow band reflectors may be utilized.

[00489] Referring to Figure 20O, the entire composite waveguide assembly 696 may be curved concavely toward the eye 58 such that each of the individual waveguides is directed towards the pupil. In other words, the configuration can be designed to more efficiently direct the light towards a location where the pupil is likely to be. Such a configuration can also be utilized to increase the field of view.

[00490] As discussed above with respect to Figures 8l, 8m, and 8n, the variable diffractive configuration allows scanning in one axis and is somewhat similar to a scanning optical display. Figure 21A shows an embedded (i.e., sandwiched internally) DOE (with a liner grating term) that can be changed to change the exit angle of light 702 exiting the waveguide, 700). ≪ / RTI > High-frequency switching DOE materials such as lithium niobate may be utilized. In one embodiment, such a scanning arrangement can be used as a sole mechanism for scanning in one axis; In other embodiments, the scanning arrangement can be combined with other scanning axes and used to generate a larger field of view (i.e., if the normal field of view is 40 degrees and by changing the linear diffraction pitch, If possible, the available usable view for the system is 80 degrees.

[00491] 21B, in a conventional configuration, the waveguide 708 may be positioned perpendicular to the panel display 704, such as an LCD or OLED panel, whereby the beams are directed to a visible display May be injected into the panel 704 from the waveguide 708, through the lens 706, in a scanning configuration, to provide a desired wavelength. Thus, in contrast to the configuration described with respect to FIG. 21A, the waveguide can be utilized as a scanning image source in such a configuration, and a single beam of light can be manipulated by scanning fibers or other elements to sweep through different angular positions And, in addition, the other direction can be scanned using the high-frequency diffraction optical element.

[00492] In another embodiment, a uniaxial scanning fiber display (that is, scanning fibers scanning a fastline scan because it is a relatively high frequency) can be used to inject a fastline scan into the waveguide, and then, , Slow DOE switching (i.e., 100 Hz range) can be used to scan lines of different axes to form an image.

[00493] In another embodiment, a DOE with a fixed pitch of grating can be combined with an adjacent layer of electro-active material having a dynamic refractive index (such as liquid crystal), whereby light is redirected at different angles into the grating . This is an application of the basic multipath configuration described above with reference to Figure 7B where an electro-active layer comprising a liquid crystal or an electro-active material such as lithium niobate, for changing the angle at which light is emitted from the waveguide, Can change its own refractive index. The linear diffraction grating may be added to the configuration of FIG. 7B so that the diffraction grating remains at a fixed pitch (in one embodiment, sandwiched in another material, including glass or a larger lower waveguide) , The light is biased before hitting the grating.

[00494] Figure 21C illustrates another embodiment featuring two ground-based waveguide elements 710, 712, wherein one or more of two ground-based waveguide elements 710, 712 Is electro-active, so that the associated refractive index can be changed. The elements are configured such that when light has matching refractive indices, the light is totally internally reflected through a pair (gathered, similar to a planar waveguide with matching both surfaces), while the interfaces are configured to have no effect . Then, if one of the refractive indices is changed to produce a mismatch, beam deflection at the ground interface 714 is caused, and there is an internal total reflection from the surface into the associated ground again. The controllable DOE 716 with a linear grating can then be coupled along one of the long edges of the eye to allow the light to escape to the desired exit angle and reach the eye.

[00495] In another embodiment, a DOE, such as a Bragg grating, may be formed by mechanical stretching of the pitch versus time, e.g., grating (e.g., where the grating resides on an elastic material or comprises an elastic material) The moire bit pattern between the gratings (the gratings may be the same or different pitches), Z-axis motion of the grating functionally similar to the stretching of the grating in terms of effect (i.e., closer to the eye, ) Or electro-active gratings that can be switched on or off, such as those created using a polymer dispersed liquid crystal approach, in which liquid crystal droplets can be controlled to vary the refractive index to become active grating , A switch that turns off the high voltage and returns to the refractive index that matches the refractive index of the host medium A may be configured to change to allow.

[00496] In another embodiment, the time-varying grating can be utilized for field of view expansion by creating a tilted display configuration. In addition, the time-variable grating can be utilized to handle chromatic aberrations (failure to focus all colors / wavelengths on the same focus). One characteristic of diffraction gratings is that the diffraction gratings will deflect the beam according to the incident angle and wavelength of the beam (i.e., the DOE will deflect the different wavelengths by different angles: a single prism deflects the beam at the wavelength of the beam Which is somewhat similar to the way it is split into components).

[00497] In order to compensate for chromatic aberration in addition to field expansion, a time-variable grating control can be used. Thus, for example, in a waveguide with an embedded DOE type as described above, the DOE can be configured to direct the red wavelength to a slightly different location from green and blue, in order to handle unwanted chromatic aberrations. The DOE may be time-variable by having a stack of elements to switch on and off (i.e., to obtain red, green, and blue to be similarly outbound diffracted).

[00498] In another embodiment, a time-variable grating may be utilized for injection pupil expansion. For example, referring to FIG. 21D, waveguide 718 with embedded DOE 720 may be configured to allow any of the outgoing beams to actually enter the target pupil 45 in the baseline mode - It may be possible to be positioned relative to the target pupil. The time-varying configuration allows each of the five outgoing beams to be scanned outwardly by shifting the exit pattern laterally so as to effectively scan one of such beams to better hitting the pupil of the eye, Can be utilized to fill gaps in the pattern (shown as dashed lines / dotted lines). In other words, the functional exit pupil of the display system is expanded.

[00499] In another embodiment, the time-varying grating can be utilized with a waveguide for 1, 2, or 3-axis optical scanning. In a manner analogous to that described in connection with Fig. 21A, terms in the grating, which is scanning the horizontal axis as well as the grating scanning the beam in the vertical axis, can be used. Also, as discussed above with respect to Figures 8b-8n, if radial elements of the grating are included, they can have scanning of the beam in the Z-axis (i.e., toward / away from the eye) May be time sequential scanning.

[00500] Although the discussion herein relates to specialized treatments and the use of DOEs generally associated with waveguides, many of these uses of the DOE are useful whether the DOE is embedded in the waveguide or not. For example, the output of the waveguide can be manipulated individually using DOE; Or the beam can be manipulated by the DOE before the beam is injected into the waveguide; In addition, one or more DOEs such as a time-varying DOE may be utilized as inputs to the preform optical configurations, as discussed below.

[00501] As discussed above with respect to Figures 8b-8n, the elements of the DOE may have circular-symmetric terms, which may be summed using a linear term to produce a controlled exit pattern (i.e., , As described above, the same DOE that out-combines the light can also focus the light). In another embodiment, the circular term of the DOE diffraction grating may be varied such that the focus of the beams representing the appropriate pixels is modulated. Additionally, one configuration may have a second / individual circular DOE, eliminating the need to have a linear term in the DOE.

[00502] Referring to FIG. 21E, a waveguide 722 for outputting collimated light, without an embedded DOE element, and an array of such DOE elements that can be switched between multiple configurations - in one embodiment, (Figure 21F shows a different configuration, where the functional stack 728 of DOE elements may have a second waveguide having a circular-symmetric DOE by having a stack 724, May include a stack of polymer dispersed liquid crystal elements 726 and, without voltage applied, the host medium refractive index is matched to the refractive index of the dispersive molecules of the liquid crystal; in other embodiments, the molecules of lithium niobate Such as through transparent indium tin oxide layers on either side of the host medium, can be dispersed for faster reaction times, Change and, functionally form a diffraction pattern in the host medium).

[00503] In another embodiment, the circular DOE may be layered on the front side of the waveguide for focus modulation. Referring to FIG. 21G, waveguide 722 outputs collimated light, which will be perceived to be associated with an optical infinity focus depth, unless otherwise modified. The collimated light from the waveguide may be input into a diffractive optical element 730 that may be used for dynamic focus modulation (i.e., to transmit different, different foci to the escaping light, And can be turned off). In a related embodiment, the static DOE can be used to focus the collimated light exiting the waveguide to a single depth of focus that may be useful for a particular user application.

[00504] In another embodiment, multiple stacked circular DOEs can be used for additional power and a number of focus levels-from a relatively small number of switchable DOE layers. In other words, the three different DOE layers can be switched in various combinations with respect to each other; The optical powers of the DOEs to be switched on can be added. In one embodiment where a range of up to 4 diopters is required, for example, the first DOE may be configured to provide half the full diopter range required (in this example, a change of 2 diopters in focus); The second DOE may be configured to induce a 1 diopter change in focus; The third DOE can then be configured to induce a 1/2 diopter change in focus. These three DOEs can be mixed and matched to provide a variation of ½, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, and 3.5 diopters in focus. Therefore, in order to obtain a relatively wide range of control, a very large number of DOEs would not be required.

[00505] In one embodiment, the matrix of switchable DOE elements may be utilized for scanning, field of view expansion, and / or exit pupil expansion. In general, in the above discussions of DOEs, it was assumed that a typical DOE would be all on or all off. In one variation, the DOE 732 can be subdivided into a plurality of functional subsections (as labeled with element 734 in FIG. 21H), and each such subsection preferably has its own (See, for example, FIG. 21H, each subsection may be operated by its own set of indium tin oxide, or by other voltage control application leads 736 to the control lead material, again to the central controller . Considering this level of control over the DOE paradigm, additional configurations are facilitated.

[00506] 21i, waveguide 738 with embedded DOE 740 can be viewed from the top down using the user's eye positioned at the front of the waveguide. A given pixel can be represented as a beam entering the waveguide and is totally internally tilted until the beam exits by a rotation pattern emerging from the waveguide as a set of beams. Depending on the diffractive configuration, the beams can be collimated / collimated (for convenience, as shown in FIG. 21i), or can exit the diverging pan configuration if the focal length is closer than optical infinity.

[00507] The set of parallel outgoing beams shown may represent the farthest left pixel of the one the user is viewing in the real world, e.g., as seen through a waveguide, and the light deviating to the right extreme may represent a different group of parallel outgoing beams would. In fact, for modular control of DOE subsections as described above, more computing resources or time may be spent in creating and manipulating small subsets of beams that are likely to actively address the user's pupil That is, other beams never reach the user's eyes and are effectively wasted). 21J, waveguide 738 configuration is shown wherein only two subsections 740, 742 of DOE 744, which are considered to be likely to address the user's pupil 45, Activated. Preferably, one sub-section may be configured to simultaneously direct light in the other direction when the other sub-section is directing light in one direction.

[00508] Figure 21k shows an orthogonal view of two independently controlled subsections 734, 746 of the DOE 732. Referring to the top view of Figure 21I, such independent control can be used to scan or focus the light. In the configuration shown in FIG. 21K, an assembly 748 of three independently controlled DOE / waveguide subsections 750, 752, 754 is used to scan, increase the field of view, and / or increase the exit pupil area. ) Can be used. Such a function may arise from a single waveguide with such independent controllable DOE subsections or from their vertical stacks for additional complexity.

[00509] In one embodiment, if the circular DOE can be controllably stretched radially-symmetrically, the diffraction pitch can be modulated and the DOE can be used as a tunable lens with analog type control. In another embodiment, a single axis of the stretch (e.g., for adjusting the angle of the linear DOE term) may be used for DOE control. Additionally, in other embodiments, a membrane similar to the drum head may be vibrated through oscillatory motion in the Z-axis (i.e., away from / in the eye) that provides Z-axis control and focus change over time .

[00510] 21m, there is shown a stack of several DOEs 756 that receive collimated light from waveguide 722 and re-focus it based on the additional powers of the activated DOEs. The linear and / or radial terms of the DOEs may be used as a frame sequential basis to provide various treatments (such as tiled display configurations or extended field of view) for light exiting the waveguide and preferably towards the user's eye Can be modulated over time. In configurations in which DOEs or DOEs are embedded within a waveguide, as described above, in those configurations where low diffraction efficiency is required to maximize the transmittance for light passing through the real world and DOEs or DOEs are not embedded, Efficiency may be required. In one embodiment, both the linear and radial DOE terms can be combined outside the waveguide, and in such a case, high diffraction efficiency will be required.

[00511] Referring to Figure 21n, segmented or parabolic reflectors such as those discussed above in Figure 8q are shown. Rather than achieving a segmented reflector by combining a plurality of smaller reflectors, in one embodiment, the same function from a single waveguide with a DOE with different phase profiles for each of its sections is controllable by the subsection . In other words, the entire segmented reflector function can be turned on or off together, but in general, the DOE can be configured to direct light towards the same area in space (i.e., the user's pupil).

[00512] Referring to Figures 22A-22Z, optical configurations known as "free-form optics" can be used for certain of the problems described above. The term "free form" is generally used for arbitrary curved surfaces that can be used in situations where spherical, parabolic, or cylindrical curved lenses do not meet design complexity such as geometric constraints. For example, referring to FIG. 22A, one of the common problems with display 762 configurations when viewing a user through a mirror (and also often through lens 760) The field of view is limited by the subtend area.

[00513] Referring to Figure 22B, there is a simple relationship that, more simply, with a display 762 that can include several lens elements, the field of view can not be greater than the angle to the display 762. [ 22C, this problem may be exacerbated if light from the real world also tries to have an augmented reality experience that it is possible for the optical system to pass through the optical system, which in such a case is often the case when the reflector 764 is present The reflector causes the overall optical path length to be acquired from the eye to the lens to be increased by inserting the reflector, with respect to the lens 760, which makes the angle more rigid and reduces the field of view.

[00514] With this in mind, if you want to increase the field of view, you have to increase the size of the lens, but that can mean pushing the physical lens from the ergonomic point of view towards the user's forehead. Additionally, the reflector may not catch all of the light from the larger lens. Thus, there are practical limitations imposed by the geometry of the human head, which in general is a problem with obtaining visibility greater than 40 degrees using conventional see-through displays and lenses.

[00515] (I.e., curved reflector 766), rather than having a standard flat plate reflector as described above, for free-form lenses, because the curved lens geometry has a field of view . ≪ / RTI > 22D, it is possible for a free-form arrangement to realize a significantly greater field of view for a given set of optical requirements, without the conventional paradigm bypass path length as described above with reference to FIG. 22C.

[00516] Referring to Figure 22E, typical free-form optics have three active surfaces. 22E, in one conventional free-form optical 770 configuration, light can be directed from the image plane, such as the flat panel display 768, to the first active surface 772 towards free-form optics, 1 active surface is typically a first transmissive free-form surface that refracts transmitted light and imposes a focus change (e.g., the added movie point aberration, the final bounce from the third surface adds a matching / And preferably they are canceled). The incoming light may be directed from the first surface to the second surface 774 where it may collide with an angle that is shallow enough to cause light to be reflected toward the third surface 776 under total internal reflection.

[00517] The third surface may comprise a semi-plated, random-curved surface configured to bounce light out through the second surface toward the eye, as shown in Figure 22E. Thus, in the typical freeform configuration shown, light enters through the first surface, bounces from the second surface, bounces from the third surface, and is directed out through the second surface. Due to the optimization of the second surface to have the necessary reflective properties for the first pass as well as the refractive properties for the second pass when the light goes out into the eye, a variety of shapes with a simpler spherical or parabolic shape Curved surfaces are formed in the free-form optics.

[00518] Referring to Figure 22F, the compensation lens 780 is positioned in the free-form optics 770 so that the total thickness of the optics assembly is substantially uniform in thickness, and preferably without magnification for the incoming light from the real world 144 in an augmented reality configuration. As shown in FIG.

[00519] Referring to Figure 22G, the free-form optics 770 can be combined with a waveguide 778 configured to enable total internal reflection of light captured within certain constraints. For example, as shown in FIG. 22G, light may be directed from the image plane to the freeform / waveguide assembly, such as a flat panel display, and may be directed within the waveguide within the waveguide until the light hits the curved free- Can be totally reflected. Thus, the light bounces several times into the total internal reflection until reaching the free-form wedge portion.

[00520] One of the main objectives for such an assembly is to ensure that the optical assembly maintains a uniform thickness as much as possible (to enable total internal reflection and also to allow viewing the world through the assembly without additional compensation) It is to try to lengthen. 22H shows a configuration similar to that of FIG. 22G, except that the configuration of FIG. 22H also features a compensating lens portion for further extending thickness uniformity and helping to view the world through the assembly without additional compensation Respectively.

[00521] Referring to Figure 22i, in another embodiment, a free surface having a small planar surface or fourth surface 784 at the lower left corner configured to enable injection of image information at a different location than that typically used for free- Optical 782 is shown. The input device 786 may include, for example, a scanning fiber display that may be designed to have a very small output geometry. The fourth side may include various geometric structures per se, for example, by the use of flat or free-form surface geometries, and may have its own refractive power.

[00522] Referring to Figure 22J, in practice such a configuration may also feature a reflective coating 788 along a first surface for directing light back to the second surface, And the third surface directs light out through the second surface and into the eye 58. The addition of the fourth small surface for injection of image information enables a more compact configuration. In an embodiment where a typical freeform input configuration and scanning fiber display 790 is used, some lenses 792 and 794 may be required to properly form the image plane 796 using the output from the scanning fiber display These hardware components add extra bulk, which may be undesirable.

[00523] 22K, light from the scanning fiber display 790 passes through the input optical assemblies 792, 794 toward the image plane 796 and then through the first surface of the free-form optics 770 And then another total internal reflection from the third surface exits through the second surface to result in light that is directed toward the eye 58. In this embodiment,

[00524] The total internal total reflection free-form waveguide is designed so that no reflective coatings are present (i. E., The point at which the light exits in a manner similar to the wedge-shape described above, until the critical angle of incidence on the surface is satisfied) ). In other words, rather than having two flat surface surfaces, it may have a surface that includes one or more sub-surfaces from a set of conical curves such as parabolas, spheres, ellipses, and the like.

[00525] Such a configuration may continue to produce sufficiently-shallow angles for total internal reflection in the optics, thereby providing a somewhat hybrid approach between conventional free-form optics and wedge-shaped waveguides. One motive with such a configuration is to get rid of the use of reflective coatings, and reflective coatings help to refine the product, but also allow transmission of a relatively large portion (e.g., 50%) of the light transmitted through the real world 144 . Additionally, such a coating may also block an equivalent amount of light entering free-form optics from the input device. Thus, there are reasons to develop designs that do not have reflective coatings.

[00526] As described above, one of the surfaces of conventional free-form optics may comprise a semi-reflective surface. In general, such a reflective surface will have a "neutral density ", meaning that the reflective surface will generally reflect all wavelengths similarly. In other embodiments, such as where a scanning fiber display is used as an input, the conventional reflector paradigm may be replaced by a wavelength sensitive narrow band reflector such as a thin film laser line reflector. Thus, in one embodiment, the configuration can reflect specific red / green / wave wavelength ranges and be passively maintained for other wavelengths, which will generally increase the optical transmission, The transmission of image information from the receiver 144 will be preferred for the augmented reality configurations.

[00527] Referring to Figure 22l, an embodiment is shown in which a plurality of free-form optics 770 can be stacked in the Z-axis (i.e., along an axis aligned substantially with the optical axis of the eye). In one variant, each of the three illustrated free-form optics can have a wavelength-selective coating (e.g., one for blue, the next for green, the next highly selective for red) Blue from the surface of the first surface, green from the other, and red from the third surface. Such a configuration can be used, for example, to address chromatic aberration issues, to create a bright field, or to increase the functional exit pupil size.

[00528] Referring to Figure 22m an embodiment is shown in which a single free-form optic 798 has a plurality of reflective surfaces 800, 802, 804, each of which has a wavelength or polarization May be optional.

[00529] Referring to Figure 22n, in one embodiment, a plurality of microdisks 786, such as scanning optical displays, are injected into a single free-form optic, tiling the images (i.e., by reflecting one wavelength per display) Thereby providing an increased field of view), increasing the functional pupil size, or addressing problems such as chromatic aberration. Each of the displays shown will inject light to take a different path across free-form optics due to the different positioning of the displays with respect to free-form optics, which will provide a larger functional exit pupil output.

[00530] In one embodiment, the packet or bundle of scanning fiber displays may be used as an input to overcome one of the problems in operably coupling the scanning fiber display to the free-form optics. One such problem with scanning fiber display configurations is that the output of individual fibers is emitted with a certain number of apertures or "NA" as well as the angle of incidence of light from the fiber; Ultimately, this angle determines the diameter of the beam passing through the various optics and ultimately determines the injection functional exit pupil size; Thus, in order to maximize the exit pupil size for a free-form optical configuration, it is possible to increase the NA of the fiber, for example using optimized refractive relationships between the core and the cladding, or to increase the NA of the fiber, , A refractive index lens such as a gradient refractive index lens or a "GRIN" lens), or may build such a lens into the end of the fiber, or may produce an array of fibers that are free- In such a case, all such NAs in the bundle are kept small and an array of small exit pupils is created in the exit pupil that collectively form the same function as the large exit pupil.

[00531] Alternatively, in other embodiments, a sparse array of scanning fiber displays or other displays (i. E., Not strictly bundled like packets) may be used to functionally increase the view of the virtual image via free-form optics have. 22O, in another embodiment, a plurality of displays or displays 786 may be injected through the top of the free-form optics 770, as well as other plurality of displays 786 through the bottom corner And the display arrays may be two-dimensional or three-dimensional arrays. Referring to Figure 22P, in another related embodiment, image information may also be injected from the side 806 of the free-form optic 770.

[00532] In embodiments where a plurality of smaller exit pupils are functionally grafted to a larger exit pupil, each of the scanning fibers is selected to be monochromatic so that only subgroups of red fibers within a given bundle or plurality of projectors or displays, Only a subgroup of blue fibers, and only a subgroup of green fibers. Such a configuration allows for higher efficiency in output coupling to bring light into the optical fibers, e.g., in such an embodiment, there is no need to overlap red, green, and blue within the same band.

[00533] Referring to Figures 22q-22v, various free-form optical tiling configurations are shown. Referring to Figure 22q, two free-form optics are tiled side-by-side, and a microdisplay 786 on each side, such as a scanning optical display, displays the image from each side so that one free-form optical wedge represents each half of the field of view An embodiment is shown which is configured to inject information.

[00534] Referring to Figure 22r, a compensator lens 808 may be included to facilitate viewing of the real world through the optical assembly. Figure 22s illustrates a configuration in which the free-form optical wedges are tiled side-by-side to increase the functional field of view while maintaining a relatively uniform thickness of such optical assembly.

[00535] With reference to Figure 22t, the star-shaped assembly includes a plurality of free-form optical wedges (also referred to as a plurality of displays for inputting image information) in a configuration capable of maintaining a relatively thin overall optical assembly thickness, As shown in FIG.

[00536] For tiled free-form optical assemblies, the optical elements can be aggatated to produce a larger field of view, and the tiling configurations described above address this concept. For example, in a configuration in which two free-form waveguides are aimed at the eye as shown in Figure 22r, there are several ways to increase the field of view. One option is to "ine" the free-form waveguides such that their outputs share a cavity of the pupil or overlap the cavity of the pupil (eg, the user places the left half of the view through the left free- The right half of the field of view can be seen through the right free-standing waveguide).

[00537] For such a configuration, the field of view is increased using tiled free-form waveguides, but the exit pupil does not increase in size. Alternatively, the free-form waveguides may be oriented so that they are not so much burnt, so that they produce exit pupils aligned with the anatomical pores of the eye. In one example, the anatomical cavity may be 8 mm wide and each of the parallel exit pupils may be 8 mm so that the functional exit pupil is expanded by about 2 times. Thus, such a configuration provides an enlarged exit pupil, but if the eye moves around an "eyebox" defined by the exit pupil, the eye may lose portions of the view (i.e., Either due to the side-by-side property, either the right incoming light portion or the left incoming light portion is lost).

[00538] In an embodiment using such an approach to tile free-form optics, in particular in the Z-axis with respect to the user's eyes, the red wavelengths can be driven through one free-form optic, , And such red / green / blue aberration can be addressed. A number of free-form optics may also be provided for such a configuration, stacked up, each of which is configured to address a particular wavelength.

[00539] Referring to Figure 22u, two oppositely-oriented free-form optics are shown stacked in the Z-axis (i.e., they are inverted with respect to each other). For such a configuration, no compensation lenses may be required to enable accurate views of the world through the assembly, i. E., Without having compensation lenses as in the embodiment of Figs. 22f or 22r, Free-form optics may be used, which may additionally help route light to the eye. Figure 22v shows another similar configuration in which the assemblies of two free-form optics are presented as vertical stacks.

[00540] To ensure that one surface in the free-form optics does not interfere with the other surface, either wavelength or polarized selective reflector surfaces can be used. For example, referring to FIG. 22V, not only the red, green, and blue wavelengths can be injected in the form of 650 nm, 530 nm, and 450 nm, but also red, green, and blue wavelengths in the form of 620 nm, 550 nm, and 470 nm And different selective reflectors can be used in each of the free optics so that they do not interfere with each other. In a configuration in which polarization filtering is used for a similar purpose, the reflectance / transmittance selectivity for light polarized in a particular axis may vary (i.e., images are transmitted to each free waveguide to operate to have reflector selectivity Previously pre-polarized).

[00541] Referring to Figures 22w and 22x, configurations in which a plurality of free waveguides can be used together in series are illustrated. Referring to FIG. 22w, the light is filtered on a pixel-by-pixel basis, via a selective lens 812 that may come in from the real world and be configured to sequentially relay light to a reflector 810, such as a DMD from a DLP system Through a first freeform optic 770 that may be configured to reflect light that is incident on the first free-form optic 770 (i. E., As described above, a masking mask may be used to block certain elements of the real world, Suitable spatial light modulators, including DMDs, LCDs, ferroelectric LOCSs, MEMS shutter arrays, etc., may be used, as described), other free-form optics 770 that relay light to the user's eye 28 Lt; / RTI > Such a configuration may be more compact than using conventional lenses for spatial light modulation.

[00542] Referring to Figure 22x, in a scenario where it is important to keep the overall thickness to a minimum, a configuration with one highly reflective surface can be used to bounce the light directly to other densely positioned free-form optics. In one embodiment, an optional attenuator 814 may be interposed between the two free-form optics 770.

[00543] Referring to Figure 22y, an embodiment is shown in which the free-form optic 770 can include an aspect of the contact lens system. There is illustrated a miniaturized, free-form optic that engages the cornea of a user's eye 58 with a compacted compensator lens portion 780 similar to that described with reference to Figure 22F. Signals can be injected into a miniaturized free-form assembly, for example, using a tethered scanning fiber display coupled between the free-form optics and the tear duct area of the user or between the free-form optics and another head- have.

[00544] Various illustrative embodiments of the present invention are described herein. References to these examples are made in a non-limiting sense. These are provided to illustrate more broadly applicable aspects of the present invention. Various changes to the described invention can be made and equivalents can be substituted without departing from the true spirit and scope of the invention. In addition, many modifications may be made to adapt a particular situation, material, composition of matter, process, process operation (s) or step (s) to the object (s), idea, or scope of the present invention. Additionally, as will be appreciated by those skilled in the art, without departing from the scope or spirit of the present invention, each of the individual variations described and illustrated herein can be readily implemented with features of any of the other embodiments Separate components or features that can be separated or combined. All such modifications are intended to be within the scope of the claims herein associated with this disclosure.

[00545] The present invention includes methods that can be performed using target devices. The methods may include operations to provide such suitable devices. This provision can be performed by the end user. In other words, in order to provide the requisite devices in the subject method, the "providing" operation merely requires that the end user acquire, access, access, locate, set up, activate, power up or otherwise operate Demand. The methods listed herein may be performed in enumerated events in any order, logically possible, as well as in enumerated events.

[00546] Along with details on material selection and fabrication, exemplary aspects of the invention have been developed above. As with other details of the present invention, these may be understood by those skilled in the art or may be recognized in connection with the above-cited patents and publications, as well as being generally known. The same content may be valid for the method-based aspects of the present invention in terms of additional operations, such as commonly used or logically used.

[00547] In addition, while the present invention has been described with reference to various examples that selectively include a variety of features, the present invention is not limited to being described or shown as contemplated for each variation of the present invention. Various changes to the described invention can be made without departing from the true spirit and scope of the invention, and equivalents (whether listed herein or not included for the sake of brevity) may be substituted. In addition, it is understood that, where a range of values is provided, all respective intermediate values between such upper and lower limits of such range and any other specified or intermediate range of such specified ranges are encompassed within the present invention.

[00548] It is also contemplated that any optional features of the described variations of the present invention may be developed and claimed independently or in combination with any one or more of the features described herein. A reference to a single item includes the possibility of a plurality of identical items being present. More specifically, as used herein and in the claims related thereto, the singular forms "a," "the," and "the" include plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. do. In other words, the use of articles allows for "at least one " of the subject item in the claims above as well as the claims relating to this disclosure. It is further noted that these claims may be drafted to exclude any optional elements. Therefore, such description is intended to serve as a starting basis for the use of such exclusive term as "only "," only ", etc. in connection with the use of the enumeration or "negative"

[00549] Without the use of such exclusive terms, the term "comprising" in the claims associated with this disclosure includes any additional elements, whether or not a given number of elements are listed in these claims, May be regarded as diverting characteristics of the elements developed in these claims. Except as specifically defined herein, all technical and scientific terms used herein shall be taken to be as broad as possible, with common sense, while maintaining claim validity.

[00550] The scope of the present invention is not limited to the examples provided and / or the subject specification, but rather only by the scope of the claim language associated with the present disclosure.

Claims (878)

A system for displaying virtual content,
A light source for multiplexing one or more of the light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner; And
And an array of reflectors for receiving the one or more light patterns and variably directing light toward the exit pupil. A system for displaying virtual content,
An image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner;
An optical modulator configured to transmit light associated with one or more frames of the image data;
A substrate for directing image information to a user's eye, the substrate housing a plurality of reflectors;
A first reflector of the plurality of reflectors for reflecting transmitted light associated with a first frame of image data to the user eye at a first angle; And
And a second reflector for reflecting transmitted light associated with a second frame of the image data to the user eye at a second angle. 3. The method according to claim 1 or 2,
Wherein the angle of reflection of the plurality of reflectors is variable. 3. The method according to claim 1 or 2,
Wherein the reflectors are switchable. 3. The method according to claim 1 or 2,
Wherein the plurality of reflectors are electronically optically active. 3. The method of claim 2,
Wherein the index of refraction of the plurality of reflectors is modified to match the index of refraction of the substrate. 3. The method according to claim 1 or 2,
Further comprising a high-frequency gating layer configurable to be disposed between the substrate and the user eye,
Wherein the high-frequency gating layer has a controllable moveable aperture. 8. The method of claim 7,
Wherein the aperture of the high-frequency gating layer is moved in such a way that image data is selectively transmitted only through the light reflected through the aperture,
Wherein one or more reflectors of the transmissive beam splitter substrate are blocked by the high-frequency gating layer. 8. The method of claim 7,
Wherein the aperture is an LCD aperture. 8. The method of claim 7,
Wherein the aperture is a MEMs array. 3. The method of claim 2,
Wherein the first angle is equal to the second angle. 3. The method of claim 2,
Wherein the first angle is different from the second angle. 3. The method of claim 2,
Further comprising a first lens for steering the set of rays to the user's eye through a nodal point,
Wherein the first lens is configured to be arranged on the substrate and in front of the first reflector so that the set of rays exiting the first reflector passes through the first lens before reaching the user eye, A system for displaying content. 14. The method of claim 13,
Further comprising a second lens for compensating for the first lens,
Wherein the second lens is configurable to be disposed on the substrate and on the opposite side of the side on which the first lens is disposed, thereby deriving a zero magnification. 3. The method of claim 2,
Wherein the first one of the plurality of reflectors is a curved reflective surface for collecting a set of rays associated with the image data into a single output point prior to being transmitted to the user's eye. 16. The method of claim 15,
Wherein the curved reflector is a parabolic reflector. 16. The method of claim 15,
Wherein the curved reflector is an elliptical reflector. A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Providing one or more light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner; And
And reflecting the one or more light patterns associated with one or more frames of the image data through the transmissive beam splitter into the exit pupil,
Wherein the transmissive beam splitter has a plurality of reflectors for variably directing light toward the exit pupil. 19. The method of claim 18,
Wherein a reflection angle of the plurality of reflectors is variable. 19. The method of claim 18,
Wherein the reflectors are switchable. 19. The method of claim 18,
Wherein the plurality of reflectors are electronically optically active. 19. The method of claim 18,
Wherein the refractive index of the plurality of reflectors is modified to match the index of refraction of the substrate. 19. The method of claim 18,
Further comprising a high-frequency gating layer between the transmissive beam splitter and the user eye,
Wherein the high-frequency gating layer has a controllably moveable aperture. 24. The method of claim 23,
Wherein the aperture of the high-frequency gating layer is moved in such a way that image data is selectively transmitted only through the light reflected through the aperture,
Wherein one or more reflectors of the transmissive beam splitter substrate are blocked by the high-frequency gating layer. 24. The method of claim 23,
Wherein the aperture is an LCD aperture. 24. The method of claim 23,
Wherein the aperture is a MEMs array. 19. The method of claim 18,
Further comprising manipulating a set of rays exiting the transmissive beam splitter through a first lens with a user's eye through a nodal point,
Wherein the first lens is configurable to be disposed between the transmissive beam splitter and the user eye. 28. The method of claim 27,
Further comprising compensating for the effect of the first lens through the second lens,
The second lens being configurable to be disposed on a substrate and on an opposite side of a side on which the first lens is disposed,
Wherein the compensation lens derives a zero magnification of the light from the outside environment thereby resulting in a zero magnification. 19. The method of claim 18,
Wherein one of the plurality of reflectors is a curved reflective surface for collecting a set of rays associated with the image data to a single output point prior to being transmitted to the user's eye. 30. The method of claim 29,
Wherein the curved reflector is a parabolic reflector. 30. The method of claim 29,
Wherein the curved reflector is an elliptical reflector. 19. The method of claim 18,
Wherein the plurality of reflectors of the transmissive beam splitter substrate relay the wavefront to the user's eyes. 33. The method of claim 32,
Wherein the wavefront is a collimated wavefront. 33. The method of claim 32,
Wherein the wavefront is a curved wavefront. 34. The method of claim 33,
Wherein the collimated wavefront is perceived by a user as coming from an infinite depth plane. 35. The method of claim 34,
Wherein the curved wavefront is perceived as coming from a specific depth plane. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
A light source for multiplexing one or more of the light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner;
An array of reflectors for receiving the one or more light patterns, the array of reflectors being oriented at a particular angle; And
And a plurality of optical elements coupled to the array of reflectors for variably directing the light patterns toward the exit pupil. 39. The method of claim 37,
Wherein the array of reflectors is separate from the optical elements. 39. The method of claim 38,
Wherein the array of reflectors comprises planar mirrors. 39. The method of claim 38,
Wherein the optical elements are lenslets that are coupled to the array of reflectors. 39. The method of claim 37,
Wherein one or more reflectors of the array of reflectors are curvilinear. 39. The method of claim 37,
Wherein the optical elements are integrated into the array of reflectors. 43. The method of claim 42,
Wherein the reflectors are parabolic reflectors. 43. The method of claim 42,
Wherein the reflectors are elliptical reflectors. 43. The method of claim 42,
Wherein the plurality of optical elements extend the exit pupil. 39. The method of claim 37,
Further comprising a first lens for manipulating a set of rays to the user's eye through a nodal point,
Wherein the first lens is arranged on the substrate and between the first reflector and the user eye to allow the set of rays exiting the first reflector to pass through the first lens before reaching the user eye. A system for displaying configurable, virtual content to a user. 47. The method of claim 46,
Further comprising a second lens for compensating for the optical power of the first lens,
The second lens is configurable to be disposed on the substrate and on the opposite side of the side on which the first lens is disposed so that the user is able to view a substantially unoriented view of the outside world through the lens stack, And to display the virtual content to the user. 39. The method of claim 37,
Wherein the plurality of reflectors comprises wavelength-selective reflectors. 39. The method of claim 37,
Wherein the plurality of reflectors comprises half mirrored mirrors. 39. The method of claim 37,
Wherein the plurality of optical elements comprises a refractive lens. 39. The method of claim 37,
Wherein the plurality of optical elements comprises a diffractive lens. 42. The method of claim 41,
Wherein the curved reflectors comprise wavelength-selective notch filters. A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Providing one or more light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner;
Reflecting the one or more optical patterns associated with one or more frames of the image data through the transmissive beam splitter into the exit pupil, the transmissive beam splitter being configured to variably direct light to the exit pupil Having a plurality of reflectors; And
And extending the exit pupil through a plurality of optical elements coupled to the plurality of reflectors of the transmissive beam splitter. 54. The method of claim 53,
Wherein an array of reflectors is separated from the optical elements. 54. The method of claim 53,
Wherein the array of reflectors comprises planar mirrors. 54. The method of claim 53,
Wherein the optical elements are lenslets that are coupled to the array of reflectors. 54. The method of claim 53,
Wherein one or more of the reflectors of the array of reflectors is curvilinear. 54. The method of claim 53,
Wherein the optical elements are integrated into the array of reflectors. 59. The method of claim 58,
Wherein the reflectors are parabolic reflectors. 59. The method of claim 58,
Wherein the reflectors are elliptical reflectors. 54. The method of claim 53,
Further comprising a first lens for directing the set of rays to the user's eye through a nodal point,
Wherein the first lens is arranged on the substrate and between the first reflector and the user eye to allow the set of rays exiting the first reflector to pass through the first lens before reaching the user eye. A method for displaying configurable, virtual content to a user. 62. The method of claim 61,
Further comprising a second lens for compensating for the optical power of the first lens,
The second lens is configurable to be disposed on the substrate and on the opposite side of the side on which the first lens is disposed so that the user can see a substantially undistorted view of the outside world through the lens stack A method for displaying a virtual content to a user. 54. The method of claim 53,
Wherein the plurality of reflectors comprises wavelength-selective reflectors. 54. The method of claim 53,
Wherein the plurality of reflectors comprises half mirrored mirrors. 54. The method of claim 53,
Wherein the plurality of optical elements comprises a refractive lens. 54. The method of claim 53,
Wherein the plurality of optical elements comprises a diffractive lens. 58. The method of claim 57,
Wherein the curved reflectors comprise wavelength-selective notch filters. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
A light source for multiplexing one or more of the light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner;
A waveguide for receiving the one or more light patterns at a first focus level; And
And a variable focus element (VFE) coupled to the waveguide for placing at least a portion of the light patterns at a second focus level. 69. The method of claim 68,
Wherein the VFE does not substantially change the image magnification while adjusting the focus level. 69. The method of claim 68,
Wherein the VFE changes an image magnification while adjusting a focus level. 69. The method of claim 68,
Further comprising a second VFE that adjusts the wavefront of light from the outside world so that the view of the user of the outside world is not substantially distorted when the first VFE changes the focus of the light patterns, For the system. 69. The method of claim 68,
Wherein the plurality of frames are provided to the user at a high frequency to allow the user to perceive the plurality of frames as part of a single coherent scene,
Wherein the VFE changes focus from a first frame to a second frame. 69. The method of claim 68,
Wherein the light source is a scanning optical display,
Wherein the VFE changes focus in a line-by-line manner. 69. The method of claim 68,
Wherein the light source is a scanning optical display,
Wherein the VFE changes focus in a pixel-by-pixel manner. 69. The method of claim 68,
Wherein the VFE is a diffractive lens. 69. The method of claim 68,
Wherein the VFE is a refractive lens. 69. The method of claim 68,
Wherein the VFE is a reflective mirror. 78. The method of claim 77,
Wherein the reflective mirror is opaque. 78. The method of claim 77,
Wherein the reflective mirror is partially reflective. 69. The method of claim 68,
Further comprising a perspective adjustment module for tracking accommodation of user eyes,
Wherein the VFE changes the focus of the light patterns based at least in part on the perspective adjustment of the user's eyes. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
A light source for multiplexing one or more of the light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner;
A waveguide for receiving said one or more light patterns and directing said light patterns to a first focus; And
And a variable focus element (VFE) coupled to the waveguide for directing at least a portion of the light patterns to a second focus,
Wherein the VFE is incorporated into the waveguide. 83. The method of claim 81,
Wherein the VFE is telecentric. 83. The method of claim 81,
Wherein the VFE is non-telecentric. 83. The method of claim 81,
A system for displaying virtual content to a user, the system further comprising a compensation lens to prevent a view of a user of the outside world from being distorted. 83. The method of claim 81,
Wherein the plurality of frames are provided to the user in a high-frequency manner to allow the user to recognize the plurality of frames as part of a single coherent scene,
Wherein the VFE changes focus from a first frame to a second frame. 83. The method of claim 81,
Wherein the light source is a scanning optical display,
Wherein the VFE changes focus in a line-by-line manner. 83. The method of claim 81,
Wherein the light source is a scanning optical display,
Wherein the VFE changes focus in a pixel-by-pixel manner. 83. The method of claim 81,
Wherein the VFE is a diffractive lens. 83. The method of claim 81,
Wherein the VFE is a refractive lens. 83. The method of claim 81,
Wherein the VFE is a reflective mirror. 89. The method of claim 90,
Wherein the reflective mirror is opaque. 89. The method of claim 90,
Wherein the reflective mirror is partially reflective. 83. The method of claim 81,
Further comprising a perspective adjustment module for tracking a perspective adjustment of user eyes,
Wherein the VFE changes the focus of the light patterns based at least in part on the perspective adjustment of the user's eyes. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
A light source for multiplexing one or more of the light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner;
A waveguide for receiving said one or more light patterns and directing said light patterns to a first focus; And
And a variable focus element (VFE) coupled to the waveguide for directing at least a portion of the light patterns to a second focus,
Wherein the VFE is separate from the waveguide. 95. The method of claim 94,
Wherein the VFE is telecentric. 95. The method of claim 94,
Wherein the VFE is non-telecentric. 95. The method of claim 94,
A system for displaying virtual content to a user, the system further comprising a compensation lens to prevent a view of a user of the outside world from being distorted. 95. The method of claim 94,
Wherein the plurality of frames are provided to the user in a high-frequency manner to allow the user to recognize the plurality of frames as part of a single coherent scene,
Wherein the VFE changes focus from a first frame to a second frame. 95. The method of claim 94,
Wherein the light source is a scanning optical display,
Wherein the VFE changes focus in a line-by-line manner. 95. The method of claim 94,
Wherein the light source is a scanning optical display,
Wherein the VFE changes focus in a pixel-by-pixel manner. 95. The method of claim 94,
Wherein the VFE is a diffractive lens. 95. The method of claim 94,
Wherein the VFE is a refractive lens. 95. The method of claim 94,
Wherein the VFE is a reflective mirror. 104. The method of claim 103,
Wherein the reflective mirror is opaque. 104. The method of claim 103,
Wherein the reflective mirror is partially reflective. 95. The method of claim 94,
Further comprising a perspective adjustment module for tracking a perspective adjustment of user eyes,
Wherein the VFE changes the focus of the light patterns based at least in part on the perspective adjustment of the user's eyes. A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Providing one or more light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data;
Converging the one or more optical patterns associated with one or more frames of the image data to a first focus through a waveguide; And
And modifying the first focus of light through a variable focus element (VFE) to produce a wavefront of a second focus. 107. The method of claim 107,
Wherein the VFE is separate from the waveguide. 107. The method of claim 107,
Wherein the VFE is incorporated into the waveguide. 107. The method of claim 107,
Wherein one or more frames of the image data are provided in a time-sequential manner. 112. The method of claim 110,
Wherein the VFE modifies the focus of one or more frames of the image data on a frame-by-frame basis. 112. The method of claim 110,
Wherein the VFE modifies the focus of one or more frames of the image data on a pixel-by-pixel basis. 107. The method of claim 107,
The VFE modifies the first focus to produce a third focus wavefront,
Wherein the second focus is different from the third focus. 107. The method of claim 107,
Wherein the second focus wavefront is recognized by the user as coming from a particular depth plane. 107. The method of claim 107,
Wherein the VFE is telecentric. 107. The method of claim 107,
Wherein the VFE is non-telecentric. 107. The method of claim 107,
Further comprising a compensation lens to prevent a view of a user of the outside world from being distorted. 107. The method of claim 107,
Wherein the plurality of frames are provided to the user in a high-frequency manner to allow the user to recognize the plurality of frames as part of a single coherent scene,
Wherein the VFE changes focus from a first frame to a second frame. 107. The method of claim 107,
Wherein the light source is a scanning optical display,
Wherein the VFE changes focus in a line-by-line manner. 107. The method of claim 107,
Wherein the VFE is a diffractive lens. 107. The method of claim 107,
Wherein the VFE is a refractive lens. 107. The method of claim 107,
Wherein the VFE is a reflective mirror. 107. The method of claim 107,
Wherein the reflective mirror is opaque. 107. The method of claim 107,
Wherein the reflective mirror is partially reflective. 107. The method of claim 107,
Further comprising a perspective adjustment module for tracking a perspective adjustment of user eyes,
Wherein the VFE changes the focus of the light patterns based at least in part on the perspective adjustment of the user's eyes. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
A plurality of waveguides for receiving light rays associated with image data and transmitting the light beams toward user eyes, the plurality of waveguides being stacked in a direction facing the user's eyes;
A first lens coupled to a first one of the plurality of waveguides for modifying the rays transmitted from the first waveguide, thereby transmitting rays having a first wavefront curvature; And
And a second lens coupled to a second one of the plurality of waveguides for modifying the rays transmitted from the second waveguide, thereby transmitting rays having a second wavefront curvature,
Wherein the first lens coupled to the first waveguide and the second lens coupled to the second waveguide are stacked horizontally in a direction facing the user's eye. 126. The method of claim 126,
Wherein the first wavefront curvature is different from the second wavefront curvature. 126. The method of claim 126,
Further comprising a third waveguide of the plurality of waveguides for communicating collimated light to the user eye to allow the user to perceive the image data as coming from an optical infinity plane, For the system. 126. The method of claim 126,
Wherein the waveguide is configured to transmit collimated light to the lenses. 126. The method of claim 126,
Further comprising a compensating lens layer to compensate for aggre- gate power of the lenses stacked in a direction facing the user eyes,
Wherein the compensation lens layer is stacked farthest from the user eye. 126. The method of claim 126,
Wherein the waveguide comprises a plurality of reflectors configurable to reflect rays of light injected into the waveguide toward the user eye. 126. The method of claim 126,
A waveguide is electro-active, a system for displaying virtual content to a user. 126. The method of claim 126,
A waveguide is switchable, the system for displaying virtual content to a user. 126. The method of claim 126,
Wherein the light rays having the first wavefront curvature and the light rays having the second wavefront curvature are simultaneously transmitted. 126. The method of claim 126,
Wherein the light rays having the first wavefront curvature and the light rays having the second wavefront curvature are sequentially transmitted. 136. The method of claim 134,
Wherein the second wavefront curvature corresponds to a margin of the first wavefront curvature, thereby providing a focal range that the user can adjust for perspective. 126. The method of claim 126,
Further comprising a perspective adjustment module for tracking a perspective adjustment of user eyes,
Wherein the VFE changes the focus of the light patterns based at least in part on the perspective adjustment of the user eyes. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
A light source for multiplexing one or more light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data;
A plurality of waveguides for receiving the one or more light patterns and directing light towards the exit pupil, the plurality of waveguides being stacked along a z-axis; And
And at least one optical element for modifying the focus of light transmitted by the plurality of waveguides. 136. The method of claim 138,
A waveguide of the plurality of waveguides includes a waveguide for dispersing the projected light over its length and an optical element for modifying the light in such a way that the wavefront curvature is generated,
Wherein the generated wavefront curvature corresponds to a focal plane when viewed by the user. 136. The method of claim 138,
Wherein a waveguide of the plurality of waveguides comprises a diffractive optical element (DOE). 136. The method of claim 138,
Wherein the DOE is switchable between on and off states. 136. The method of claim 138,
Wherein the at least one optical element comprises a refractive lens. 136. The method of claim 138,
Wherein the at least one optical lens comprises a Fresnel zone plate. 136. The method of claim 138,
Wherein a waveguide of the plurality of waveguides comprises a waveguide element. 144. The method of claim 144,
Wherein the waveguide is switchable between on and off states. 136. The method of claim 138,
A waveguide is a system for displaying static, virtual content to a user. 136. The method of claim 138,
Wherein a first frame of the image data and a second frame of the image data are simultaneously transmitted to a user's eye. 136. The method of claim 138,
Wherein the first frame of image data and the second frame of image data are sequentially transmitted to the user's eyes. 136. The method of claim 138,
Further comprising a plurality of angled reflectors for transmitting light to the user's eye,
Wherein the first waveguide component and the second waveguide component direct the light to one or more angled reflectors. 136. The method of claim 138,
Further comprising a beam-dispersing optical waveguide,
The beam-dispersing optical waveguide is coupled to the waveguide assembly,
Wherein the beam-dispersing optical waveguide is configured to diffuse the projected light across the waveguide assembly such that the light rays injected into the beam-dispersing optical waveguide are replicated and injected into the waveguide components of the waveguide assembly, Lt; / RTI > A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
An image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner;
An optical modulator for projecting light associated with one or more frames of the image data; And
And a waveguide assembly for receiving the projected light and delivering the light towards the user eye,
The waveguide assembly comprising a first waveguide component configurable to modify at least the light associated with a first frame of the image data to come from a first focal plane, And a second waveguide component configurable to modify the light so that associated light is recognized as coming from a second focal plane,
Wherein the first waveguide component and the second waveguide component are stacked along the z-axis in front of the user's eyes. 155. The method of claim 151,
Wherein the waveguide component of the waveguide assembly includes a waveguide for dispersing the projected light over its length and a lens for modifying the light in a manner that causes the wavefront curvature to be produced,
Wherein the generated wavefront curvature corresponds to a focal plane when viewed by the user. 155. The method of claim 151,
Wherein the waveguide component of the waveguide assembly comprises a diffractive optical element (DOE). 155. The method of claim 151,
Wherein the DOE is switchable between on and off states. 155. The method of claim 151,
Wherein the waveguide component of the waveguide assembly comprises a refractive lens. 155. The method of claim 151,
Wherein the waveguide component of the waveguide assembly comprises a Fresnel zone plate. 155. The method of claim 151,
Wherein the waveguide component of the waveguide assembly comprises a substrate guided optics (SGO) element. 155. The method of claim 151,
Wherein the waveguide is switchable between on and off states. 155. The method of claim 151,
A waveguide is a system for displaying static, virtual content to a user. 155. The method of claim 151,
Wherein a first frame of the image data and a second frame of the image data are simultaneously transmitted to a user's eye. 155. The method of claim 151,
Wherein the first frame of image data and the second frame of image data are sequentially transmitted to the user's eyes. 155. The method of claim 151,
Further comprising a plurality of angled reflectors for transmitting light to the user's eye,
Wherein the first waveguide component and the second waveguide component direct the light to one or more angled reflectors. 155. The method of claim 151,
Further comprising a beam-dispersing optical waveguide,
The beam-dispersing optical waveguide is coupled to the waveguide assembly,
Wherein the beam-dispersing optical waveguide is configured to diffuse the projected light across the waveguide assembly such that the light rays injected into the beam-dispersing optical waveguide are replicated and injected into the waveguide components of the waveguide assembly, Lt; / RTI > 155. The method of claim 151,
Wherein the waveguide component of the waveguide assembly comprises a reflector configurable to reflect the projected light at a desired angle towards the user's eye. 155. The method of claim 151,
Wherein the first waveguide component comprises a first reflector configured to reflect the projected light at a first angle,
Wherein the second waveguide component comprises a second reflector for reflecting the projected light at a second angle. 155. The method of claim 151,
Wherein the first reflector is staggered with respect to the second reflector thereby extending the view of the image when viewed by the user. 155. The method of claim 151,
Wherein the reflectors of the waveguide components are positioned in a manner to form a continuous curved reflective surface across the waveguide assembly. 169. The method of claim 167,
Wherein the continuous curved reflective surface comprises a parabolic curve. 169. The method of claim 167,
Wherein the continuous curved reflective surface comprises an elliptic curve. A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Transmitting rays of light associated with a first frame of image data to a user via a first waveguide, the rays having a first wavefront curvature; And
Transmitting the rays associated with a second frame of image data to the user through a second waveguide, the rays having a second wavefront curvature,
Wherein the first waveguide and the second waveguide are stacked along a z-axis facing the user's eyes. 172. The method of claim 170,
Wherein the first wavefront curvature and the second wavefront curvature are transmitted simultaneously. 172. The method of claim 170,
Wherein the first wavefront curvature and the second wavefront curvature are sequentially transmitted. 172. The method of claim 170,
Wherein the first and second wavefront curvatures are perceived by the user as first and second depth planes. 172. The method of claim 170,
Wherein the first and second waveguides are coupled to one or more optical elements. 172. The method of claim 173,
Further comprising compensating for the effect of one or more of the optical elements through a compensation lens. 172. The method of claim 170,
Determining a perspective adjustment of user eyes; And
Further comprising transmitting rays through at least one of the first and second waveguides based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment. A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Determining a perspective adjustment of user eyes;
Conveying light rays having a first wavefront curvature based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment through a first waveguide of a stack of waveguides, the first wavefront curvature corresponding to the determined focal length of the perspective adjustment; And
And transmitting rays of light having a second wavefront curvature through a second waveguide of the stack of waveguides,
Wherein the second wavefront curvature is associated with a predetermined margin of focal distance of the determined perspective adjustment. 179. The method of claim 177,
Wherein the margin is a positive margin. 179. The method of claim 177,
Wherein the margin is a negative margin. 179. The method of claim 177,
Wherein the second waveguide increases the focus range that the user can adjust for perspective. 179. The method of claim 177,
The first waveguide is coupled to a variable focus element (VFE)
Wherein the VFE changes the focus at which the waveguide focuses the rays. 190. The method of claim 181,
Wherein the focus is changed based at least in part on a determined perspective adjustment of the user's eyes. 179. The method of claim 177,
Wherein the first wavefront curvature and the second wavefront curvature are transmitted simultaneously. 179. The method of claim 177,
Wherein the first and second wavefront curvatures are perceived by the user as first and second depth planes. 179. The method of claim 177,
Wherein the waveguide is a diffractive optical element (DOE). 179. The method of claim 177,
Wherein the waveguide is a substrate guided optic (SGO). 179. The method of claim 177,
Wherein the first and second waveguides are switchable. 179. The method of claim 177,
Wherein the waveguide comprises one or more switchable elements. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
An image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner;
A display assembly for projecting light rays associated with one or more frames of the image data, the display assembly comprising a first display element corresponding to a first frame-rate and a first bit depth, and a second frame- And a second display element corresponding to a second bit depth; And
And a variable focus element (VFE) configurable to change the focus of the projected light and transmit the light to a user's eye. 189. The method of claim 189,
Wherein the first frame-rate is higher than the second frame-
Wherein the first bit depth is lower than the second bit depth. 189. The method of claim 189,
Wherein the first display element is a DLP projection system. 189. The method of claim 189,
Wherein the second display element is a liquid crystal display (LCD). 189. The method of claim 189,
Wherein the first display element projects light to a subset of the second display element so that the periphery of the LCD has a constant illumination. 193. The method of claim 193,
Wherein only the light transmitted from the first display element is focused through the VFE. 189. The method of claim 189,
Wherein the VFE is optically conjugated to the exit pupil to allow the focal point of the projected light to change without affecting the magnification of the image data. 189. The method of claim 189,
The first display element is a DLP,
The second display element is an LCD,
The DLP has a low resolution,
The LCD having a high resolution, for displaying to the user the virtual content. 189. The method of claim 189,
The intensity of the backlight is changed over time to match the brightness of the sub-images projected by the first display element, thereby increasing the frame rate of the first display element. A system for displaying. 189. The method of claim 189,
Wherein the VFE is configurable to change the focus of the projected light on a frame-by-frame basis. 189. The method of claim 189,
Further comprising software for compensating optical magnification associated with operation of the VFE. 189. The method of claim 189,
Wherein the image-generating source generates slices of a specific image that generate a three-dimensional volume of the object when projected together or sequentially. 189. The method of claim 189,
A system for displaying virtual content to a user, wherein the DLP is operated in a binary mode. 189. The method of claim 189,
The DLP is operated in grayscale mode, a system for displaying virtual content to a user. 189. The method of claim 189,
The VFE modifies the projected light so that the first frame is recognized as coming from the first focal plane and the second frame is seen coming from the second focal plane,
Wherein the first focal plane is different from the second focal plane. 189. The method of claim 189,
Wherein the focal distance associated with the focal plane is fixed. 189. The method of claim 189,
Wherein the focal distance associated with the focal plane is variable. A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Providing one or more image slices, wherein the first image slice and the second image slice of the one or more image slices represent a three-dimensional volume;
Projecting light associated with the first image slice through a spatial light modulator;
Focusing the first image slice through a variable focus element (VFE) to a first focus;
Transferring the first image slice having the first focus to the user;
Providing light associated with the second image slice;
Focusing the second image slice through the VFE to a second focus, the first focus being different from the second focus; And
And delivering the second image slice having the second focus to the user. 207. The method of claim 206,
Further comprising the step of determining a perspective adjustment of the user's eyes,
Wherein the VFE focuses the projected light based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment. 207. The method of claim 206,
Wherein the image slices are provided in a frame-sequential manner. 207. The method of claim 206,
Wherein the first image slice and the second image slice are transmitted simultaneously. 207. The method of claim 206,
Wherein the first image slice and the second image slice are sequentially transmitted. A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Combining the first display element with a second display element, the first display element corresponding to a high frame rate and a low bit depth, the second display element corresponding to a low frame rate and a high bit depth, The combined display elements corresponding to a high frame rate and a high bit depth;
Projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data through the combined display elements; And
Includes switching the focus of light projected through a variable focus element (VFE) on a frame-by-frame basis so that the first image slice is projected to a first focus and the second image slice is projected to a second focus And displaying the virtual content to a user. 213. The method of claim 211,
Wherein the first display element is a DLP. 213. The method of claim 211,
Wherein the second display element is an LCD. 213. The method of claim 211,
Wherein the first display element selectively illuminates portions of the second display element. 213. The method of claim 211,
Wherein the VFE is a deformable membrane mirror. 213. The method of claim 211,
Wherein the VFE is optically conjugated to an exit pupil. 213. The method of claim 211,
Wherein the VFE is not optically conjugate to the exit pupil. 213. The method of claim 211,
Wherein the first and second image slices represent a three-dimensional virtual object. 213. The method of claim 212,
Wherein the DLP operates in a binary mode. 213. The method of claim 212,
Wherein the DLP operates in a grayscale mode. 229. The method of claim 220,
Wherein the gray scale conveys to the user ' s brain the perception that something resides in two adjacent depth planes. 213. The method of claim 211,
Wherein the display elements are combined for image modulation. 213. The method of claim 211,
Wherein the display elements are combined to create a high dynamic range display. 213. The method of claim 211,
Wherein the VFE switches focal points between a predetermined number of fixed depth planes. 213. The method of claim 211,
Further comprising the step of determining a perspective adjustment of the user's eyes,
Wherein the VFE switches the focus based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
A plurality of light guides for receiving coherent light associated with one or more frames of image data and generating an aggregate wavefront;
A phase modulator coupled to the one or more light guides to induce a phase delay in light projected by one or more of the plurality of light guides; And
And a processor for controlling the phase modulator in a manner that causes the aggregate wavefront generated by the plurality of light guides to change. 229. The method of claim 226,
Wherein the wavefront generated by a light guide of the plurality of light guides is a spherical wavefront. 227. The method of claim 227,
Wherein the spherical wavefronts generated by the at least two light guides are destructively interfering with each other. 227. The method of claim 227,
Wherein the spherical wavefronts generated by the at least two light guides are destructively interfering with each other. 229. The method of claim 226,
Wherein the aggregate wavefront is a substantially planar wavefront. 230. The method of claim 230,
Wherein the planar wavefront corresponds to an optical infinite depth plane. 229. The method of claim 226,
Wherein the aggregate wavefront is spherical. 240. The method of claim 232,
Wherein the spherical wavefront corresponds to a depth plane that is closer than optical infinity. 240. The method of claim 232,
Wherein an inverse Fourier transform of the desired beam is injected into the multi-core fibers, thereby producing a desired aggregate wavefront. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
An image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data;
A multi-core assembly comprising a plurality of multi-core fibers for projecting light associated with one or more frames of the image data, wherein one of the plurality of multi-core fibers emits light at a wavefront , Whereby the multi-core assembly generates an aggregate wavefront of the projected light; And
Core fibers to change the aggregate wavefront emitted by the multi-core assembly, thereby changing the focal length at which the user recognizes one or more frames of the image data And a phase modulator for displaying the virtual content to the user. 240. The method of claim 235,
Wherein an inverse Fourier transform of the desired beam is injected into the multi-core fibers, thereby creating a desired aggregate wavefront. A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Emitting multi-core fibers, said multi-core fibers comprising a plurality of single core fibers, said single core fibers emitting spherical wavefronts;
Providing an aggregate wavefront from light emitted from the plurality of single core fibers; And
And inducing a phase delay between the single core fibers of the multi-core fibers to cause the aggregated wavefront generated by the multi-core fibers to change based at least in part on induced phase retardation. A method for displaying virtual content to a user. 237. The method of claim 237,
Wherein the aggregated wavefront is a flat wavefront. 240. The method of claim 238,
Wherein the planar wavefront corresponds to optical infinity. 237. The method of claim 237,
Wherein the aggregate wavefront is spherical. 241. The method of claim 240,
Wherein the spherical wavefront corresponds to a depth plane that is closer to optical infinity. 237. The method of claim 237,
Further comprising injecting an inverse Fourier transform of a desired wavefront into the multi-core fiber to make the aggregated wavefront correspond to a desired wavefront. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
An image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data;
A multi-core assembly including a plurality of multi-core fibers for projecting light associated with one or more frames of the image data; And
An image injector for inputting images to the multi-core assembly,
Wherein the input injector is further configurable to input an inverse Fourier transform of a desired wavefront into the multi-core assembly such that the multi-core assembly generates light associated with the image data at the desired wavefront, thereby outputting the inverse Fourier transform To allow the user to perceive the image data at a desired focal distance. 249. The method of claim 243,
Wherein the desired wavefront is associated with the hologram. 249. The method of claim 243,
Wherein the inverse Fourier transform is input to modulate the focus of one or more light beams. 249. The method of claim 243,
Wherein one of the plurality of multicore fibers is a multi-mode fiber. 249. The method of claim 243,
Wherein one of the plurality of multicore fibers is configured to propagate light along a plurality of paths along the one multicore fiber. 249. The method of claim 243,
Wherein the multicore fiber is a single core fiber. 249. The method of claim 243,
Wherein the multi-core fibers are concentric core fibers. 249. The method of claim 243,
Wherein the image injector is configured to input a wavelet pattern to the multi-core assembly. 249. The method of claim 243,
Wherein the image injector is configured to input a Zernike coefficient to the multi-core assembly. 249. The method of claim 243,
Further comprising a perspective adjustment tracking module for determining a perspective adjustment of user eyes,
Wherein the image injector is configured to input an inverse Fourier transform of a wavefront corresponding to a determined perspective adjustment of the user's eyes. A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Determining a perspective adjustment of the user eyes; determining a perspective adjustment associated with a focal length corresponding to a current focus state of the user;
Projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data through a waveguide;
Changing the focus of the projected light based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment; And
And delivering the projected light to the user's eyes. 259. The method of claim 253,
Wherein the perspective adjustment is directly measured. 259. The method of claim 253,
Wherein the perspective adjustment is indirectly measured. 254. The method of claim 254,
Wherein the perspective adjustment is measured via an infrared autorefractor. 254. The method of claim 254,
Wherein the perspective adjustment is measured through eccentric photorefraction. 255. The method of claim 255,
Further comprising measuring a convergence level of the two eyes of the user to estimate the perspective adjustment. 259. The method of claim 253,
Further comprising blurring one or more portions of one or more frames of the image data based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment. 259. The method of claim 253,
Wherein the focus is changed between fixed depth planes. 259. The method of claim 253,
Further comprising a compensation lens for compensating for the optical effect of the waveguide to make the external environment perceive as zero magnification. A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Determining a perspective adjustment of the user eyes; determining a perspective adjustment associated with a focal length corresponding to a current focus state of the user;
Projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data through a diffractive optics element (DOE);
Changing the focus of the projected light based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment; And
And delivering the projected light to the user's eyes. 264. The method of claim 262,
Wherein the perspective adjustment is directly measured. 264. The method of claim 262,
Wherein the perspective adjustment is indirectly measured. 26. The method of claim 263,
Wherein the perspective adjustment is measured via an infrared magnetic refraction medium. 26. The method of claim 263,
Wherein the perspective adjustment is measured through eccentric optical refraction. 264. The method of claim 264,
Further comprising measuring a convergence level of the two eyes of the user to estimate the perspective adjustment. 264. The method of claim 262,
Further comprising blurring one or more portions of one or more frames of the image data based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment. 264. The method of claim 262,
Wherein the focus is changed between fixed depth planes. 264. The method of claim 262,
Further comprising a compensation lens to compensate for the optical effect of the DOE to cause the external environment to be perceived as a zero magnification. A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Determining a perspective adjustment of the user eyes; determining a perspective adjustment associated with a focal length corresponding to a current focus state of the user;
Projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data through freeform optics;
Changing the focus of the projected light based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment; And
And delivering the projected light to the user's eyes. 27. The method of claim 271,
Wherein the perspective adjustment is directly measured. 27. The method of claim 271,
Wherein the perspective adjustment is indirectly measured. 274. The method of claim 272,
Wherein the perspective adjustment is measured via an infrared magnetic refraction medium. 274. The method of claim 272,
Wherein the perspective adjustment is measured through eccentric optical refraction. 273. The method of claim 273,
Further comprising measuring a convergence level of the two eyes of the user to estimate the perspective adjustment. 27. The method of claim 271,
Further comprising blurring one or more portions of one or more frames of the image data based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment. 27. The method of claim 271,
Wherein the focus is changed between fixed depth planes. 27. The method of claim 271,
Further comprising a compensation lens for compensating for the optical effect of the free-form optics to cause the external environment to be perceived as a zero magnification. A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Determining a perspective adjustment of the user eyes; determining a perspective adjustment associated with a focal length corresponding to a current focus state of the user;
Projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data;
Changing the focus of the projected light based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment; And
And transmitting the projected light to the user eyes to cause the projected light to be recognized by the user as coming from a focal distance corresponding to the current focal state of the user. / RTI > 29. The method of claim 280,
Wherein the light is transmitted to a user via a substrate guiding optical assembly. 29. The method of claim 280,
Wherein the light is transmitted to a user via a free-form optical element. 29. The method of claim 280,
Wherein the light is delivered to a user via a diffractive optical element (DOE). 29. The method of claim 280,
The light is projected through a stack of waveguides,
Wherein the first waveguide of the stack of waveguides is configured to output light to a specific wavefront and the second waveguide is configured to output a positive margin wavefront in relation to the particular wavefront and the third waveguide is configured to output a negative margin And outputting the wavefront. 29. The method of claim 280,
Further comprising the step of blurring the portion in such a way that a portion of one or more frames of the image data is out of focus when the projected light is transmitted to the user eyes. Lt; / RTI > A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
An image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner;
A light generator for providing light associated with one or more frames of the image data;
A perspective adjustment tracking module for tracking the user's eye perspective adjustment; And
And a waveguide assembly for changing the focus of light associated with one or more frames of the image data,
Wherein different frames of image data are focused differently based at least in part on tracked perspective adjustments. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
A perspective adjustment tracking module for determining a perspective adjustment of user eyes;
An image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner;
A light generator for projecting light associated with one or more frames of the image data;
A plurality of waveguides for receiving light rays associated with image data and for transmitting the light beams toward the user eyes, the plurality of waveguides being stacked in a direction facing the user eye; And
And a variable focus element (VFE) for changing the focus of transmitted light based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment of the user's eyes. 298. The method of claim 287,
Wherein one of the plurality of waveguides is a waveguide element,
Wherein the focal point of the first frame of the image data transmitted from the first one of the plurality of waveguides is different from the focal point of the second frame of the image data transmitted from the second one of the plurality of waveguides, For the system. 298. The method of claim 287,
Wherein the first frame is a first layer of a 3D scene and the second frame is a second layer of the 3D scene. 298. The method of claim 287,
Further comprising a blur module for blurring the portion in such a manner as to cause the portion of one or more frames of the image data to be out of focus when viewed by the user, For the system. 298. The method of claim 287,
Wherein the VFE is common to the plurality of waveguides. 298. The method of claim 287,
Wherein the VFE is associated with a waveguide of the plurality of waveguides. 298. The method of claim 287,
Wherein the VFE is coupled to a waveguide of the plurality of waveguides so that the VFE is interleaved between two of the plurality of waveguides. 298. The method of claim 287,
Wherein the VFE is embeded in a waveguide of the plurality of waveguides. 298. The method of claim 287,
Wherein the VFE is a diffractive optical element. 298. The method of claim 287,
Wherein the VFE is a refraction element. 298. The method of claim 287,
Wherein the VFE is a reflective element. 298. The method of claim 287,
A waveguide is electro-active, a system for displaying virtual content to a user. 298. The method of claim 287,
Wherein one or more of the plurality of waveguides are switched off. 298. The method of claim 287,
Wherein a waveguide of the plurality of waveguides corresponds to a fixed focal plane. 298. The method of claim 287,
Further comprising an exit pupil,
Wherein the diameter of the exit pupil is no greater than 0.5 mm. 298. The method of claim 287,
Wherein the light generator is a scanning fiber display. 302. The method of claim 301,
A system for displaying virtual content to a user, the system further comprising an array of exit pupils. 302. The method of claim 301,
Further comprising a plurality of optical generators,
Wherein the light generator is coupled to the exit pupil. 298. The method of claim 287,
Further comprising an exit pupil dilator, for displaying to the user the virtual content. 302. The method of claim 301,
Wherein the exit pupil is switchable based at least in part on a determined perspective adjustment of the user eyes. As a system,
A perspective adjustment tracking module for determining a perspective adjustment of user eyes;
A fiber scanning display for scanning a plurality of light beams associated with one or more frames of image data, a light beam of the plurality of light beams being movable; And
And blur software to render the simulated optical blur in one or more frames of the image data based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment of the user's eyes. 317. The method of claim 307,
Wherein the diameter of the light beams is not greater than 2 mm. 317. The method of claim 307,
Wherein the diameter of the light beams is not greater than 0.5 mm. 317. The method of claim 307,
Wherein the scanned light beam is duplicated to produce a plurality of exit pupils. 317. The method of claim 307,
Wherein the scanned light beam is duplicated to produce a larger eye box. 333. The method of claim 310,
Wherein the exit pupils are switchable. A method for displaying virtual content,
Determining a perspective adjustment of user eyes;
Scanning a plurality of light beams associated with one or more frames of image data through a fiber scanning display, the diameter of the light beam being such that the frames of the image data appear in focus when viewed by the user, Not greater than 0.5 mm; And
Blurring one or more portions of a frame through blur software based at least in part on determined determined perspective of the user's eyes. 313. The method of claim 313,
Wherein a plurality of exit pupils are generated. 313. The method of claim 313,
Wherein the light beam is generated by a single core fiber. 313. The method of claim 313,
Wherein the light beam is duplicated to produce a plurality of exit pupils. 316. The method of claim 316,
Wherein the exit pupils are switchable. A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Determining a position of a user's pupil with respect to a bundle of optical projectors, the bundle of optical projectors corresponding to a sub-image of an image to be provided to the user; And
Driving the light corresponding to the sub-image to a portion of the pupil of the user based on the determined position of the pupil of the user. 318. The method of claim 318,
Further comprising driving the light corresponding to another sub-image of the image to be provided to another portion of the pupil of the user through another bundle of light projectors. 318. The method of claim 318,
Further comprising mapping light projectors of one or more bundles of bundles of the fiber scanning display with one or more portions of the pupil of the user. 33. The method of claim 320,
Wherein the mapping is a 1: 1 mapping. 318. The method of claim 318,
Wherein the diameter of the light is not greater than 0.5 mm. 318. The method of claim 318,
Wherein the optical projectors of the bundle generate an aggregate wavefront. 318. The method of claim 318,
Wherein the beamlets produced by the light projectors form a discretized aggre- gation wavefront. 326. The method of claim 324,
And when the beamlets approach the user's eye at the same time, the eye deflects the beamlets to converge to the same spot on the retina. 318. The method of claim 318,
The user eye receives a super set of beamlets,
Wherein the beamlets correspond to a plurality of angles relating to the pupil. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
A light source for providing light associated with one or more frames of image data; And
And an optical display assembly for receiving light associated with one or more frames of the image data,
The optical display assembly corresponding to a plurality of exit pupils spaced apart from each other,
Wherein the plurality of exit pupils transmit light to the pupil of the user. 327. The method of claim 327,
Wherein the plurality of exit pupils are arranged in a hexagonal lattice. 327. The method of claim 327,
Wherein the plurality of exit pupils are arranged in a square lattice. 327. The method of claim 327,
Wherein the plurality of exit pupils are arranged in a two-dimensional array. 327. The method of claim 327,
Wherein the plurality of exit pupils are arranged in a three-dimensional array. 327. The method of claim 327,
Wherein the plurality of exit pupils are arranged in a time-varying array. A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Grouping a plurality of light projectors to form an exit pupil;
Driving a first light pattern through a first exit pupil to a first portion of a pupil of a user; And
Driving a second light pattern through a second exit pupil to a second portion of a pupil of a user,
Wherein the first light pattern and the second light pattern correspond to a sub-image of an image to be provided to a user,
Wherein the first light pattern is different from the second light pattern. 34. The method of claim 333,
Wherein the plurality of light projectors are arranged in a hexagonal grid. 34. The method of claim 333,
Wherein the plurality of light projectors are arranged in a square lattice. 34. The method of claim 333,
Wherein the plurality of light projectors are arranged in a two-dimensional array. 34. The method of claim 333,
Wherein the plurality of light projectors are arranged in a three-dimensional array. 34. The method of claim 333,
Wherein the plurality of light projectors are arranged in a time-varying array. 34. The method of claim 333,
Wherein the first portion of the pupil of the user only receives light from the first exit pupil,
Wherein the second portion of the pupil of the user only receives light from the second exit pupil. 34. The method of claim 333,
And generating a discrete aggregate wavefront. ≪ RTI ID = 0.0 > 11. < / RTI > A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Determining a position of the user's pupil relative to the optical display assembly; And
And calculating a focus for converging light into the pupil based at least in part on a limited eye box around the determined position of the pupil. 34. The method of claim 341,
Wherein the diameter of the light is not greater than 0.5 mm. 34. The method of claim 341,
And generating a discrete aggregate wavefront. ≪ RTI ID = 0.0 > 11. < / RTI > 34. The method of claim 343,
Further comprising agagating a plurality of discrete neighboring collimated light beams based at least in part on the center of the radius of curvature of the desired aggregate wavefront. 34. The method of claim 343,
Further comprising determining a perspective adjustment of the user eyes,
Wherein the focus is calculated based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment. 35. The method of claim 345,
Further comprising selecting an angular trajectory of light of the plurality of beamlets to produce an out-of-focus light beam. 34. The method of claim 341,
Wherein the plurality of beamlets represent pixels of image data to be provided to the user. 34. The method of claim 347,
Wherein the beamlets reach the eye at a plurality of incidence angles. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
An image generation source for providing one or more portions of an image to be provided to the user; And
And a plurality of micro projectors for projecting light associated with one or more portions of the image,
The microprojectors are positioned in a manner facing the pupil of the user,
One of the plurality of micro projectors is configured to project a set of rays representing a portion of the sub-image,
Wherein the set of rays is projected to a portion of the pupil of the user. 35. The method of claim 349,
Wherein the first portion of the pupil of the user receives rays from a plurality of micro projectors. 35. The method of claim 349,
Further comprising a reflective surface for reflecting light from the plurality of micro projectors to one or more portions of the pupil of the user. 35. The method of claim 349,
Wherein the reflective surface is positioned in a manner that allows the user to view the real world through the reflective surface. 35. The method of claim 349,
Wherein the diameter of the light is not greater than 0.5 mm. 35. The method of claim 349,
Further comprising generating a discrete aggregate wavefront. ≪ Desc / Clms Page number 19 > 35. The method of claim 349,
Further comprising agagating a plurality of discrete neighboring collimated light beams based at least in part on a center of curvature radius of the desired aggregate wavefront. 35. The method of claim 349,
Further comprising determining perspective adjustment of the user eyes,
Wherein the focus is calculated based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment. 35. The method of claim 349,
Further comprising selecting an angular trajectory of light of the plurality of beamlets to produce an out-of-focus light beam. 35. The method of claim 349,
Wherein the plurality of beamlets represent pixels of image data to be provided to the user. 35. The method of claim 350,
Wherein the beamlets reach the eye at a plurality of incidence angles. As a system,
A processor for determining a position of a pupil of a user; And
An array of spatial light modulators (SLMs) for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data,
Wherein the array of SLMs is positioned based at least in part on a determined location of the pupil of the user,
Wherein the array of SLMs generates a lightfield when viewed by the user. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
An image generation source for providing one or more frames of image data;
A first SLM (spatial light modulator) configured to selectively transmit light beams associated with one or more frames of the image data;
A second SLM positioned relative to the first SLM, the second SLM being further configured to selectively transmit light beams associated with one or more frames of the image data; And
And a processor for controlling the first and second SLMs in such a way that a light field is generated when the transmitted rays are viewed by the user. 370. The method of claim 360 or 361,
Further comprising a perspective adjustment tracking module for determining the perspective adjustment of the user's eyes. 370. The method of claim 360 or 361,
SLM is an LCD, a system for displaying virtual content to a user. 370. The method of claim 360 or 361,
The LCD is attenuated, a system for displaying virtual content to a user. 370. The method of claim 360 or 361,
Wherein the LCD rotates the polarization of the transmitted light. 370. The method of claim 360 or 361,
The SLM is a DMD, a system for displaying virtual content to a user. 370. The method of claim 360 or 361,
A DMD is coupled to one or more lenses, the system for displaying virtual content to a user. 370. The method of claim 360 or 361,
SLM is a MEMs array, a system for displaying virtual content to a user. 36. The method of claim 368,
Wherein the MEMs array comprises an array of sliding MEMs shutters. 36. The method of claim 368,
The MEMs array includes Pixtronics

A system for displaying virtual content to a user, the MEMs array. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
A plurality of optical fibers for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data to be provided to the user,
One of the plurality of optical fiber cores is coupled to the lens,
Wherein the lens is configured to change the diameter of the light beam projected by the scanning fibers,
Wherein the lens comprises a gradient index of refraction. 37. The method of claim 371,
Wherein the lens is a GRIN lens. 37. The method of claim 371,
Wherein the lens collimates the light beams. 37. The method of claim 371,
Further comprising an actuator coupled to the one of the plurality of optical fiber cores to scan the fiber. 374. The method of claim 374,
Wherein the actuator is a piezoelectric actuator. 37. The method of claim 371,
Wherein the end of the optical fiber core is polished at an angle to produce a lensing effect. 37. The method of claim 371,
Wherein the end of the optical fiber core is dissolved to produce a lengthening effect. A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data, the light being projected through a plurality of optical fiber cores;
Modifying light projected through the plurality of optical fiber cores through a lens, the lens being coupled to a tip of the plurality of optical fiber cores; And
And delivering the modified light to the user. 378. The method of claim 378,
Wherein the lens is a GRIN lens. 378. The method of claim 378,
Wherein the lens comprises a gradient index of refraction. 378. The method of claim 378,
Wherein the lens collimates light beams projected by the optical fiber cores. 378. The method of claim 378,
Wherein the lens is coupled to a plurality of optical fiber cores. 378. The method of claim 378,
Wherein the lens is coupled to a single optical fiber core. 378. The method of claim 378,
Wherein the one or more optical fiber cores comprise polished ends to produce a lengthening effect. 378. The method of claim 378,
Wherein one or more optical fiber cores are dissolved to produce a lengthening effect. A system for displaying virtual content,
A multi-core assembly comprising a plurality of fibers for multiplexing light associated with one or more frames of image data; And
For receiving the light patterns and for transmitting the light patterns so that the first viewing zone only receives light associated with the first portion of the image and the second viewing zone only receives light associated with the second portion of the image Including a waveguide,
Wherein the first and second viewing zones are no greater than 0.5 mm. 396. The apparatus of claim 386,
And blur software to blur one or more portions of frames of the image data. 396. The apparatus of claim 386,
Further comprising a perspective adjustment module for determining the perspective adjustment of the user's eyes. 396. The apparatus of claim 386,
Wherein the waveguide projects light directly to the user's eye without intermediate viewing optics. As a system,
A multi-core assembly comprising a plurality of fibers for multiplexing light associated with one or more frames of image data;
For receiving the light patterns and for receiving the light patterns so that the first viewing zone only receives light associated with the first portion of the image and the second viewing zone only receives light associated with the second portion of the image Waveguide, said first and second viewing zones not greater than 0.5 mm; And
And an optical assembly coupled to the waveguide for modifying the optical beams to be transmitted to the first and second viewing zones. 39. The method of claim 390,
Wherein the plurality of fibers project light into a single waveguide array. 39. The method of claim 390,
Wherein the multi-core assembly is scanned. 39. The method of claim 390,
Wherein a time-variable optical field is generated. 39. The method of claim 390,
Wherein the optical assembly is a DOE element. 39. The method of claim 390,
Wherein the optical assembly is an LC layer. As a method,
Projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data through a multi-core assembly, the multi-core assembly comprising a plurality of optical fiber cores; And
The first portion of the user's pupil receives the light associated with the first portion of the image and the second portion of the user's pupil receives the light associated with the second portion of the image, ≪ / RTI > 41. The method of claim 396,
Wherein the diameters of the first and second portions are not greater than 0.5 mm. 41. The method of claim 396,
Wherein the plurality of optical fiber cores project light into a single waveguide array. 41. The method of claim 396,
Wherein the multi-core assembly is scanned. 41. The method of claim 396,
Wherein the waveguide comprises a plurality of reflectors. 41. The method of claim 400,
Wherein the angles of the reflectors are variable. 41. The method of claim 396,
Further comprising a set of optics to modify light transmitted to the first and second viewing zones. 41. The method of claim 402,
Wherein the set of optics is a DOE element. 41. The method of claim 402,
Wherein the set of optics is free-running optics. 41. The method of claim 402,
Wherein the set of optics is an LC layer. As a system,
An array of microprojectors for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data to be presented to a user,
The array of microprojectors being positioned relative to the position of the pupil of the user,
Wherein the light is projected into the pupil of the user. 41. The method of claim 406,
Wherein the first and second light beams overlap. 41. The method of claim 406,
Wherein the first and second light beams are deflected based at least in part on a critical angle of the bundled fiber being polished. 41. The method of claim 406,
Wherein the polished bundled fibers are used to increase the resolution of the display. 41. The method of claim 406,
Wherein the bundled fibers being polished are used to create a bright field. As a system,
An array of microprojectors for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data to be presented to a user, the array of microprojectors being positioned relative to a position of a pupil of a user, Projected into the pupil; And
And an optical element coupled to the array of microprojectors for modifying light projected into the pupil of the user. As a system,
A plurality of multicore fibers for transmitting light beams, the plurality of beams coupled together; And
And a coupling element for bundling the plurality of multi-core fibers together,
The bundle of multi-core fibers is configured such that a first light beam transmitted from a first fiber of bundled fibers has a first path length and a second light beam transmitted from a second fiber of bundled fibers has a second path length Wherein the first path length is different from the second path length in such a way that the first light beam is out of phase with respect to the second light beam, , system. 411. The method of claim 411 or 412,
Wherein the first and second light beams overlap. 411. The method of claim 411 or 412,
Wherein the first and second light beams are deflected based at least in part on a critical angle of the bundled fiber being polished. 411. The method of claim 411 or 412,
Wherein the polished bundled fibers are used to increase the resolution of the display. 411. The method of claim 411 or 412,
Wherein the bundled fibers being polished are used to create a bright field. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
An image-generating source for providing one or more frames of image data;
A plurality of optical fiber cores for transmitting light beams associated with one or more frames of the image data; And
An optical element coupled to the plurality of optical fiber cores to receive collimated light from the optical fiber cores and to transmit the light beams to a user's eye,
The light beams are incident on the user's eye at a plurality of angles, such that the first light beam is transmitted to a portion of the user's eye at a first angle and the second light beam is transmitted to the same portion of the user's eye at a second angle, Lt; / RTI >
Wherein the first angle is different from the second angle. 41. The method of claim 417,
Wherein the optical element is a waveguide. 41. The method of claim 417,
Further comprising a phase modulator for modulating the transmission of light through the optical fiber cores. As a method,
Providing one or more frames of image data;
Transmitting light beams associated with one or more frames of the image data through a plurality of optical fiber cores; And
And transmitting the light beams to user eyes at a plurality of angles. 43. The method of claim 420,
Further comprising modulating a phase delay of the plurality of optical fiber cores. 43. The method of claim 420,
And coupling the optical element to the plurality of optical fiber cores. 42. The method of claim 422,
Wherein the optical element is a waveguide. 42. The method of claim 422,
Wherein the optical element is free-running optics. 42. The method of claim 422,
Wherein the optical element is a DOE. 42. The method of claim 422,
Wherein the optical element is SGO. As a virtual reality display system,
A plurality of optical fiber cores for generating light beams associated with one or more images to be presented to a user; And
And a plurality of phase modulators coupled to the plurality of optical fiber cores for modulating the light beams,
Wherein the plurality of phase modulators modulate light in a manner that affects a resulting wavefront of a plurality of light beams. 42. The method of claim 427,
Wherein one or more of the optical fiber cores are deflected at one or more angles. 42. The method of claim 427,
Wherein one of the plurality of optical fiber cores is coupled to a GRIN lens. 42. The method of claim 427,
Wherein the plurality of optical fiber cores are physically actuated to scan the optical fiber cores. As a method,
Providing one or more frames of image data to be provided to a user;
Projecting light associated with one or more frames of the image data through a plurality of optical fiber cores; And
Modulating light projected by the plurality of optical fiber cores through a plurality of phase modulators in a manner that affects an aggregate wavefront generated by the plurality of optical fiber cores. 43. The method of claim 431,
Wherein light projected by one or more optical fiber cores is deflected at one or more angles. 43. The method of claim 431,
Wherein one or more optical fiber cores are coupled to the GRIN lens. 43. The method of claim 431,
Further comprising scanning the optical light beams,
Wherein the plurality of optical fiber cores are physically actuated to scan the optical fiber cores. A system for displaying virtual content,
An array of optical fiber cores for transmitting light beams associated with an image to be presented to a user; And
And a lens coupled to the array of optical fiber cores for deflecting a plurality of light beams output by the array of optical fiber cores through a single nodal point,
Wherein the lens is physically attached to the optical fiber cores so that movement of the optical fiber core causes the lens to move,
Wherein the single nodal point is scanned. 53. The method of claim 435,
Wherein the light beams output by the array of optical fiber cores represent pixels of an image to be provided to the user. 53. The method of claim 435,
Wherein the lens is a GRIN lens. 53. The method of claim 435,
Wherein the array of optical fiber cores is used to display a bright field. 53. The method of claim 435,
Wherein another set of light beams output by another array of optical fiber cores represents another pixel of an image to be provided to the user. 53. The method of claim 435,
Wherein a plurality of arrays of optical fiber cores are coupled to represent pixels of an image to be provided to the user. 53. The method of claim 435,
Wherein the plurality of arrays of optical fiber cores are configured to transmit light beams to a predetermined portion of the user ' s pupil. 53. The method of claim 435,
Wherein the output light beams are diverging. 53. The method of claim 435,
Wherein the output light beams are converging. 53. The method of claim 435,
Wherein the aperture number of the output light beams is increased with respect to the light beams transmitted by the individual optical fiber cores. 444. The method of claim 444,
Wherein the increased aperture number allows higher resolution. 53. The method of claim 435,
The array of optical fiber cores are arranged such that the path length of the first light beam traveling through the first optical fiber is different from the path length of the second light beam traveling through the second optical fiber, Wherein the focal lengths of the first and second focal lengths are allowed. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
An array of optical fiber cores for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data, the one or more optical fiber cores of the array of optical fiber cores having an angle that causes the projected light to deflect The polished and polished angle causes path length differences between the first and second optical fiber cores of the array of optical fiber cores relative to the optical element; And
And a light scanner for receiving the deflected light beams and for scanning the deflected light beams onto at least one axis. A system for providing at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience to a user,
frame;
An array of microprojectors carried by the frame and capable of being positioned in front of at least one eye of the user when the frame is worn by the user; And
And a local controller communicatively coupled to the array of microprojectors to provide image information to the microprojectors,
Wherein the local controller comprises at least one processor and at least one non-volatile processor readable medium communicatively coupled to the at least one processor,
Wherein the at least one non-volatile processor readable medium, when executed by the at least one processor, causes the at least one processor to perform at least one of processing, caching, and storing data, At least one of processor-executable instructions or data that causes the microprojectors to provide image information to generate at least one of a real-world experience, a virtual or augmented reality experience for the user, system. 454. The method of claim 448,
Further comprising at least one reflector supported by the frame and oriented to direct light from the microprojectors towards at least one eye of the user when the frame is worn by the user. A system for providing at least one of augmented reality experience. 454. The method of claim 448,
Wherein the microprojectors comprise an individual scanning fiber display of a plurality of scanning fiber displays, wherein the microprojectors provide the user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 454. The method of claim 448,
Wherein each of the scanning fiber displays has an individual collimating lens at its distal tip, the system providing at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience to a user. 454. The method of claim 448,
Wherein the individual collimating lens is a gradient refractive index (GRIN) lens to provide the user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 454. The method of claim 448,
Wherein the individual collimating lens is a curvilinear lens, wherein the system is configured to provide at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience to a user. 454. The method of claim 448,
Wherein the discrete collimating lens is fused to a distal tip of an individual scanning fiber display to provide the user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 454. The method of claim 448,
Wherein the scanning fiber display has an individual diffractive lens at its distal tip, the system providing at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience to a user. 454. The method of claim 448,
Wherein each of the scanning fiber displays has an individual disperser on its distal tip, the system providing the user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 46. The method of claim 456,
Wherein the disperser is etched with an individual distal tip, the system providing the user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 454. The method of claim 448,
Each of the scanning fiber displays has an individual lens at its distal tip,
Wherein the lens extends from the distal tip a distance sufficient to oscillate freely in response to a stimulus, the system providing a user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 454. The method of claim 448,
Each of the scanning fiber displays has a separate reflector on its distal tip,
Wherein the reflector extends from the distal tip a distance sufficient to oscillate freely in response to a stimulus, the user being provided with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 459. The method of claim 459,
Wherein each of the scanning fiber displays comprises an individual single mode optical fiber, wherein the system provides the user with at least one of virtual or augmented reality experience. 459. The method of claim 459,
Wherein each of the scanning fiber displays comprises an individual machine transducer coupled to move at least a distal tip of the single mode optical fiber to provide at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience to the user. 46. The method of claim 461,
Wherein the discrete mechanical transducers are respective piezoelectric actuators, the system providing at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience to a user. 454. The method of claim 460,
Each of the single mode optical fiber cores has a distal tip,
Wherein the distal tips have a hemispherical lens shape, and provide the user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 454. The method of claim 460,
Each of the single mode optical fiber cores has a distal tip,
Wherein the distal tips have a refracting lens attached to them, the system providing the user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 454. The method of claim 460,
A system for providing at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience to a user, the system further comprising a transparent holder substrate for holding a plurality of single mode optical fiber cores together. 454. The method of claim 460,
Wherein the transparent holder substrate has a refractive index that at least approximately matches the refractive index of the cladding of the single mode optical fiber cores to provide a user with at least one of virtual or augmented reality experience. 454. The method of claim 460,
Wherein the transparent holder substrate holds a plurality of single mode optical fiber cores each angled toward a common spot, the system providing a user with at least one of virtual or augmented reality experience. 454. The method of claim 460,
Further comprising at least one machine transducer coupled to move a plurality of single mode optical fiber cores together. ≪ Desc / Clms Page number 17 > 454. The method of claim 448,
At least one mechanical transducer vibrates the plurality of single mode optical fiber cores at a machine resonant frequency of the plurality of single mode optical fiber cores,
Wherein portions of the plurality of single mode optical fiber cores are cantilevered out of the transparent holder substrate to provide the user with at least one of virtual or augmented reality experience. 454. The method of claim 448,
Wherein the macro projectors comprise individual waveguides of a plurality of planar waveguides,
Wherein a portion of each of the planar waveguides extends cantilevered from the holder substrate to provide a user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 454. The method of claim 470,
Further comprising at least one machine transducer coupled to move the plurality of planar waveguides together. ≪ Desc / Clms Page number 17 > 47. The method of claim 471,
Wherein the at least one mechanical transducer oscillates the holder substrate at a machine resonant frequency of the planar waveguides. 47. The method of claim 471,
Wherein the microprojectors comprise piezoelectric actuators of a plurality of piezoelectric actuators coupled to move a respective waveguide of the planar waveguides relative to a holder substrate. 47. The method of claim 471,
Each of the planar waveguides defining an internal total internal reflection path along a respective length of the planar waveguide,
Wherein the planar waveguides comprise individual DOEs of a plurality of electronically switchable diffractive optical elements operable to propagate light out of a respective total internal reflection path to provide a user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience system. 454. The method of claim 448,
Wherein the array of microprojectors comprises an array of optical fiber cores,
Each of the optical fiber cores having a distal tip and at least one beveled edge, the system providing the user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 48. The method of claim 475,
Wherein the at least one beveled edge is at a distal tip,
Wherein the distal tip is a polished distal tip, the user being provided with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 49. The method of claim 476,
Each of the optical fiber cores having a reflective surface at a respective distal tip thereof, for providing a user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 48. The method of claim 477,
Wherein the distal tip has an output edge at a distal tip at a critical angle defined for the longitudinal axis of the discrete optical fibers. 49. The method of claim 478,
Wherein the defined critical angle is about forty-five (45) degrees with respect to the longitudinal axis of the discrete optical fibers, to provide a user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 454. The method of claim 448,
Further comprising a focusing lens for receiving a plurality of beams of light in an optical path of light exiting distal ends of the optical fiber cores,
Wherein the beams are mutually offset, providing a user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 454. The method of claim 448,
Further comprising at least one transducer coupled to move at least one of the optical fiber cores in an XY Cartesian coordinate system to move light emitted by the at least one optical fiber in an XZ Cartesian coordinate system. A system for providing at least one of augmented reality experience. 454. The method of claim 448,
Wherein the at least one transducer is a first piezoelectric actuator that resonates a cantilevered portion of the optical fiber cores in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the cantilevered portions extend. 49. The method of claim 482,
Wherein the optical fiber cores include thin ribbons of optical fiber cores, to provide a user with at least one of virtual or augmented reality experience. 49. The method of claim 481,
Wherein the at least one transducer is a second piezoelectric actuator for moving at least a cantilevered portion of the optical fiber cores in a longitudinal direction in a direction in which the portions to be cantilevered extend to provide the user with at least one of virtual or augmented reality experience system. 49. The method of claim 484,
Wherein the microprojectors comprise at least one single axis mirror operable to provide a slow scan along a longitudinal axis of at least one of the optical fiber cores. 454. The method of claim 448,
Wherein the array of optical fiber cores comprises multi-core fibers, the system providing at least one of virtual or augmented reality experience to a user. 49. The method of claim 486,
Wherein the multi-core fibers comprise a plurality of - approximately seven-elastically positioned clusters in a single conduit,
Each cluster comprising three optical fiber cores,
Wherein each optical fiber is for carrying individual colors of three different colors of light. ≪ Desc / Clms Page number 13 > 49. The method of claim 486,
Said multi-core fibers comprising a plurality of - approximately 19 - resiliently located clusters in a single conduit,
Each cluster comprising three optical fiber cores,
Wherein each optical fiber is for carrying individual colors of three different colors of light to create a triad of overlapping spots of three different colors, For the system. 49. The method of claim 486,
Wherein the multi-core fibers comprise at least one cluster in a single conduit,
The cluster comprising at least three optical fiber cores,
Wherein each of the optical fiber cores is for carrying at least two different colors of light. 49. The method of claim 489,
Wherein the multi-core fibers comprise at least one cluster in a single conduit,
Said at least one cluster comprising four optical fiber cores,
Each optical fiber is intended to carry individual colors of four different colors of light,
Wherein the color of one of the four colors is infrared or nearly infrared. 49. The method of claim 489,
Wherein the multi-core fibers comprise a plurality of cores of rigid bundle,
The system further comprising at least one transducer coupled to move the cores in a spiral pattern in a spiral pattern, wherein the system provides the user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 48. The method of claim 475,
Wherein the at least one beveled edge is spaced inwardly from a distal tip, the user being provided with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 48. The method of claim 475,
Wherein the at least one beveled edge is polished, the user being provided with a virtual or augmented reality experience. 49. The method of claim 493,
Further comprising at least one transducer coupled to move at least one of the optical fiber cores in an XY Cartesian coordinate system to move light emitted by the at least one optical fiber in an XZ Cartesian coordinate system. A system for providing at least one of augmented reality experience. 49. The method of claim 492,
Further comprising a focusing lens for receiving a plurality of beams of light in an optical path of light exiting beveled edges of optical fiber cores,
Wherein the beams are mutually offset, providing a user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 49. The method of claim 482,
laser;
A system for providing at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience to a user, the system further comprising at least one phase modulator for optically coupling the output of the laser to a plurality of cores of multi-core fibers to obtain mutual coherence . 49. The method of claim 496,
A lenslet array optically coupled to an upstream of an input end of each of the plurality of cores of the multi-core fiber; And
Further comprising a prism array optically coupled between an input end of the cores of the multi-core fibers and a plurality of collimating lenses for deflecting light from the lenslet array into cores of the multi- Or augmented reality experience. 49. The method of claim 497,
A lenslet array optically coupled to an upstream of an input end of each of the plurality of cores of the multi-core fiber; And
Further comprising a shared focusing lens optically coupled between the input end of the cores of the multi-core fibers and the lenslet array for deflecting light from the lenslet array into cores of the multi-core fiber Virtual < RTI ID = 0.0 > and / or < / RTI > augmented reality experience. 48. The method of claim 475,
The array of microprojectors further comprising at least one reflector,
Wherein the at least one reflector is operable to generate a scan pattern and is optically coupled to an array of optical fiber cores, wherein the at least one reflector is operable to generate a scan pattern. The method of claim 499,
Wherein the at least one reflector provides at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience to a user operable to generate at least one of a raster scan pattern, a Lissajous scan pattern, or a spiral scan pattern of a multi-focus beam ≪ / RTI > 48. The method of claim 475,
Wherein each core of the multi-core fibers addresses a respective portion of an image plane without overlap, the system providing at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience to a user. 48. The method of claim 475,
Wherein each core of the multicore fiber addresses a respective portion of an image plane with no substantial overlap, the system providing at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience to a user. A system for displaying virtual content,
An image-source for providing one or more frames of image data to be provided to a user;
An optical scanning display, the optical scanning display comprising a plurality of fibers for projecting light associated with one or more frames of the image data, the plurality of fibers being scanned using an actuator; And
And a processor for controlling the fiber scanning display in such a way that a bright field is provided to the user. 53. The method of claim 503,
Wherein the actuator is shared between all fibers of the fiber scanning display. 53. The method of claim 503,
Each fiber having its own individual actuator. 504. The method of claim 504,
Wherein the plurality of fibers are mechanically coupled by a grating to allow the plurality of fibers to move together. 53. The method of claim 506,
Wherein the grid is a graphene plane. 53. The method of claim 506,
Wherein the grid is a lightweight brace. A system for providing at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience to a user,
frame;
A display system carried by the frame and capable of being positioned in front of at least one eye of the user when the frame is worn by the user; And
And a local controller communicatively coupled to the display system for providing image information to the display system,
Wherein the local controller comprises at least one processor and at least one non-volatile processor readable medium communicatively coupled to the at least one processor,
Wherein the at least one non-volatile processor readable medium, when executed by the at least one processor, causes the at least one processor to perform at least one of processing, caching, and storing data, And at least one of processor-executable instructions or data that causes the display to provide image information to generate at least one of the real-visible experience. 509. The method of claim 509,
The display includes at least one wedge-shaped waveguide,
The wedge-shaped waveguide has at least two planar surfaces and a length opposite to each other over the thickness of the first wedge-shaped waveguide,
The light entering the wedge-shaped waveguide along the length at the defined angles through the entrance portion of the wedge-shaped waveguide propagates through the total internal reflection,
Wherein the thickness of the wedge-shaped waveguide linearly varies along the length of the wedge-shaped waveguide. 53. The method of claim 510,
Wherein the wedge-shaped waveguide provides bimodal internal total reflection, wherein the wedge-shaped waveguide provides bimodal internal total reflection to the user. 509. The method of claim 509,
Further comprising at least two projectors optically coupled to the wedge-shaped waveguide at discrete different locations along an entrance portion of the wedge-shaped waveguide to provide at least one of a user with a virtual or augmented reality experience. 509. The method of claim 509,
Further comprising a first linear array of a plurality of projectors optically coupled to the wedge-shaped waveguide at discrete different locations along an inlet portion of the wedge-shaped waveguide to provide the user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience ≪ / RTI > 53. The method of claim 513,
Wherein the projectors of the first linear array of the plurality of projectors are scanning fiber displays, the user being provided with at least one of virtual or augmented reality experience. 509. The method of claim 509,
Further comprising a stack of a plurality of spatial light modulators optically coupled to the wedge-shaped waveguide along an inlet portion of the wedge-shaped waveguide. 509. The method of claim 509,
Further comprising a multi-core optical fiber optically coupled to the wedge-shaped waveguide at one or more locations along an inlet portion of the wedge-shaped waveguide to provide the user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience For the system. 509. The method of claim 509,
Projectors of a first linear array of projectors are optically coupled to the wedge-shaped waveguide to inject light into the wedge-shaped waveguide at a first angle,
The system further includes a second linear array of a plurality of projectors optically coupled to the wedge-shaped waveguide at discrete different locations along an inlet portion of the wedge-shaped waveguide,
The projectors of the second linear array of projectors are optically coupled to the wedge-shaped waveguide for injecting light into the wedge-shaped waveguide at a second angle,
Wherein the second angle is different from the first angle, wherein the second angle is different from the first angle. 509. The method of claim 509,
Wherein the inlet portion is a longitudinal end of the wedge-shaped waveguide, the user being provided with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 509. The method of claim 509,
Wherein the inlet portion is a lateral edge of the wedge-shaped waveguide. 509. The method of claim 509,
Wherein the inlet portion is one of planar surfaces of the wedge-shaped waveguide, to provide a user with at least one of a virtual or augmented reality experience. 509. The method of claim 509,
Further comprising at least one optical component optically coupled to the projector,
Wherein said at least one optical component changes the angle of light received from said projector to optically couple light into said wedge-shaped waveguide at angles to obtain total internal total of light within said wedge-shaped waveguide. Or augmented reality experience. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
An array of microprojectors for projecting light beams associated with one or more frames of image data to be provided to the user, the microprojector being movable relative to one or more microprojectors of the array of microprojectors Configurable to -;
A frame for housing an array of microprojectors; And
Transmitting one or more light beams transmitted from the one or more projectors to the user by modulating them as a function of the position of the one or more microprojectors relative to the array of microprojectors A processor operatively coupled to one or more microprojectors of the array of microprojectors to control the one or more light beams in a manner that enables virtual content to be displayed System for 53. The method of claim 522,
Wherein one microprojector of the array of microprojectors is coupled to the lens. 53. The method of claim 522,
Wherein the array of microprojectors is arranged in a manner that is based on a desired resolution of the image to be provided to the user. 53. The method of claim 522,
Wherein the array of microprojectors is arranged based on a desired field of view. 53. The method of claim 522,
Wherein the light beams of the plurality of micro projectors overlap. 53. The method of claim 522,
Further comprising an actuator,
The actuator is coupled to one or more microprojectors,
Wherein the actuator is configurable to move the one or more micro projectors. 53. The method of claim 522,
Wherein the actuator is coupled to a plurality of micro projectors. 53. The method of claim 522,
Wherein the actuator is coupled to a single microprojector. 53. The method of claim 522,
Wherein one microprojector of the array of microprojectors is mechanically coupled to the grid. 53. The method of claim 530,
Wherein the grid is a graphen sheet. 53. The method of claim 530,
Wherein the grid is a matrix of carbon nanotubes. 53. The method of claim 522,
Wherein the plurality of micro projectors are cut through the laser cutting device so that all of the plurality of micro projectors have the same cantilevered length. A contact lens for interfacing with a cornea of a user's eye of a virtual or augmented reality display,
A semi-hemispherical substrate and a selective filter,
Wherein the selective filter is configured to selectively pass light beams to the user's eye. 534. The method of claim 534,
Wherein the selective filter is a notch filter. 534. The method of claim 534,
Wherein the notch filter substantially blocks wavelengths of approximately 450 nm (maximum blue) and substantially passes other wavelengths of the visible portion of the electromagnetic spectrum. 534. The method of claim 534,
Wherein the notch filter substantially blocks wavelengths (green) of approximately 530 nm and substantially passes other wavelengths of visible portions of the electromagnetic spectrum. 534. The method of claim 534,
Wherein the notch filter substantially blocks wavelengths of approximately 650 nm and substantially passes other wavelengths of visible portions of the electromagnetic spectrum. 53. The method of claim 538,
Wherein the notch filter comprises a plurality of layers of dielectric material carried by the substrate. 53. The method of claim 538,
Wherein the filter has a pinhole opening with a diameter of less than 1.5 mm. 535. The method of claim 540,
Wherein the pinhole opening permits light beams of a plurality of wavelengths to pass through. 53. The method of claim 538,
Wherein the size of the pinhole is varied at least partially based on a desired depth of focus of the display. 53. The method of claim 538,
And further comprising a plurality of modes of operation. 53. The method of claim 538,
Further comprising a multi-depth focus display configuration of the virtual content. 53. The method of claim 538,
Further comprising a perspective adjustment tracking module to determine a perspective adjustment of the user's eye. 53. The method of claim 538,
Wherein the focus depth of a particular display object is changed based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment. 53. The method of claim 538,
The image is relayed through the waveguide,
The relayed image is associated with a particular depth of focus. A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Providing one or more frames of image data to be provided to a user;
Projecting light associated with one or more frames of the image data; And
Receiving the projected light through a partially hemispherical substrate coupled to the user ' s pupil, and selectively filtering out light beams to the user ' s pupil. 54. The method of claim 548,
Wherein the light is filtered through a notch filter. 53. The method of claim 549,
Wherein the notch filter substantially blocks wavelengths (maximum blue) of approximately 450 nm and substantially passes other wavelengths of visible portions of the electromagnetic spectrum. 53. The method of claim 549,
Wherein the notch filter substantially blocks wavelengths (green) of approximately 530 nm and substantially passes other wavelengths of visible portions of the electromagnetic spectrum. 53. The method of claim 549,
Wherein the notch filter substantially blocks wavelengths of approximately 650 nm and substantially passes other wavelengths of visible portions of the electromagnetic spectrum. 53. The method of claim 549,
Wherein the notch filter comprises a plurality of layers of dielectric material carried by the substrate. 53. The method of claim 549,
Wherein the filter has a pinhole opening diameter of less than 1.5 mm. 554. The method of claim 554,
Wherein the pinhole opening permits light beams of a plurality of wavelengths to pass through. 554. The method of claim 554,
Wherein the size of the pinhole is modified based at least in part on a desired depth of focus of the display. 54. The method of claim 548,
Wherein the partially hemispherical substrate is a contact lens. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
A light projection system for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data to user eyes, the light projection system being configured to project light corresponding to a plurality of pixels associated with the image data; And
And a processor for modulating a focus depth of the plurality of pixels displayed to the user. 55. The method of claim 558,
Wherein the focus depth is spatially modulated. 55. The method of claim 558,
Wherein the focus depth is modulated over time. 55. The method of claim 558,
Further comprising an image-generating source for providing one or more frames of the image data in a time-sequential manner. 55. The method of claim 558,
Wherein the focus depth is modulated on a frame-by-frame basis. 55. The method of claim 558,
The optical projection system comprising a plurality of optical fiber cores,
Wherein the focus depth is selected such that a portion of the plurality of optical fiber cores is associated with a first focus depth and another portion of the plurality of optical fiber cores is associated with a second focus depth, Modulated,
Wherein the first focus depth is different from the second focus depth. 55. The method of claim 558,
A first display object of a particular frame is displayed through a first focus depth,
A second display object of the particular frame is displayed through a second focus depth,
Wherein the first focus depth is different from the second focus depth. 55. The method of claim 558,
A first pixel of a particular frame is associated with a first focus depth,
A second pixel of the particular frame is associated with a second focus depth,
Wherein the first focus depth is different from the second focus depth. 55. The method of claim 558,
Further comprising a perspective adjustment tracking module for determining a perspective adjustment of the user eyes,
Wherein the focus depth is modulated based at least in part on the determined perspective adjustment. 57. The method of claim 566,
Wherein the pattern of light generation associated with the light generating system is dynamically dependent on the determined perspective adjustment. 55. The method of claim 567,
Wherein the pattern is a scanning pattern of a plurality of optical fiber cores. 55. The method of claim 558,
Further comprising a blur module for blurring one or more portions of the image data,
Wherein the blur is generated to facilitate switching between a first scan pattern and a second scan pattern or a transition from a first resolution scan pitch to a second resolution scan pitch. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
A light projection system for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data to user eyes, the light projection system being configured to project light corresponding to a plurality of pixels associated with the image data; And
And a processor for modulating the size of the plurality of pixels displayed to the user. 535. The method of claim 570,
Wherein the light projection system is a fiber scanning display. 58. The method of claim 571,
Wherein the projected light is displayed through a scanning pattern. 535. The method of claim 570,
Wherein the processor modulates the size of a particular pixel based at least in part on the type of scanning pattern. 535. The method of claim 570,
Wherein the size of one or more pixels can be modulated based at least in part on a distance between scan lines of a scanning pattern. 535. The method of claim 570,
Wherein the size of the first pixel is different from the size of the second pixel of the same frame. A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data, wherein one or more of the light beams of the projected light corresponds to one or more of the pixels, -; And
And modulating the size of the one or more pixels displayed to the user. 58. The method of claim 576,
Wherein the size of a particular pixel is changed based at least in part on a scanning pattern of the fiber scanning display. 58. The method of claim 577,
Wherein the size of the one or more pixels is modulated based at least in part on a distance between scan lines of the scanning pattern. 58. The method of claim 578,
Wherein the size of the one or more pixels is variable. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
A display system for delivering light associated with one or more frames of image data, the display system comprising a plurality of pixels, the display system scanning light having a variable line pitch;
A blur module for variably blurring one or more of the plurality of pixels to modify the size of one or more pixels; And
And a processor for controlling the blur module in such a manner that the pixel size is changed based at least in part on the line pitch of the display system. 535. The method of claim 580,
Wherein the display system is a fiber scanning system. 535. The method of claim 580,
Wherein the pixel size is increased. 535. The method of claim 580,
Wherein the pixel size is reduced. 535. The method of claim 580,
Wherein the pitch line is sparse, the system for displaying virtual content to a user. 535. The method of claim 580,
Wherein the pitch line is dense, and wherein the pitch line is dense. A method for displaying virtual content to a user,
Projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data to be presented to the user using optical see-through viewing optics that allow the user to view the outside world through the viewing optics ; And
Selectively attenuating at least a portion of the light from the outside world that will pass through the viewing optics on its way to the user's eye to allow some light from the outside world to pass through the viewing optics to reach the user's eyes And displaying the virtual content to a user. 58. The method of claim 586,
Wherein the light beam is selectively attenuated based at least in part on an angle of incidence of the light beam. 58. The method of claim 586,
Wherein different portions of the frame are attenuated to different quantities. 58. The method of claim 586,
Wherein the focus level of the attenuated light beams is changed. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
An image generation source for providing one or more frames of image data;
A stack of two or more spatial light modulators, wherein the stack is positioned to cause the stack to communicate light associated with one or more frames of the image data to the user, Spatially attenuating; And
And a processor for controlling the stack of SLMs in such a way that the angle at which light beams pass through one or more cells of the SLM is modulated. 65. The method of claim 590,
Further comprising a set of display optics,
Wherein the set of display optics is positioned between a user's eye and the external environment. 65. The method of claim 590,
Wherein the SLMs of the stacks of SLMs are cholesteric LCDs. 65. The method of claim 590,
Wherein at least one of the SLMs is a cholesteric LCD. 65. The method of claim 590,
The stack of SLMs is positioned so that a user views the outside world through the stack of SLMs,
Wherein the SLMs are at least translucent. 65. The method of claim 590,
The spatial light modulator arrays include at least one of a plurality of liquid crystal arrays, a plurality of digital mirror device elements of digital optical processing systems, a plurality of micro-electro-mechanical system (MEMS) arrays, or a plurality of MEMS shutters. A system for displaying virtual content to a user. 65. The method of claim 590,
Further comprising a shield comprising at least one optical component,
Wherein the processor controls at least one optical component of the visor to produce a dark field representation of the dark virtual object. A system for displaying virtual content,
An array of spatial light modulators, the array of spatial light modulators being configured to generate light patterns, the array of spatial light modulators comprising at least two modulators; And
A processor for controlling the array of spatial modulators in such a way that at least two spatial modulators form a Moire pattern,
Wherein the moiré pattern is a periodic spatial pattern that attenuates light at a different period than the period of light patterns formation through the at least two spatial light modulators. 597. The method of claim 597,
Wherein the spatial light modulator arrays include at least two spatial light modulator arrays optically coupled to each other and control passage of light through a moiré effect. 598. The method of claim 598,
Each of the at least two spatial light modulator arrays producing an individual attenuation pattern. 597. The method of claim 597,
Wherein each of said at least two spatial light modulator arrays yields an individual optimal-pitch sinusoidal pattern printed, etched, or otherwise engraved on or in the interior thereof. 598. The method of claim 598,
Wherein the at least two spatial light modulator arrays are in register with each other. 598. The method of claim 598,
Each of the at least two spatial light modulator arrays producing an individual attenuation pattern. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
A light generating source for providing light associated with one or more frames of image data, the light generating source being a spatial light modulator; And
Wherein the pinhole array is positioned relative to the spatial light modulator in such a manner that a pinhole of the pinhole array receives light from a plurality of cells of the spatial light modulator,
Wherein the first light beam passing through the pinhole corresponds to an angle different from the second light beam passing through the pinhole,
Wherein the cell of the spatial light modulator selectively attenuates light. 60. The method of claim 603,
An external environment is visible through the pinhole array and SLMs,
Wherein the light beams are selectively attenuated based at least in part on an angle of incidence of the light beams. 60. The method of claim 603,
Wherein light from different parts of the field of view is selectively attenuated. 60. The method of claim 603,
Further comprising a selective damping layer selectively operable to attenuate transmission of light through it,
Wherein the selective damping layer is optically in-line with the pinhole layer. 60. The method of claim 606,
Wherein the selective damping layer comprises a liquid crystal array, a digital light projector system, or spatial light modulator arrays that produce individual attenuation patterns. 60. The method of claim 603,
The pinhole array is disposed at a distance of about 30 mm from the cornea of the user's eye,
Wherein the selectivity damping panel is located facing the pinhole array from the eye. 60. The method of claim 603,
Wherein the pinhole array includes a plurality of pinholes,
Wherein the processor controls the SLMs in such a way that light is attenuated as a function of the angles through which the light beams pass through the plurality of pinholes to produce an angle of view field of view. 609. The method of claim 609,
Wherein the aggregate field of view causes occlusion at a desired focal length. As a system,
A light generating source for providing light associated with one or more frames of image data, the light generating source being a spatial light modulator; And
The lens array being positioned relative to the spatial light modulator in such a way that a lens of the lens array receives light from a plurality of cells of the spatial light modulator,
Wherein the first light beam received by the lens corresponds to an angle different from the second light beam received by the lens,
Wherein the cells of the spatial light modulator selectively attenuate light. 611. The method of claim 611,
An external environment is visible through the lens array and SLMs,
Wherein the light beams are selectively attenuated based at least in part on the angle of incidence of the light beams. 611. The method of claim 611,
Wherein light from different portions of the field of view is selectively attenuated. 611. The method of claim 611,
The lens array comprising a plurality of lenses,
Wherein the processor controls the SLMs in such a way as to cause light to be generated as a function of the angles at which the light beams are received by the plurality of lenses to produce an angle of view field of view. 614. The method of claim 614,
Wherein the angle of view of the image causes occlusion at a desired focal length. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
A light projector for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data;
At least one polarization sensitive layer for receiving the light and for rotating the polarization of the light; And
And an array of polarization modulators for modulating the polarization of the polarization-sensitive layer,
Wherein the state of the cell of the array determines how much light passes through the polarization sensitive layer. 616. The method of claim 616,
Wherein the system is arranged in an eye-proximity configuration. 616. The method of claim 616,
Wherein the polarization modulator is a liquid crystal array. 616. The method of claim 616,
Further comprising a parallax barrier for offsetting the polariser so that different exit pupils have different paths through the polariser. 619. The method of claim 619,
Wherein the polarizer is an xpol polarizer. 619. The method of claim 619,
Wherein the polarizer is a multiPol polarizer. 619. The method of claim 619,
Wherein the polarizer is a patterned polariser. 616. The method of claim 616,
Wherein the light interacts with one or more MEMs arrays. 617. The method of claim 617,
Further comprising SLMs for projecting light,
The SLMs are positioned between one or more optical elements,
Wherein the optical elements correspond to a zero magnification telescope. 624. The method of claim 624,
Wherein the user views the external environment via the zero magnification telescope. 624. The method of claim 624,
Wherein at least one SLM is positioned in an image plane within the zero magnification telescope. 616. The method of claim 616,
Further comprising a DMD,
Wherein the DMD corresponds to a transparent substrate. 63. The method of claim 627,
Further comprising a shield comprising at least one optical component,
Wherein the processor controls at least one optical component of the visor to produce a dark-field representation of the dark virtual object. 63. The method of claim 627,
Further comprising one or more LCDs,
Wherein the one or more LCDs selectively attenuate light beams. 616. The method of claim 616,
Further comprising one or more LCDs,
Wherein the one or more LCDs function as polarization rotators. 63. The method of claim 628,
Wherein the visor is a louver MEMs device. 633. The method of claim 631,
The louver MEMs device is opaque,
Wherein the louver MEMs device changes an angle of incidence on a pixel-by-pixel basis. 633. The method of claim 631,
The visor is a sliding panel MEMs device,
Wherein the sliding panel MEMs device slides back and forth to modify the coverage area. A method for displaying virtual content,
Projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data;
Rotating the polarization of light through the polarization sensitive layer in a substrate that receives the projected light; And
And modulating polarized light of light to selectively attenuate light passing through the polarizing layer. 634. The method of claim 634,
Wherein the polarization modulator is a liquid crystal array. 634. The method of claim 634,
Further comprising a parallax barrier for offsetting the polariser so that different exit pupils have different paths through the polariser. 636. The method of claim 636,
Wherein the polarizer is an xpol polarizer. 636. The method of claim 636,
Wherein the polarizer is a multiPol polarizer. 636. The method of claim 636,
Wherein the polarizer is a patterned polariser. 634. The method of claim 634,
Wherein the light interacts with one or more MEMs arrays. 635. The method of claim 635,
Further comprising SLMs for projecting light,
The SLMs are positioned between one or more optical elements,
Wherein the optical elements correspond to a zero magnification telescope. 65. The method of claim 641,
Wherein the user views the external environment via the zero magnification telescope. 65. The method of claim 641,
Wherein at least one SLM is positioned in an image plane within the zero magnification telescope. 634. The method of claim 634,
Further comprising a DMD,
Wherein the DMD corresponds to a transparent substrate. 634. The method of claim 634,
Further comprising a shield comprising at least one optical component,
Wherein the processor controls at least one optical component of the visor to generate a dark-field representation of the dark virtual object. 634. The method of claim 634,
Further comprising one or more LCDs,
Wherein the one or more LCDs selectively attenuate light beams. 634. The method of claim 634,
Further comprising one or more LCDs,
Wherein the one or more LCDs function as polarization rotators. 64. The method of claim 645,
Wherein the visor is a louver MEMs device. 65. The method of claim 648,
The louver MEMs device is opaque,
Wherein the louver MEMs device changes an angle of incidence on a pixel-by-pixel basis. 64. The method of claim 645,
The visor is a sliding panel MEMs device,
Wherein the sliding panel MEMs device slides back and forth to modify the occlusion range. A system for displaying virtual content,
A light generating source for providing light associated with one or more frames of image data, the light generating source being a spatial light modulator; And
Includes an array of micro-electro-mechanical (MEMs) louvers,
The MEMs louvers are housed in a substantially transparent substrate,
The MEMs louvers are configurable to change the angle at which light is transmitted to the pixel,
Wherein the angle of the first pixel delivered to the user is different than the second pixel delivered to the user. 65. The method of claim 651,
Wherein at least one optical component comprises a first array of micro-electro-mechanical system (MEMS) louvers. 65. The method of claim 651,
Wherein the array of MEMS louvers comprises a plurality of substantially opaque louvers carried by an optically transparent substrate. 65. The method of claim 651,
Wherein the array of micro-electro-mechanical system (MEMS) louvers have a louver pitch that is sufficiently optimal to selectively block light on a pixel-by-pixel basis. 65. The method of claim 651,
Wherein at least one optical component of the visor comprises a second array of MEMS louvers,
Wherein the second array of MEMS louvers is in a stacked configuration with a first array of MEMS louvers. 65. The method of claim 651,
The array of MEMS louvers comprising a plurality of polarizing louvers carried by an optically transparent substrate,
Wherein the individual polarization states of each of the louvers are selectively controllable. 65. The method of claim 651,
Wherein the louvers of the first and second arrays of MEMS panels are polarizers. 65. The method of claim 651,
Wherein at least one optical component of the visor comprises a first array of micro-electro-mechanical system (MEMS) panels mounted for movement in a frame. 65. The method of claim 651,
Wherein the panels of the first array of MEMS panels are slidably mounted for movement in a frame. 65. The method of claim 651,
Wherein the panels of the first array of MEMS panels are pivotably mounted for movement in a frame. 65. The method of claim 651,
Wherein the panels of the first array of MEMS panels are mounted translationally and pivotably for movement in a frame. 65. The method of claim 651,
Wherein the panels are movable to create a moiré pattern. 65. The method of claim 651,
At least one optical component of the visor further comprises a second array of MEMS panels mounted for movement in the frame,
Said second array being in said first array and stack configuration. 65. The method of claim 651,
Wherein the panels of the first and second arrays of MEMS panels are polarizers. 65. The method of claim 651,
Wherein the at least one optical component of the visor comprises a reflector array. As a system,
At least one waveguide for receiving light from an external environment and directing the light to one or more spatial light modulators,
Wherein the one or more spatial light modulators selectively attenuate light received at different portions of the user's field of view. 65. The method of claim 666,
Wherein the at least one waveguide comprises first and second waveguides,
And wherein the second waveguide is configured to transmit light out of the SLMs to the user's eye. As a method,
Receiving light from an external environment;
Directing the light to a selective attenuator; And
Selectively attenuating light received at different portions of the user's view through the selective attenuator. 65. The method of claim 668,
Wherein the at least one waveguide comprises first and second waveguides,
Wherein the second waveguide is configured to transmit light out of the SLMs to the user's eye. 65. The method of claim 668,
Wherein the selective attenuator is a DMD. 65. The method of claim 668,
Wherein the spatial light modulator is a DMD array. 65. The method of claim 668,
Wherein the light is directed through one or more waveguides to one or more spatial light modulators. 67. The method of claim 672,
Further comprising recombining the light into a waveguide to cause the light to partially exit towards the user's eye. 67. The method of claim 672,
Wherein the waveguide is oriented substantially orthogonal to the selective attenuator. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
A light generating source for providing light associated with one or more frames of image data, the light generating source comprising a plurality of micro projectors; And
And a waveguide configured to receive light from the plurality of microprojectors and transmit the light to a user's eye. 69. The method of claim 675,
Wherein the microprojectors are arranged in a linear array. 69. The method of claim 675,
Wherein the microprojectors are disposed at one edge of the waveguide. 69. The method of claim 675,
Wherein the microprojectors are disposed at a plurality of edges of the waveguide. 69. The method of claim 675,
Wherein the microprojectors are arranged in a two-dimensional array. 69. The method of claim 675,
Wherein the microprojectors are arranged in a three-dimensional array. 680. The method of claim 680,
Wherein the microprojectors are disposed at a plurality of edges of a substrate. 680. The method of claim 680,
Wherein the microprojectors are arranged at a plurality of angles. A system for displaying virtual content,
An image generation source for providing one or more frames of image data, the image data comprising one or more virtual objects to be presented to a user; And
A rendering engine for rendering the one or more virtual objects in such a way that a halo is perceived by the user around the one or more virtual objects, . 67. The method of claim 683,
Further comprising an optical attenuator,
Wherein the optical attenuator balances the light intensity of the halo over the user ' s field of view. A method for displaying virtual content,
Providing one or more frames of image data, the image data comprising one or more virtual objects to be presented to a user; And
Rendering the one or more virtual objects in such a way that the user is more visible to the user by recognizing a halo around the one or more virtual objects by the user,
Wherein the virtual object is a dark virtual object. 68. The method of claim 686,
Further comprising selectively attenuating light received from an external environment through an optical attenuator,
Wherein the optical attenuator balances the light intensity of the halo over the user ' s field of view. A system for displaying virtual content,
A camera system for capturing a view of a real environment;
An optical time-through system displaying one or more virtual objects overlaid on a view of the real-world; a captured view is used to render the one or more virtual objects provided to a user; And
By modulating the light intensity of the view of the real world based at least in part on the correlation between one or more real objects and the one or more virtual objects, And a light intensity module for making the display invisible in contrast to the light intensity module. 68. The method of claim 687,
The captured view is used to generate a halo around one or more virtual objects,
Wherein the halo is blurred across the space. 68. The method of claim 687,
Further comprising an optical attenuator,
Wherein the optical attenuator balances the light intensity of the halo over the user ' s field of view. A method for driving an augmented reality display system,
Rendering a first virtual object at a location in the user's field of view; And
Rendering the visual highlight at least spatially close to the rendered first virtual object of the user's view, substantially simultaneously with the rendering of the first virtual object. 609. The method of claim 690,
Wherein rendering the visual highlight comprises rendering the visual highlight with an intensity gradient. ≪ Desc / Clms Page number 21 > 609. The method of claim 690,
Wherein rendering the visible highlight comprises blurring near the periphery of the visible highlight to render the visible highlight. ≪ RTI ID = 0.0 >< / RTI > 609. The method of claim 690,
Wherein rendering the visual highlight at least spatially adjacent to the rendered first virtual object comprises rendering the halo visual effect spatially close to the rendered first virtual object. Way. 694. The method of claim 694,
Wherein rendering the halo visual effect at least spatially near the rendered first virtual object comprises rendering the halo visual effect to be brighter than the rendered first virtual object. Way. 69. The method of claim 693,
Wherein the rendering of the halo visual effect to be brighter than the rendered first virtual object is in response to a determination that the rendered first virtual object is darker than a dark threshold value. Way. 69. The method of claim 693,
Wherein the rendering of the halo visual effect comprises rendering the halo visual effect in a separate focal plane from the first virtual object rendered in the perceived three-dimensional space. 69. The method of claim 693,
Wherein rendering the halo visual effect comprises rendering a halo visual effect with an intensity gradient. ≪ Desc / Clms Page number 21 > 69. The method of claim 693,
Rendering the halo visual effect comprises rendering a halo visual effect having an intensity gradient matching the dark halo resulting from occlusion applied to the rendering of the first virtual object to compensate for the dark field effect of the occlusion , A method for driving an augmented reality display system. 69. The method of claim 693,
Wherein rendering the halo visual effect comprises blurring near the periphery of the halo visual effect to render the halo visual effect. ≪ Desc / Clms Page number 21 > 609. The method of claim 690,
Wherein the rendered first visual object has a non-circular perimeter,
Wherein the rendered halo visual effect is along the non-circular perimeter. 609. The method of claim 690,
Wherein rendering the visual highlight at least spatially adjacent to the rendered first virtual object includes rendering the visual effect in a separate focal plane from the first virtual object rendered in the perceivable three- A method for driving a realistic display system. 609. The method of claim 690,
Wherein rendering the visible effect in a separate focal plane from the first virtual object rendered in the perceived three-dimensional space comprises rendering the rendered first virtual object in a focal plane relatively far away from the user with respect to the focal plane on which the rendered first virtual object is rendered The method comprising: rendering a visual effect; and rendering the visual effect. A system for displaying virtual content,
An image generation source for providing one or more frames of image data to be provided to a user, the one or more frames of the image data comprising at least one dark virtual object;
And a rendering image for rendering one or more frames of the image data,
Wherein the rendering engine renders the dark virtual object as a blue virtual object so that the dark virtual object is visible to the user. 70. The method of claim 703,
Wherein rendering the first virtual object at a location in the user's field of view comprises first changing any dark intonations of the first virtual object to a dark blue color. A system for transmitting light beams for display of virtual content,
At least one waveguide having at least a first end and a second end spaced from the first end over a length of the at least one waveguide, - entering individual waveguides with radio waves;
At least one edge reflector positioned at least proximate to a first end of the at least one waveguide to optically reflectively recombine light at a first end of the at least one waveguide; And
And at least one edge reflector positioned at least near the second end of the at least one waveguide for optically reflectively recombining light at a second end of the at least one waveguide. A system for transmitting light beams. 705. The method of claim 705,
Wherein said at least one waveguide has a plurality of transverse reflective and / or diffractive surfaces within said waveguide that laterally redirect at least a portion of said light to the exterior of said waveguide. 705. The method of claim 705,
Wherein the transverse reflection and / or diffraction surfaces are low diffraction efficiency diffractive optical elements (DOEs). 705. The method of claim 705,
Wherein at least one edge reflector positioned at least near the first end of the at least one waveguide comprises a plurality of reflectors positioned at least near the first end of the at least one waveguide, A system for transmitting beams. 705. The method of claim 705,
Wherein at least one edge reflector positioned at least near the second end of the at least one waveguide comprises a plurality of reflectors positioned at least near the second end of the at least one waveguide, A system for transmitting beams. 705. The method of claim 705,
Wherein the at least one waveguide is a single waveguide. A system for transmitting light beams for display of virtual content,
A waveguide assembly comprising a plurality of planar waveguides,
Each of the planar waveguides having at least two planar circumferential planes facing each other across the thickness of the planar waveguide, a first end, and a second end opposite the first end over the length of the waveguide,
Along the length, light enters the individual waveguides at the angles of propagation defined by the total internal reflection,
Two planar major edges are opposite to each other across the width of the waveguide,
Wherein the plurality of planar waveguides are stacked along a first axis parallel to the thicknesses of the planar waveguides and along a second axis parallel to the widths of the planar waveguides to form a three dimensional array of planar waveguides, A system for transmitting light beams for display of virtual content. 711. The method of claim 711,
Wherein there are at least three flat waveguides stacked in the direction of the first axis. 712. The method of claim 712,
Wherein there are at least three flat waveguides stacked in the direction of the second axis. 712. The method of claim 712,
Wherein there are at least three flat waveguides stacked in the direction of the second axis. 711. The method of claim 711,
The continuous plate waveguides of the stack along the first axis are immediately adjacent to each other,
Wherein the successive planar waveguides of the stack along the second axis are immediately adjacent to each other, for the display of the virtual content. 711. The method of claim 711,
Wherein the waveguide assembly further comprises a plurality of reflective layers carried on at least one surface of the at least one waveguide of the planar waveguides. 72. The method of claim 716,
Wherein the reflective layers comprise a fully reflective metallization coating. ≪ Desc / Clms Page number 19 > 72. The method of claim 716,
Wherein the reflective layers comprise wavelength specific reflectors. ≪ Desc / Clms Page number 13 > 72. The method of claim 716,
The reflective layers separating a continuous pair of planar waveguides of each of the planar waveguides along at least one of the first or second axes. 72. The method of claim 716,
The reflective layers separating a continuous pair of planar waveguides of each of the planar waveguides along both the first and second axes. 711. The method of claim 711,
Each of the plurality of planar waveguides includes a plurality of transverse reflective and / or diffractive surfaces each of which transversely redirects at least a portion of the light received by the individual planar waveguide to the exterior of the planar waveguide, / RTI > 711. The method of claim 711,
Wherein the transverse reflection and / or diffraction surfaces comprise diffractive optical elements sandwiched between the major surfaces of the individual plate waveguides to the individual plate waveguides. 712. The method of claim 712,
Wherein the diffractive optical elements are selectively operable to change the focal distance. 712. The method of claim 712,
Wherein the first axis is a curved axis,
At least one of the major edges of each of the planar waveguides of at least one set of waveguide assemblies is oriented to focus on a single line,
Wherein the single line is parallel to the lengths of the planar waveguides. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
An optical projector for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data, the optical projector being a fiber scanning display; And
And a waveguide assembly for variably deflecting light to a user's eye,
Wherein the waveguide is curved concave toward the eye. 74. The method of claim 725,
A system for displaying virtual content to a user, the curved waveguide extending the view. 74. The method of claim 725,
Wherein the curved waveguide efficiently directs light to the user's eye. 74. The method of claim 725,
Wherein the curved waveguide includes a time-variable grating, thereby creating an axis for scanning light for the fiber scanning display. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
Having a plurality of internal reflection or diffractive surfaces angled with respect to the entrance for transversely redirecting at least a portion of the light received at the entrance towards the user eye towards the outside of the transmissive beam splitter substrate, A beam splitter substrate, the plurality of reflective or diffractive surfaces comprising a plurality of transverse reflective and / or diffractive surfaces spaced along a longitudinal axis of the transmissive beam splitter substrate, each of the transverse reflective and diffractive surfaces At least part of the received light being able to be angled or angled with respect to the entrance to laterally redirect it along the optical path towards the user eye to the outside of the transmissive beam splitter substrate;
A light generating system for transmitting light to the transmissive beam splitter; And
And a local controller communicatively coupled to the display system to provide image information to the display system,
Wherein the local controller comprises at least one processor and at least one non-volatile processor readable medium communicatively coupled to the at least one processor,
Wherein the at least one non-volatile processor readable medium, when executed by the at least one processor, causes the at least one processor to perform at least one of processing, caching, and storing data, Storing at least one of processor-executable instructions or data that causes the display to provide image information to a display to generate at least one of a realistic visual experience. 72. The method of claim 729,
Wherein the transverse reflection and / or diffraction surfaces comprise at least one diffractive optical element (DOE)
A collimated beam entering a beam splitter at a plurality of defined angles is internally totalized along the length of the beam splitter and intersects the DOE at one or more locations, . 72. The method of claim 729,
Wherein at least one diffractive optical element (DOE) comprises a first grating. 72. The method of claim 729,
Wherein the first grating is a first Bragg grating, the system for displaying virtual content to a user. 72. The method of claim 729,
The DOE includes a second grating,
Wherein the first grating is on a first plane and the second grating is on a second plane,
Wherein the second plane is spaced from the first plane to allow the first and second gratings to interact to create a moiré beat pattern. 733. The method of claim 733,
The first grating having a first pitch,
The second grating having a second pitch,
Wherein the first pitch is equal to the second pitch. 733. The method of claim 733,
The first grating having a first pitch,
The second grating having a second pitch,
Wherein the first pitch is different from the second pitch. 733. The method of claim 733,
Wherein the first grating pitch is controllable to change the first grating pitch over time. 74. The method of claim 736,
Wherein the first grating comprises an elastic material and wherein a mechanical deformation occurs. 737. The method of claim 737,
Wherein the first grating is carried by an elastic material that undergoes mechanical deformation. 733. The method of claim 733,
Wherein the first grating pitch is controllable to change the first grating pitch over time. 733. The method of claim 733,
And wherein the second grating pitch is controllable to change the second grating pitch over time. 733. The method of claim 733,
Wherein the first grating is an electro-active grating having at least one ON state and an OFF state. 733. The method of claim 733,
Wherein the first grating comprises a polymer dispersed liquid crystal,
Wherein a plurality of liquid crystal droplets of the polymer dispersed liquid crystal is controllably activated to change the refractive index of the first grating. 737. The method of claim 737,
Wherein the first grating is a time-variable grating,
Wherein the local controller controls at least the first grating to extend the field of view of the display. 737. The method of claim 737,
Wherein the first grating is a time-variable grating,
Wherein the local controller utilizes time-varying control of at least the first grating to correct for chromatic aberration. 744. The method of claim 744,
The local controller drives at least the first grating to change the arrangement of the red sub-pixels of the pixels of the image for at least one of the blue or green sub-pixels of a corresponding pixel of the image, A system for displaying. 74. The method of claim 745,
Wherein the local controller drives at least a first grating to laterally shift an injection pattern to fill a gap in an outbound image pattern. 733. The method of claim 731,
Wherein the at least one DOE element has a first circular-symmetric term. 733. The method of claim 731,
Wherein the at least one DOE element has a first linear term,
Wherein the first linear term is summed with the first circular-symmetric term. 74. The method of claim 748,
Wherein the circular-symmetry term is controllable, for displaying to the user the virtual content. 72. The method of claim 729,
Wherein the at least one DOE element has a second first circular-symmetry term. 72. The method of claim 729,
Wherein the at least one DOE (diffractive optical) element comprises a first DOE. 75. The method of claim 751,
Wherein the first DOE is a circular DOE. 75. The method of claim 752,
Wherein the circular DOE is a time-varying DOE. 75. The method of claim 752,
Wherein the circular DOE is layered relative to the waveguide for focus modulation. 75. The method of claim 752,
Wherein the diffraction pattern of the circular DOE is static. 75. The method of claim 752,
Wherein the diffraction pattern of the circular DOE is dynamic. 75. The method of claim 752,
Including additional circular DOEs,
Wherein the additional circular DOEs are positioned relative to the circular DOE so that many focus levels are achieved through a small number of switchable DOEs. 739. The method of claim 739,
Wherein the system further comprises a matrix of switchable DOE elements. 75. The method of claim 758,
Wherein the matrix is utilized to extend the field of view. 75. The method of claim 758,
Wherein the matrix is utilized to expand the size of the exit pupil. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
A light projection system for projecting light beams associated with one or more frames of image data; And
A diffractive optical element (DOE) for receiving the projected light beams and delivering the light beams to a desired focus,
Wherein the DOE is a circular DOE. 79. The method of claim 761,
Wherein the DOE is stretchable along a single axis to adjust the angle of the linear DOE term. 79. The method of claim 761,
The DOE includes a membrane, and at least one transducer operable to selectively oscillate the membrane through oscillation motion in the Z-axis to provide a change of focus and Z-axis control over time, To the user. 79. The method of claim 761,
Wherein the DOE is embedded in the stretchable medium so that the pitch of the DOE can be adjusted by physically stretching the stretchable medium. 79. The method of claim 761,
The DOE is stretched in two axes,
Wherein the stretching of the DOE affects the focal length of the DOE. 79. The method of claim 761,
Further comprising a plurality of circular DOEs,
Wherein the DOEs are stacked along the Z-axis. 79. The method of claim 761,
A system for displaying virtual content to a user, wherein a circular DOE is layered before a waveguide for focuser modulation. 797. The method of claim 767,
Wherein the DOE is static, for displaying the virtual content to a user. 768. The method of claim 768,
Wherein the DOE is dynamic, displaying virtual content to a user. A system for displaying virtual content to a user,
A light projection system for projecting light beams associated with one or more frames of image data;
A first waveguide-first waveguide without any DOEs (diffractive optical elements) is configured to receive at least a portion of the length of the first waveguide through total internal reflection of light received by the first waveguide at a plurality of defined angles And externally providing light from the first waveguide as collimated light;
A second waveguide having at least a first circular-symmetric diffractive optical element (DOE), said second waveguide being optically coupled to receive collimated light from said first waveguide; And
And a processor for controlling gratings of the DOE. 780. The method of claim 770,
Wherein the first DOE is selectively controllable, for displaying to the user the virtual content. 780. The method of claim 770,
The display includes a plurality of additional DOEs in addition to the first DOE,
Wherein the DOEs are arranged in a stack configuration. 780. The method of claim 770,
Wherein each DOE of the plurality of additional DOEs is selectively controllable. 780. The method of claim 770,
Wherein the local controller controls the first DOE and the plurality of additional DOEs to dynamically modulate the focus of light passing through the display. 780. The method of claim 770,
The processor selectively switches the first DOE and the plurality of additional DOEs respectively to realize a plurality of focus levels,
Wherein the number of feasible focus levels is greater than the total number of DOEs in the stack. 780. The method of claim 770,
Each of the DOEs in the stack has discrete optical power,
Wherein the optical powers of the DOEs in the stack are additionally controllable with respect to each other. 780. The method of claim 770,
Wherein the discrete optical power of at least one of the DOEs in the stack is at least twice the discrete optical power of at least another of the DOEs in the stack. 780. The method of claim 770,
Wherein the processor selectively switches respectively a first DOE and a plurality of additional DOEs to modulate individual linear and radial terms of the DOEs over time. 780. The method of claim 770,
Wherein the processor selectively switches the first DOE and the plurality of additional DOEs on a frame sequential basis, respectively. 780. The method of claim 770,
Wherein the stack of DOEs comprises a stack of polymer dispersed liquid crystal elements. 780. The method of claim 780,
Wherein in the absence of an applied voltage, the host medium index of refraction matches a refractive index of a set of dispersed molecules of polymer dispersed liquid crystal elements. 780. The method of claim 780,
The polymer dispersed liquid crystal elements comprise a plurality of transparent indium tin oxide layer electrodes on one side of the host medium and molecules of lithium niobate,
Wherein the dispersed molecules of lithium niobate controllably change the refractive index within the host medium and functionally form a diffraction pattern. A method for displaying virtual content,
Projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data to a user;
Receiving light at a first waveguide, said first waveguide having no diffractive optical elements, propagating said light through internal reflection; And
Receiving collimated light in a second waveguide having at least a first circular-symmetric diffractive optical element (DOE)
The second waveguide being optically coupled to receive the collimated light from the first waveguide,
The grating of the circularly symmetric DOE is changed,
Wherein the first waveguide and the second waveguide are assembled in a stack of DOEs. 78. The method of claim 783,
Wherein the stack of DOEs comprises a stack of polymer dispersed liquid crystal elements. 784. The method of claim 784,
The polymer dispersed liquid crystal elements comprising a plurality of transparent indium tin oxide layer electrodes and molecules of lithium niobate on either side of the host medium,
Wherein the dispersed molecules of lithium niobate controllably change the refractive index within the host medium and functionally form a diffraction pattern. 784. The method of claim 784,
Wherein in the absence of an applied voltage, the host medium refractive index matches a refractive index of a set of dispersed molecules of polymer dispersed liquid crystal elements. An optical element for displaying virtual content to a user,
And at least one diffractive optical element (DOE) positioned to receive light,
Wherein the at least one DOE comprises a first array of a plurality of separately addressable sections having at least one electrode for each of the separately addressable subsections,
Each of the separately addressable sub-sections being responsive to at least one discrete signal received via at least one discrete electrode to selectively switch between at least a first state and a second state,
Wherein the second state is different from the first state. 78. The method of claim 787,
An optical element for displaying to a user virtual content, wherein the field of view is expanded by multiplexing adjacently addressable sub-sections. 78. The method of claim 787,
The first state is an ON state,
And the second state is an OFF state. 78. The method of claim 787,
Each of the separately addressable sub-sections having a separate set of at least two indium tin oxide electrodes. 78. The method of claim 787,
Wherein the first array of the plurality of separately addressable sections of the at least one DOE is a one-dimensional array. 78. The method of claim 787,
Wherein the first array of the plurality of separately addressable sections of the at least one DOE is a two-dimensional array. 78. The method of claim 787,
Wherein the first array of separately addressable sections is a section of a first DOE resident on a first planar layer. 79. The method of claim 793,
Wherein the at least one DOE comprises at least a second DOE,
The second DOE comprising a second array of a plurality of separately addressable sections having at least one electrode for each separately addressable sub-section,
Each of the separately addressable subsections responsive to at least one discrete signal received via at least one discrete electrode to selectively switch between at least a first state and a second state,
The second state being different from the first state,
The second array of DOEs resides on the second flat plate layer,
Wherein the second flat panel layer is stacked with the first flat panel layer. 79. The method of claim 793,
Wherein the at least one DOE comprises at least a third DOE,
The three DOEs comprising a third array of a plurality of separately addressable sections having at least one electrode for each separately addressable sub-section,
Each of the separately addressable subsections responsive to at least one discrete signal received via at least one discrete electrode to selectively switch between at least a first state and a second state,
The second state being different from the first state,
A third array of DOEs resides on the third planar layer,
Wherein the third flat panel layer is stacked with the first and second flat panel layers. 78. The method of claim 787,
Wherein the first array of separately addressable sections is embedded in a single flat waveguide. 79. The method of claim 793,
The local control portion optionally controls the separately addressable subsections to emit collimated light from the planar waveguide at a first time and emit divergent light from the planar waveguide at a second time,
Wherein the second time is different from the first time. 79. The method of claim 793,
The local control portion optionally controls the separately addressable subsections to emit in a first direction from the planar waveguide at a first time and emit light in a second direction from the planar waveguide at a second time,
And wherein the second direction is different from the first direction. 78. The method of claim 787,
Wherein the local control unit controls the separately addressable subsections to selectively scan light in one direction over time. 78. The method of claim 787,
Wherein the local control unit controls the separately addressable subsections to selectively poke light over time. 78. The method of claim 787,
Wherein the local control unit controls the separately addressable subsections to selectively change the field of view of the exit pupil over time. As a system,
A first free-form reflective and lens optical component for increasing the size of the field of view for a defined set of optical parameters,
Wherein the first free-form reflective and lens optical component comprises a first curved surface, a second curved surface, and a third curved surface,
Wherein the first curved surface is at least partially optically transmissive and refractive and imparts a focus change to light received by the first free-form reflection and lens optical component through the first curved surface,
The second curved surface at least partially reflecting light received by the second curved surface from the first curved surface toward the third curved surface and from the third curved surface toward the second curved surface, Passing the light received by the mold surface,
And the third curved surface at least partially reflects light out of the first free-form reflective and lens optical component through the second curved surface. 92. The method of claim 802,
Wherein the first curved surface of the first free-form reflective and lens optical component is a discrete free-form curved surface. 92. The method of claim 802,
Wherein the first curved surface of the first free-form reflective and lens optical component adds a movie stigmatism to the light. 92. The method of claim 802,
Wherein the third curved surface of the first free-form reflective and lens optical component adds an anti-symmetric movie aberration to cancel the movie aberration added by the first curved surface of the first free- . 92. The method of claim 802,
Wherein the second curved surface of the first free-form reflective and lens optical component is a discrete free-form curved surface. 92. The method of claim 802,
Wherein the second curved surface of the first free-form reflective and lens optic component reflects at defined angles of light to be reflected by total internal reflection towards the third curved surface. As a system,
A fiber scanning display for projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data, the fiber scanning display configured to transmit light to a first freestyle optical element; And
A first free-form reflective and lens optical component for increasing the size of the field of view for a defined set of optical parameters,
Wherein the first free-form reflective and lens optical component comprises a first curved surface, a second curved surface, and a third curved surface,
Wherein the first curved surface is at least partially optically transmissive and refractive and imparts a focus change to light received by the first free-form reflection and lens optical component through the first curved surface,
The second curved surface at least partially reflecting light received by the second curved surface from the first curved surface toward the third curved surface and from the third curved surface toward the second curved surface, Passing the light received by the mold surface,
And the third curved surface at least partially reflects light out of the first free-form reflective and lens optical component through the second curved surface. 808. The method of claim 808,
Wherein the free-form optics are TIR free-form optics. 808. The method of claim 808,
Wherein the free-form optics have a non-uniform thickness. 808. The method of claim 808,
The free-form optics are wedge optics. 808. The method of claim 808,
Wherein the free-form optics are cones. 808. The method of claim 808,
Wherein the free-form optics correspond to arbitrary curves. As a system,
An image generation source for providing one or more frames of image data to be provided to a user;
A display system for providing light associated with one or more frames of the image data; And
A free-form optical element for modifying the provided light and delivering the light to a user,
Wherein the free-form optical element comprises a reflective coating portion,
Wherein the display system is configured to illuminate the free-form optical element so that the wavelength of the light matches the corresponding wavelength of the reflective coating. 92. The method of claim 814,
Wherein one or more free-form optical elements are tiled relative to each other. The method of claim 815,
Wherein the one or more free-form optical elements are tiled along the z-axis. As a system,
An image generation source for providing one or more frames of image data to be provided to a user;
A display system for providing light associated with one or more frames of the image data, the display system comprising a plurality of microdisks; And
And a free-form optical element for modifying the provided light and delivering the light to a user. 817. The method of claim 817,
Wherein one or more free-form optics are tiled relative to each other. 817. The method of claim 817,
Wherein the light projected by the plurality of microdisplays increases the field of view. 817. The method of claim 817,
Wherein the free-form optical elements are configured to allow only one color to be transmitted by a particular free-form optical element. 90. The method of claim 820,
Wherein the tiled freeform is a star shape. 90. The method of claim 820,
Wherein the tiled free-form optical elements increase the size of the exit pupil. 817. The method of claim 817,
Further comprising another free-form optical element,
Wherein the free-form optical elements are stacked together in such a way as to produce a uniform material thickness. 817. The method of claim 817,
Further comprising another free-form optical element,
Wherein the other free-form optical element is configured to capture light corresponding to an external environment. 817. The method of claim 817,
Further comprising a DMD,
Wherein the DMD is configured to cover one or more pixels. 817. The method of claim 817,
And further comprising one or more LCDs. 817. The method of claim 817,
Further comprising a contact lens substrate,
Wherein the free-form optics are coupled to the contact lens substrate. 817. The method of claim 817,
Wherein the plurality of microdisks provide an array of small exit pupils collectively forming the same function as a large exit pupil. 817. The method of claim 817,
At least one image source providing at least a first monochromatic image source providing light of a first color, at least a second monochromatic image source providing light of a second color, the second color being different from the first color, And at least a third monochromatic image source providing light of a third color,
Wherein the third color is different from the first and second colors. 84. The method of claim 829,
Wherein the at least first monochromatic image source comprises a first subgroup of scanning fibers,
Wherein the at least second monochromatic image source comprises a second subgroup of scanning fibers,
Wherein the at least third monochromatic image source comprises a third subgroup of scanning fibers. 817. The method of claim 817,
Further comprising a first free-form reflection and a shield positioned in the optical path between the lens optical component and the at least one reflector,
Wherein the shield is operable to selectively shield light on a pixel-by-pixel basis. 84. The method of claim 831,
Wherein the first free-form reflective and lens optical component forms at least a portion of the contact lens. 817. The method of claim 817,
Further comprising a compensator lens optically coupled to a portion of the first free-form reflective and lens optical component. As a system,
A first free-form reflective and lens optical component for increasing the size of the field of view for a defined set of optical parameters, the first free-form reflective and lens optical component comprising a first surface, a second surface, and a third surface, Wherein the first surface is at least partially optically transmissive to light received by the first free-form reflective and lens optical component through the first surface, the second surface is curved, At least partially reflecting light received by the second surface toward the third surface and passing light received by the second surface from the third surface, the third surface is curved, and the second At least partially reflecting light outside the first free-form reflection and lens optical component through the surface; And
A first surface, a second surface, and a third surface, and wherein said first surface of said second free-form reflective and lens optical component comprises a first surface, a second surface, and a third surface, At least partially optically transmissive to light received by the second free-form reflective and lens optical component through a first surface, the second surface of the second free-form reflective and lens optical component is curved, At least partially reflecting light received by the second surface from the first surface of the second free-form reflective and lens optical component toward the third surface of the second free-form reflective and lens optical component, And a second lens having a first surface and a second surface, Said, the second and the third reflection surface of the free-form lenses and optical components is curved, and also the first reflection and the second free-form reflecting light out of the lens, optical component, at least in part on the second surface and including,
Wherein the first and second free-form reflective and lens optical components are in a stacked configuration oriented opposite each other along the Z-axis. 834. The method of claim 834,
Wherein a second surface of the second free-form reflective and lens optical component is adjacent a third surface of the first free-form reflection and lens optical component. 834. The method of claim 834,
Wherein a second surface of the second free-form reflective and lens optical component is concave, a third surface of the first free-form reflective and lens optical component is convex, and a third surface of the first free- The second free-form reflection and the second surface of the lens optical component. 834. The method of claim 834,
Wherein the first surface of the first free-form reflective and lens optical component is planar, the first surface of the second free-form reflective and lens optical component is planar,
The system comprises:
At least a first projector optically coupled to the first free-form reflective and lens optical component through a first surface of the first free-form reflective and lens optical component; And
And at least a second projector optically coupled to the second free-form reflective and lens optical component through a first surface of the second free-form reflective and lens optical component. 834. The method of claim 834,
Further comprising at least one wavelength selective material carried by at least one of the first or second free-form reflective and lens optical components. 834. The method of claim 834,
At least a first wavelength selective material carried by the first freestyle reflection and lens optical components; And
Further comprising at least a second wavelength selective material carried by the second free-form reflective and lens optical components,
Wherein the first wavelength selective material selects a first set of wavelengths and the second wavelength selective material selects a second set of wavelengths,
The second set of wavelengths differing from the first set of wavelengths. 84. The method of claim 835,
At least a first polarizer carried by the first freestyle reflection and lens optical components; And
Further comprising at least a second polarizer carried by the second free-form reflective and lens optical components,
Wherein the first polarizer has a different polarization orientation than the second polarizer. 53. The method of claim 435,
Wherein the optical fiber cores are in the same fiber cladding. 53. The method of claim 435,
Wherein the optical fiber cores are in separate fiber cladding. 42. The method of claim 427,
Wherein the optical fiber cores are in the same fiber cladding. 42. The method of claim 427,
Wherein the optical fiber cores are in separate fiber cladding. 41. The method of claim 417,
Wherein the optical fiber cores are in the same fiber cladding. 41. The method of claim 417,
Wherein the optical fiber cores are in separate fiber cladding. 79. The method of claim 80,
Wherein the perspective adjustment module indirectly tracks perspective adjustments by tracking the vergence or gaze of the user's eyes. 80. The method of claim 79,
Wherein the partial reflective mirror has a relatively high reflectance for polarization of light provided by the light source and a relatively low reflectance for other polarization states of light provided by the outer world. 80. The method of claim 79,
Wherein the plurality of partial reflective mirrors comprise a dielectric coating. 80. The method of claim 79,
Wherein the plurality of reflective mirrors have a relatively high reflectance for the waveguides with respect to the wavelengths of light provided by the light source and a relatively low reflectance for other wavelengths of light provided by the outer world, For the system. 78. The method of claim 77,
The VFE is a deformable mirror,
Wherein the surface shape of the deformable mirror can be changed over time. 78. The method of claim 77,
The VFE is a electrostatically operated membrane mirror,
The waveguide or additional transparent layer comprises one or more substantially transparent electrodes,
Wherein the voltage applied to the one or more electrodes electrostatically deforms the membrane mirror. 69. The method of claim 68,
Wherein the light source is a scanning optical display,
Wherein the VFE changes focus on a line segment basis. 69. The method of claim 68,
Wherein the waveguide comprises an exit pupil dilation function,
Wherein the incoming ray is split and out-bound as a plurality of rays exiting the waveguide at a plurality of locations. 71. The method of claim 70,
In order for the optical image magnification to appear to remain substantially fixed while adjusting the focus level, before the waveguide receives one or more of the optical patterns, the image data is changed according to the change of the optical image magnification and the change Wherein the virtual content is scaled by the processor to compensate for the virtual content. 69. The method of claim 68,
And wherein the first focus level is collimated. 69. The method of claim 68,
Wherein the VFE is incorporated into the waveguide. 69. The method of claim 68,
Wherein the VFE is separate from the waveguide. 93. The method of claim 93,
Wherein the perspective adjustment module indirectly tracks perspective adjustments by tracking the vergence or gaze of the user's eyes. 93. The method of claim 92,
Wherein the partial reflective mirror has a relatively high reflectance for polarization of light provided by the light source and a relatively low reflectance for other polarization states of light provided by the outer world. 93. The method of claim 92,
Wherein the plurality of partial reflective mirrors comprise a dielectric coating. 89. The method of claim 90,
Wherein the plurality of reflective mirrors have a relatively high reflectance for the waveguides with respect to the wavelengths of light provided by the light source and a relatively low reflectance for other wavelengths of light provided by the outer world, For the system. 83. The method of claim 81,
The VFE is a deformable mirror,
Wherein the surface shape of the deformable mirror can be changed over time. 83. The method of claim 81,
The VFE is a electrostatically operated membrane mirror,
The waveguide or additional transparent layer comprises one or more substantially transparent electrodes,
Wherein the voltage applied to the one or more electrodes electrostatically deforms the membrane mirror. 83. The method of claim 81,
Wherein the light source is a scanning optical display,
Wherein the VFE changes focus on a line segment basis. 83. The method of claim 81,
Wherein the waveguide comprises an exit pupil dilation function,
Wherein the incoming ray is split and out-bound as a plurality of rays exiting the waveguide at a plurality of locations. 83. The method of claim 81,
In order for the optical image magnification to appear to remain substantially fixed while adjusting the focus level, before the waveguide receives one or more of the optical patterns, the image data is changed according to the change of the optical image magnification and the change Wherein the virtual content is scaled by the processor to compensate for the virtual content. 69. The method of claim 68,
And wherein the first focus level is collimated. 107. The method of claim 106,
Wherein the perspective adjustment module indirectly tracks perspective adjustments by tracking the vergence or gaze of the user's eyes. 105. The method of claim 105,
Wherein the partially reflecting mirror has a relatively high reflectance for polarization of light provided by the light source and a relatively low reflectance for other polarization states of light provided by the outside world. 105. The method of claim 105,
Wherein the plurality of partial reflective mirrors comprise a dielectric coating. 104. The method of claim 103,
Wherein the plurality of reflective mirrors have a relatively high reflectance for the waveguides with respect to the wavelengths of light provided by the light source and a relatively low reflectance for other wavelengths of light provided by the outer world, For the system. 95. The method of claim 94,
The VFE is a deformable mirror,
Wherein the surface shape of the deformable mirror can be changed over time. 95. The method of claim 94,
The VFE is a electrostatically operated membrane mirror,
The waveguide or additional transparent layer comprises one or more substantially transparent electrodes,
Wherein the voltage applied to the one or more electrodes electrostatically deforms the membrane mirror. 95. The method of claim 94,
Wherein the light source is a scanning optical display,
Wherein the VFE changes focus on a line segment basis. 95. The method of claim 94,
Wherein the waveguide comprises an exit pupil dilation function,
Wherein the incoming ray is split and out-bound as a plurality of rays exiting the waveguide at a plurality of locations. 95. The method of claim 94,
In order for the optical image magnification to appear to remain substantially fixed while adjusting the focus level, before the waveguide receives one or more of the optical patterns, the image data is changed according to the change of the optical image magnification and the change Wherein the virtual content is scaled by the processor to compensate for the virtual content. 95. The method of claim 94,
And wherein the first focus level is collimated.

Images